Cosmographie in four bookes : containing the chorographie and historie of the whole vvorld, and all the principall kingdomes, provinces, seas and isles thereof / by Peter Heylyn.

COSMOGRAPHIE, The Fourth Book: PART I. (Book 4)

CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHIE and HISTORIE OF AFRICK, And all the chief Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof. (Book 4)

OF AFRICK.

AFRICK is bounded on the East by the Red-Sea, and Bay of Arabia, by which parted from Asia; on the West, by the main Atlantick Ocean, interposing betwixt it and America; on the North, by the Mediterranean Sea, which divides it from Europe and Anatolia; and on the South, with the Aethiopick Ocean, separating it from Terra Australis incognita, or the Southern Conti∣nent; Parted from all the rest of the World, except Asia only, to which joyned by a narrow Isthmus not above 60 miles in length. Memorable for the great design which Cleopatra the last Queen of Egypt had upon it, which in brief was this: When Mark Anthonie was encountred by Augustus in the Naval battel of Actium, Cleopatra fearing the success, fled through the midst of all his Fleet, with the 60 Gallies which were appointed for her guard; Being come to the North part of this Isthmus, she gathered together all her portable treasures, and intended to hoist her shipping out of the Mediterranean, and hale them over the Land to the Red-Sea; whence she had purposed to take sail, and together with her Sweet∣heart Anthonie and some other choicest friends, to seek out some other place of dwelling far enough from the Romans; But from this, Anthonie, who fled after her, and vainly hoped for a change of for∣tunes, did at last disswade her.

The Form hereof is like a Pyramis reversed; the Basis of which, from Tanger on the Streit of Gi∣braltar to the point where it joyneth unto Asia, is reckoned at the breadth of 1920 Italian miles; the Conus of it very narrow; But from the Conus or Pyris to the most Northern part of the B••sis, it extendeth it self the space of 4155 miles, being much lesse then Asia, and far bigger then Europe.

By the Grecians it is called most commonly Libya, (of which more hereafter) part of it taken for the whole: by the Aethiopians, Alkebu-lam; by the Indians, Besecath. But the most noted name thereof is Africa, which Josephus out of Cleodenus and Polyhistor, deriveth from Epher or Apher, one of the Nephews of Abraham by Midian the son of Keturah. The Arabians, by whom it is called Ifrichia, derive it from the Verb Faruch, signifying to divide; because more visibly divided both

from their own Country, and the rest of the World, then any other part thereof which was known unto them. Some of the Greek Fablers setch it from one Afer a Companion of Hercules, whom he attended unto Spain. Some fetch it out of Aphar, an Hebrew word, signifying Dust, agreeable to its sandie and dustie soile: Festus an old Grammarian, from A Privativum, and the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which imports a Country void of cold, as suitable to the fiery temper of the Aire. By Bochartus, who brings all from the old Phaenician, it is said to be derived from Peruc, Spica, an Ear of corn; which mollified into Feric, came at last to Africk, that is to say, a Country plentifull in Corn. Which Ety∣mologie of his may receive some countenance from that great plenty of Corn which was bred in this Country, especially in those parts hereof which the Romans called the Proper Africk, whereof we shall speak more when we come to Barbary; the whole Continent taking from that Province the name of Africk. But in my mind, (if that from the Hebrew Epher or Aphar, be not worth accepting) I should prefer the Etymon of Festus before any other; unlesse we might be sure that Carthage an∣ciently was called Africa, as Suidas telleth us it was: for then without all peradventure we would seek no further. For other more particular names by which it hath been called in some elder writers, i.e. Olympia, Oceanica, Eschatica, Coryphe, Ammonis, Hesperia, Ortygia, and perhaps some others, it is enough to our design to take notice of them.

It is situate for the most part under the Torrid Zone, the Aequator crossing it almost in the very midst; and for that cause supposed by many of the Ancients not to be inhabited at all, or but very ••hinly in the middle and more Southern parts of it; or if at all, with such strange people, as hardly did deserve to be counted men. Pomponius among others was of this opinion, guessing the inward parts thereof to be taken up by such strange Brutes, as the Cynophanes, who had heads like dogs: 2. The Sciapodae, who with the shadow of their Foot could and did use to hide themselves from the heats of the Sun: 3. The Gamosaphantes, a naked people, ignorant of the use of weapons, and there∣fore fearfully avoiding the sight of men: 4. The Blemmyae, who being without heads, had their eyes and mouths in their breasts: 5. The Aegypani, who had no other humane quality to declare them to be men, but the shape and making of their bodies. These people (as they thought) possessed some small portion of the mid-land parts of this great Country; the rest they knew not, or conceived to be unhabitable, in regard of the great heats thereof. But late discoveries and navigations have found the contrary; the Country proving in most parts to be well inhabited; and the coolnesse of the nights, by mists, dewes, and gentle gales of wind, to mitigate the heat of the day.

Quod{que} die Solis vehementi excanduit aestu, Humida nox resicit, paribus{que} refrigerat horis.

That is to say,

What the Sun burns by day, the Night renewes, And doth as much refresh with moystning dewes.

For notwithstanding that it be in some places full of sandy desarts, a disease incident to some parts of Arabia, Persia, and other Countries of a more Northernly situation; yet it is said by some, who speak it upon knowledge, that the greatest part of those Regions which lie under the Line or near it, (both in America and here) have so many goodly Fountains, Rivers, and little Brooks, such abundance of Cedars and other stately Trees of shade, so many sorts of delicate Fruits ever bearing and at all times beautified with blossoms; as may make them hold comparison with any others supposed to be of a more temperate situation.

But as was said before, the Ancients knew not much of this Country, and therefore spoke upon conjecture, or more doubtful hear-say. For though Hanno a noble Carthaginian, imployed by that State, discovered much of the Western Shores of this great Peninsula, yet he ventured not much into the Land; nor did his Journal (either suppressed by the Romans, or not much took notice of) give any great light to other Nations to pursue those Voyages; being writ in the Carthaginian tongue, but since translated into Greek, and published at Basil by Sigismund Gelenius, ann. 1533. As little credit did it find in former times, that some Phoenicians in the dayes of Pharao Neco, passing down the Red Sea, should sail about the Coasts of Africk to the Streits of Gibraltar, and so return again to Egypt by the Mediterranean; as we find in Herodotus, that they did. But what those Ages dis∣believed or esteemed impossible, is now grown ordinary; the Circumnavigations about this Country being very frequent, since first performed by Vasques de Gama, an Adventurous Portugal, in the year 1497. by means whereof these latter Ages are better instructed in the particulars of it then the for∣mer were; who knew not much beyond the limits of the Roman Empire and some parts adjoyning upon Egypt, more then the strange Beasts, and more strange Reports which they had from hence, occasioning hereby the By-word, Africa semper aliquid apportat novi.

Touching the State of Christianity in this great Continent, it is very weak; most of those Regions which Christian religion had once gained from Idol••try, Mahometism having since regained from Chri∣stianity: Insomuch that not only the North-part of Africk near the Mediterranean. from Spain to E∣gypt, where the Gospel once so exceedingly flourished, that three hundred Catholike Bishops were at one time banished thence by Gensericus King of the Vandals, is at this present utterly void of Christi∣ans, (except some few Towns belonging to the King of Spain) but even in all this vast Country, thrice as big as Europe, there is not any one Region entirely Christian, but the Kingdom of Habassia only, and perhaps not that; none where the Christians are intermingled with Mah••metans, but only

Egypt; nor where mingled with Idolaters, but in Longo and Angola, and some few Towns upon those Coasts in the hands of the Portugals. So little benefit have those Nations gotten by our late Discoveries; it being Gain, not Godlinesse, which the Merchant aims at.

The Nations inhabiting this Country, or dispersed in it, may be reduced to Africans properly so called, Egyptians, Habassines, Arabians, Jewes•• and some Europaean Christians: the Europaean Chri∣stians only in their Forts and Garrisons, the Jewes in all the good Towns where Trade is stirring, the Arabians chiefly on the Sea-coasts bordering on the Red-Sea, but wandering in great herds or com∣panies all about the Country with their wives and children; the Habassines and Egyptians in their severall kingdoms: The Africans again subdivided into Moors and Caferes, of which the Moors are wholly under the Law of Mahomet the Caferes dwelling in the inland and more Southern parts, not discovered antiently, in their wonted Gentilisme. Accordingly, the Languages herein spoken are different also; The Portugal or Spanish being used by the Europaeans; 2. The Chaldee or Syriack by the Iewes; 3. The Arabick by those of that Nation, and in all Barbary except Morocco only; 4. The Habassine, and 5. The Egyptian, in those Kingdoms; 6. That called Aquel-amarig, or the Noble language, supposed to be the natural and original language of the Roman Africans, intermixt with some Arabian words, and spoken generally in Morocco, and so amongst some of the inhabitants of Barbary nearest to Mount Atlas; 7. That named Sungai, used in Tombutum, Guinea, and others of the people of the Land of Negroes; and 8. That called Gubeo, spoke by those of Aithiopia in∣ferior, and such of the Land of Negroes as lie next unto it.

In reference to the State of the Roman Empire, it contained only the Dioceses of Egypt, Africk, and part of the Diocese of Spain. The Diocese of Egypt subdivided into the Provinces of, 1. Libya su∣perior, 2. Libya inferior, 3. Thebais, 4. Augustanica, 5. Arcadia, and 6. Aegyptus specially so called; distinguished by other names in the Nicene Council: That of Africk, into Tripolitana, 2. Byzacena, 3. Zeugitana, 4. Numidia, 5. Mauritania Caesariensis, 6. and Mauritania Sitifensis; that other part of Mauritania, called Tingitana, being laid to the Diocese of Spain. The rest of this Peninsula, as they never conquered, so it never was much taken into consideration. But being more perfectly discovered now then in former times, (though not so perfectly as that I can be able to promise an exact accompt of it) it is divided commonly into these seven parts; 1. Egypt, 2. Barbary or the Roman Africk, 3. Numidia, 4. Libya, neither of which the same with those of the antient Romans, 5. Terra Nigritarum 6. Aethiopia superior, and 7. Aethiopia inferior. Such of the Islands as do pro∣perly belong unto any of these, shall make up the eighth. In the Descriptions whereof we will fol∣low the Method of Plautanus, and begin with Egypt, as being peopled and possessed before all the residue.

OF EGYPT.

EGYPT is bounded on the East with Idumaea, and the Bay of Arabia; on the West with Barbary, Numidia, and part of Libya; on the North with the Mediterranean Sea; on the South with Aethiopia Superior, or the Abassine Empire.

This Country in the holy Scriptures is called Misraim, from Misraim the son of Chus, and grand∣son of Cham, by whom first planted after the flood; the footsteps of which name do remain amongst the Arabians, who still call it Misre. Named in the same regard in the Book of Psalms, the Land of Ham; a name retained in some of the sacred offices of the old Egyptians, where (as Plutarch wit∣nesseth) it was called Chemia, for Chamia no doubt, as that from Cham or Ham, the first stock of their nation. In Prophane Authors it hath had the several names of, 1. Aeria, from the serenity of the Aire, which is never clouded; 2. Potamia, from the propinquitie of the Sea, washing two sides of it; 3. Ogygia, from Ogyges a supposed king thereof; 4. Melampodus, from the black colour of the soil; 5. Osiria, from their God Osiris, here in high esteem; and finally, 6. Aegyptus, which in the end prevailed over all the rest, either from Aegyptus the Brother of Danaus once King hereof, (in the stories of this Nation better known by the name of Rameses) or from Aegyptus the old name of the River Nilus, by whose annual overflowings made both rich and famous; and of the soil and rubbish which that River brought with it from the higher Countries, it was by some supposed to have been raised into firm land and gained out of the sea; Called therefore in some Writers by the name of Nili donum, or the gift of Nilus. Yet some there be who would have it called Aegyptus for Aigupthus, and that derived from Ai, and Coptus, which signifieth the Land or Country of Coptus, that being supposed to have been antiently the chief City of it. And some again will have the name derived from Chioth, by which the Aegyptians call themselves to this very day.

It conteineth in length from the Mediterranean to the City of Asna, or Sy••••e, bordering on Ae∣thiopia, 562 Italian miles; in breadth (exclusively of Cyrene and Libya) from Rosetta unto Damiata, or from the most Westerly Branch of Nilus to the farthest East, 160 of the same miles; to which the adding of those two Provinces make a great accession: Situate under the second and fi••t Climates, so that the longest day in Summer is but 13 houres and an half.

By reason of this Southernly situation of it, the Air is here very hot and offensive, so that to avoid the insupportable heats thereof, and to have the benefit of some fresh wind, the Inhabitants are ac∣customed to build high Towers in all their Towns, on which they use to solace and refresh themselves.

The soyl made fruitfull by the overflowings of Nilus, (whereof more anon) is so exceeding plenti∣full of all sorts of Grain, that it was called Horreum populi Romani, the Granarie or Store-house of the People of Rome: which Citie it did annually furnish with four moneths provision; insomuch that it was said by Plinie, that the greatness of the Roman Empire could not long continue without the corn and wealth of Egypt, the plenty or famine of that City depending wholly on this Country. It abounds also with rich Pastures, in which they feed great store of Camels, Horses, Asses, Oxen, Sheep, and Goats, greater of growth then usually in most places else; and by reason of the moorishness of the Country, they have great store of Fowls: Of Poultrie they have also good numbers about their houses, hatched in a different manner from all other Countries, not by the sitting of the Hen, but the heat of Furnaces, or Ovens; in which their eggs are orderly laid in dung, and by a gentle heat brought to animation. It is also liberally furnished with great plenty of Mettals, some precious Stones, good Wines, and the choicest Fruits, as Limons, Orenges, Pomgranats, Citrons, Figs, Cher∣ries, and such as these, excellent both for taste and colour; and of Palm-trees a great abundance; of which though we have spoke before, yet we shall here more fully declare the nature and strange pro∣perties of them: They grow in couples, Male and Female, both thrust forth Gods full of seed, but the Female is only fruitfull, and that not except growing by the Male, and having his seeds mixt with hers. The pith of these Trees is an excellent Sallad, better then an Hartichoke, which in taste it very much resembleth. Of the branches they make Bedsteds, Latices, &c. of the leaves, Baskets, Mats, Fans, &c. of the outward husk of the Cod, Cordage; of the inner, Brushes. The fruit it bears, best known by the name of Dates, are in taste like Figs: and finally, it is said to yield whatsoever is necessary to the life of Man. It is the nature of this Tree, though never so ponderous a weight were put upon it, not to yield to the burden, but still to resist the heaviness of it, and to endeavour to lift and raise it self the more upwards. For this cause planted in Church-yards in the Eastern Coun∣tries, as an Embleme of the Resurrection: instead whereof we use the Ewe-tree in these cold Regi∣ons. For the same reason, given to Conquerours as a token of Victory; it being the Embleme of Hie∣roglyphick of a Souldiers life. Hence figuratively used for precedency; as, Huic equidem consilio palmam do, in Terence; sometimes for the Victory it self; as, Non auferent tamen hanc palmam, in Plinic, & plurimarum palmarum homo, for a man that had won many prizes in the Fence-School, as in Tully, pro Roscio; more naturally for the sign of Victory, as in that of Horace,

—Palmaque nobilis, Terrarum Dominos evehit ad Deos.

That is to say,

The Palm, of victory a signe, Equal's men to the Powers Divine.

The People, though the Countrie lie in the same Clime with Barbarie, are not black, but tawnie, or Olive-coloured; affirmed by Pomponius Mela to weep and mourn over the bodies of their dead, daubed over with dung; to have held it a great impiety to burn or bury them, but having imbalmed them to lay them in some inward room of their Houses: the men to keep themselves at home, for the houshold businesses, the women to follow merchandise and affairs abroad; the men to carry burdens upon their heads, and the women theirs upon their shoulders: Antipodes in these last to most other Nations. But certainly they were a witty and ingenious People, the first Inventers of Geomo∣try, Arithm••tick, Physick, as also of Astronomy, Necromancy, and Sorcery. They first taught the use of Letters to the neighbouring Phoenicians, by them imparted to the Greeks. Accustomed at the first to express their conceits in the shape of Birds, Beasts, Trees, &c. which they termed Hiero∣glyphicks; of which two or three Examples out of Orus, will not be impertinent. For Eternity they painted the Sun and Moon, as things which they believed to have had no beginning, nor were likely to have any end: for a Year, they painted a snake, with his tail in his mouth, to shew how one year succeeding another, kept the World still in an endless circle. For a moneth, they painted a Palm-tree, because at every new Moon, it sendeth forth a new branch. For God, they painted a Falcon; as well for that he soared so high, as that he governeth the lesser birds. For integrity of life, they painted fire and water, both because these Elements are in themselves most pure, and because all other things are purified by them. For any thing that was abominable to the Gods, they painted a Fish, because in their Sacrifices the Priests never used them; and the like. From this manner of ex∣pressing ones self, the invention of Letters is thought to have had its original (though learnt by them no question of the children of Israel, when they lived amongst them:) the History whereof, take briefly and word for word, out of Tacitus. Primi per formas animalium Aegyptii, &c. The Egyptians first of all expressed the conceptions of the minde, by the shapes of beasts; and the most ancient monuments of mans memory, are seen graven in stones; and they say, that they are the first inventers of Letters. Then the Phoenicians, because they were strong at Sea, brought them into Gr••ece; and so they had the glory of that, which they received from others: For there goeth a re∣port, that Cadmus sailing thither in a Phoenician ship, was the Inventer of that Art among the Greeks, when they were yet unexpert and rude. Some report that Cecrops the Athenian, or Livius the The∣ban, and Palamedes the Graecian, did finde out sixteen Characters at the time of the Trojan War; and that afterward Simonides added the rest. But in Italy the Etrurians learned them of Demaratus the Corinthian; and the Aborigines, of Evander the Arcadian. So far Tacitus. That the Phoenicians

were the first inventers of Letters, I dare not affirm; and as backward am I to refer the glory hereof to the Egyptians; for certainly the Hebrews were herein skilled before either: yet that the Phoe∣nicians were herein School-masters to the Greeks, I think I may with safety maintain, having Lucan in consent with Tacitus.

Phoenices primi (fama si creditur) ausi Mansuram rudibus vocem signare figuris.

Phoenicians first (if fame may credit have) Dar'd in rude Characters our words ingrave.

Of this minde also is Isidore of Sevill in the first book of Originations, who also addeth, that for that cause the Fronts of Books, and the Titles of Chapters were written in red letters, as it is by some still in use. Hinc est quod & Phoeniceo colore librorum capita describantur, quia ab ipsis literae initium habuere, cap. 3. As for these less vulgar Letters which the Latines call Cyphrae, and whereof every ex∣ercised Statesman have peculiar to himself; they were first invented by Julius Caesar, when he first began to think of the Roman Monarchy; and were used by him in his Letters to his more private and tryed friends, that if by misfortune they should be intercepted, the contents of them should not be understood; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, ne obvia literarum lectio cuivis esset. Augustus one of the greatest Politicians of the World had another kinde of obscure writing; for in his Letters of more secrecy and importance, he always used 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, to put the letter immediatly following in the order of the Alphabet, for that which in ordinary writing he should have used. As for Brachygraphie, or the Art of writing by short Characters, so usefull for the taking of a Speech or Sermon as it is spoken: I finde in Dion, that Moecenas that great favorite of Au∣gustus Caesar, and favourer of Learning, did first invent them, ad celeritatem scribendi, for the speedier dispatch of writing: 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 (they are the very words of my Au∣thor) 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Isidor in the second Chapter of his book above mentioned, ascribeth it to Aquila the Libertus or freed man of this Moecenas: and to Tertius Persannius, and Philargius, who added to this invention. Yet had all they their chief light in it from Tullius Tito, a freed-man of Cicero's who had undertaken and compassed it in the Prepositions, but went no further. At the last it was perfected by Seneca, who brought this Art into order and method; the whole volume of his contractions consisting of 5000 words. Deinde Seneca contracto omnium, digestóque & aucto numero, opus effecit in quinque millia. But now I make haste to take a survey of these Egyptians as they stand at the present, much differing from the ingenuity and abilities of their Predecessors.

For such as have observed the nature of the Modern Egyptians, affirm them to have much degene∣rated from the worth of their Ancestors, prone to innovations devoted to luxury, cowardly, cruel, addicted naturally to cavill, and to detract from whatsoever is good and eminent. In their dealing with other men more observant then faithfull, of a wit much inclining to craftiness, and very eager on their profit: Of person, of a mean stature, tawnie of complexion, and spare of body, but active and quick of foot. Such as inhabit in the Cities apply themselves to merchandise; grow rich by Trading; reasonably well habited, and not much differing from the Turks in their dress and Fa∣shion. Those in the Country who betake themselves to Husbandry, affirmed to be a savage and nasty People, crusted over with dirt, and stinking of smoak; sit company for none but those of their own condition. Nothing now left amongst them of the Arts of their Ancestors but an affectation which they have unto Divinations; to Fortune-telling great pretenders, by which, and by some cheating∣tricks in which very well practised, great numbers of them wander from one place to another, and so get their livelyhood: occasioning the vagabonds and straglers of other Nations, who pretend unto the same false Arts, to assume their names. The whole body of the Inhabitants now an Hochpot or medley of many Nations, Moors, Arabians, Turks; the natural Egyptian making up the least part of the reckoning.

The Women of the same complexion with the men, but well formed and featured, did they not too much affect a seeming corpulency; which if they cannot get in flesh, they will have in cloaths. Very fruitfull in child bearing, and quick of dispatch when they are in labour: some of them ha∣ving three or four children at a Birth; those that are born in the eighth moneth living to good Age, and not in danger of death, as in other Countries. Such of them as dwell in Cities, cover their faces with black Cypres bespotted with red; their armes, and ancles, garnished with bracelets and hoops of gold, silver, or some other Mettal. Those in the Country, for a vail use some dirty clout, having holes onely for their eyes, which little is too much to see and abstain from loathing. Both in the City and the Country, contrary to the custom in all places else, the women use to make water standing, and the men couring on their knees.

The old Egyptians were so eminent in Arts and Learning, that from them Pythagoras and Demo∣critus learnt their Philosophy; Lycurgus, Solon, and Plato their Forms of Government. Orpheus and Homer their Poetical fictions of the Gods. Particularly, here ••lourished Aristarchus that famous and learned Grammari••n, 2. Herodian, a diligent Student and searcher into curious ••rts, 3. Ammonius, the Master of Plotinus, 4. Didymus, surnamed Chalcenteros, for his indefatigable industry in several Sci∣ences, 5. Manethon, an old Historian, of whom we have nothing but some fragments, 6. Appianus, an Historian of a later date, whose works are extant, 7. Didymus the Grammarian, 8. Cl. Ptolomaeus,

the Geographer; 9 Achilles Statius the Poet; 10. And before all, the profound Philosopher Mercurius, ••••••named Trismegistus. And after their conversion to the faith of Christ, 1. Pantaenus, the first Reader of Diviniti•• in the Schools of Alexandria; 2. Origen, and 3. Clemens Alexandrinus, both sk••lled in the universality of Learning; 4. Dionysius; 5. Athanasius, and 6. Cyril; all three Bishops of Alexandria, and the glories of their severall times. Now nothing but ignorance and Barbarism to be found amongst them.

The Christian faith was first here planted by S. Mark, whom all Antiquity maketh the first Bishop of Alexandria. His successors, till the time of Heraclus and Dionysius, chosen continually out of the Presbyterie or Cathedral. Clergie; afterwards out of the Clergie at large. Their Jurisdi∣ction setled by a ••anon of the Council of Nice, over all the Churches in the whole Diocese of Egypt, (taking the word Diocese in the Civil notion) containing Libya, Pentapolis, and Egypt specially so called; to which, though Epiphanius addes Thebais, Maraeotica, and Ammoniaca, yet he addes nothing in effect. Thebais and Maraeotica being parts of Egypt, as Ammoniaca was of Libya. After∣wards the Aethiopian or Abassine Churches became subject to this Patriarch also, and do acknow∣ledge to this day some relation to him. By the coming in of the Saracens, and the sub••ugation of this Country, Christianity fell here into great decay; languishing so sensibly since those times, especially since the conquest of it by the Turks, that whereas Brochardus in his time reckoned three hundred thousand Christians, in the last estimate which was made of them, they were found to be but fifty thousand. This small remainder of them, commonly called Cophti, either from the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, scindo, because they retained the use of Circumcision with their Christianity, or from Coptus a chief Town in Egypt, in which many of them did reside; or finally by abbreviation from Aegop••to, corrupted from Aegyptii, their own National name. They are all Jacobites in Sect, from whom they differ notwithstanding in some particulars, in some from all other Christian Churches, in many from the Church of Rome. The points most proper to them, 1. Using Circumcision with their Baptism, but rather as a National then Religious custome; though in that sense also laid aside, as is said by some, by the perswasion of some Legates from the Pope of Rome, in a Synod held in Caire, An. 1583. 2. Conferring all sacred Orders under the Priesthood, on Infants immediately after haptism; their Parents, till they come to sixteen years of age, performing what they promised in their behalf, viz. Chastitie, fasting on Wednesday and Friday, and the four Lents of the year. 3. Reputing Baptism not to be of any efficacie, except ministred by the Priest, in the open Church, in what extremity so∣ever. 4. And yet not baptizing any Children till the sortieth day, though they die in the interim. 5. Giving to Infants the Sacrament of the Eucharist, assoon as Christened. 6. Contracting marriages even in the second Degree of Consanguinitie, without dispensation. 7. Observing not the Lords day, nor any of the Festivials, except only in Cities. 8. And in their Liturgies, reading the Gospel written by Nicodemus. The points wherein they differ from the Church of Rome, 1. Administring the Sa∣crament of the Lords Supper under both kinds. 2. Administring in leavened bread. 3. Admitting neither Extreme unction, nor the use of the Eucharist to those that are sick. 4. Nor Purgatory, nor Prayer for the dead 5. Not using Elevation in the act of Administring. And 6. Reckoning the Ro∣man Church for Heretical and esteeming no better of the Latines then they do of the Jewes. In these opinions they continue hitherto against all Opponents and perswasions: For though Baronius in the end of the sixth Tome of his Annals, hath registred an Ambassage from Marcus the then Patriarch of Alexandria, to Pope Clement the 8. wherein he is said to have submitted himself and the Churches of Egypt to the Pope of Rome; yet upon further search made, it was found but a Cheat, devised to hold up the reputation of a sinking cause. The Patriarch of Alexandria still adhereth to his own Au∣thority; though many of late, by the practise and solicitation of some busie Friars, have been drawn to be of the Religion of the Church of Rome, and to use her Liturgies.

What their Religion was before Christianity, is obvious to the eye of a vulgar Reader; even the worst of Gentilism; these People not only worshipping the Sun, Moon, and the Stars of Heaven, creatures of greatest use and glory; nor only sacrificing to Jupiter, Hercules, Apollo, and the rest of the Gods, (many of whom were Authors in their severall times of some publike benefit to mankind) as did other Gentiles; but attributing Divine honours to Crocodiles, Snakes, Serpents, Garlick. Leeks and Onions. For which, as worthily condemned by the Christian Fathers, so most deserved••y exposed unto publike scorn, by the pens of the Poets.

Porrum & caepe nesas violare, & laedere morsu. Felices populi, quibus haec nascuntur in Hortis Numina.—Quis nescit qualia demens Aegyptus portenta col••t, &c.

Which may be rendred to this purpose.

To bite an Onion or a Leek, is more Then deadly sinne. The Numen they adore Growes in their Gardens. And who doth not know What monstro••s Shapes for Gods in Egypt go?

But the God most esteemed by them, and by all sorts of the Egyptians the most adored, was Apis, a coal black Oxe, with a white star in his forehead, the Effigies of an Eagle on his back, and two hairs

only in his tail. But it seemeth his Godship was not so much respected by Strangers. For Cambyses when he conquered Egypt, ran him with his sword thorow the thigh and caused all his Priests to be scourged: And Augustus being here, would not vouchsafe to see him, saying, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that the Gods and not the Oxen of Egypt were the object of his devotions. A speech most truly worthy so brave an Emperour.

Amongst the Rarities of this Country, some were the works of nature, and some of industry and magnificence. Of this last kinde, I reckon the Labyrinth, the Pyramides, and the Ph••ros; all of them admirable in their several kindes, the envy of the Ages past, and the astonishment of the pre∣sent. Of the Labyrinth we shall speak anon, in the course of our business. Look we now on the Pyramides, many in number, three most celebrated and one the principal of all, situate on the South of the City of Memphis, and on the Western banks of Nilus. This last, the chief of the Worlds seven Wonders, square at the bottom, is supposed to take up eight acres of ground. Every square 300. single paces in length, ascended by 255. steps, each step above three Foot high, and a breadth proportionable; growing by degrees narrower and narrower till we come to the top, and at the top consisting but of three stones onely, yet large enough for 60. men to stand upon. No stone so little in the whole as to be drawn by any of our Carriages, yet brought thither from the Arabian Mountains. How brought, and by what Engine mounted, is an equal wonder. Built for the Se∣pulchre of Cheops, an Egyptian King (as were the rest for others of those mighty Princes) who imployed in it day by day twenty yeers together, no fewer then 366000. men continually working on it. The charges which they put him to, in no other food then Garlick, Radishes, and Onions, being computed at a thousand and eight hundred Talents. The next to this in bulk and beauty, is said to be the work of a daughter of Cheops, enabled (as Herodotus writeth) both to finish her Fathers under∣taking, and raise her own unto the height, by the prostitution of her body, requiring but one stone towards the work from each one of her Customers; but the tale unlikely. Nor is it of a greater Truth. though affirmed by Josephus, and supposed by many good Divines, that the drudgery put up∣on the Israelites did concern these Pyramides: the Materials of these works being stone; their im∣ployment, brick: But past all doubt, advanced by those considerate Princes upon good advice, and not for ostentation only of their power and glories. For by this means they did not only eternize their memory to succeeding Ages, but for the present kept the Subject from sloth and idleness; who being a People prone unto Innovations, were otherwise like enough to have fed that sin in the change of Government, if not thus prudently diverted.

Next these Pyramides, I place the Isle and Tower of Pharos, the Island opposite unto Alexandria, once a mile distant from the Land, but joyned to the Continent by Cleopatra on this occasion. The Rh••dians then Lords of the Sea, used to exact some tribute or acknowledgement out of every Island within those Seas; and consequently out of this. Their Ambassadors sent unto Cleopatra to demand this tribute, she detained with her seven days, under colour of celebrating some solemn Festivals; and in the mean time, by making huge dams and banks in the Sea, with incredible both charge and speed, united the Island to the shore. Which finished, she sent the Rhodians away empty-handed, with this witty jeere telling them that they were to take Toll of the Islands, and not of the Continent. A work of great rarity and magnificence, both for the bigness of it, taking up seven Furlongs of ground, and for that cause called Heptastadium, and that incredible speed wherewith it was finished. As for the Watch Tower, called in Greek and Latine Pharos, by the name of the Island, it was built by Pto∣lomy Philadelphus for the benefit of Sailors (the Seas upon that coast being very unsafe and full of Flats) to guide them over the Bar of Alexandria. Deservedly esteemed another of the Worlds se∣ven Wonders: the other five being 1. the Mausolaeum, 2. the Temple of Ephesus, 3. the Walls of Babylon, 4. the Colossus of Rhodes, and 5. the Statue of Jupiter Olympicus. This Watch-tower, or Pharos, was of wonderfull height, ascended by degrees, and having many Lanthorns at the top, wherein lights burned nightly, as a direction to such as sailed by Sea. The Materials were white marble the chief Architect, Sostratus of G••idos, who ingraved on the work this inscription, So∣stratus of Gnidos, the son of Dexiphanes, to the Gods protectors, for the safeguard of Sailers. This inscription he covered with plaister, and thereon ingraved the name and title of the King the Foun∣der: to the end that the Kings name being soon wasted and washed away, his own which was written in marble, might be eternized to posterity, as the Founder of it. Nigh unto this Pharos, Caesar pursuing Pompey into Egyp••, and having discontented the King thereof, by demanding pay for his Souldiers, had his Navy which here lay at anchor assaulted by Achilles, one of young Ptolo∣mies servants, Caesar himself being then in Alexandria. Hearing of the skirmish he hasted to the Pharos, meaning to succour his Navy in person: but the Egyptians making towards him on all sides, he was compelled to leap into the Sea, and swim for his life. And though to avoid their Darts he sometimes ducked: yet held he still his left hand above the water, and in it divers Books, which he carried safe unto his ships; and animating his men, got the victory. It is said that Egypt hath only two doors; the one by land, which is the strong Town of Peleusium, or Damiata; the other by wa∣ter, which is this Pharus: Tota Aegyptus maritimo accessu, Pharo; pedestre verò, Pelusio, velut clau∣stris munita existimatur, saith Oppius.

Amongst the rarities of Nature, we may reckon those strange Beasts and Fishes, proper almost unto this Country, i e. the Crocodile, the Ichneumon, the Hippopotamus (or Sea-horse) the Ibis, the Aspe, and many severall sorts of Serpents. To speak of which particularly were a work more pro∣per to a Natural History, then a Geographical. And yet the Crocodile, more proper unto Egypt then

all the rest, cannot be parted with in silence: A creature of a strange nature, hatched of an egg no bigger then that of a Turkie; and yet increasing to the length of thirty foot: his tail as long as all the rest of his body, with which he is accustomed to intail his prey, and draw it into the River: His feet armed with claws, and his back with impenetrable scales; his mouth so wide (of which he mo∣veth only the upper jaw) that he is able to swallow a whole Heifer: equally used to both Elements, but better sighted in the water, then on the land: Cowardly, though a Creature of prey, and such as usually flies from those which dare set upon him; and easily vanquished by the Dolphin, who swimming under the water woundeth him in the belly, where assaultable only. Whether so easily destroyed by the Ichncumon (a kinde of Water-Rat) skipping into his mouth, and gnawing his way out again, as old Writers say, hath of late been questioned. That which I look on as a rarity of the greatest moment, if not rather to be accounted supernatural) is that, about five miles from the City of Caire, there is a place in which on every Good Friday yeerly, there appear the heads, legs and arms of men rising out of the ground, to a very great number: which if a man draw near unto them, or touch any of them, will shrink again into the earth. Supposed by some to be an Imposture of some Water-men only, who stick them over-night in the sands, and keeping them secret to themselves, ob∣tain thereby the Ferrying over of many thousands of People, to behold the sight. But Stephen Du∣pleis, a sober and discerning man, in the opinion of Goulartius, who reports it from him, conceived otherwise of it, affirming surely that he was an eye-witness of the wonder, that he had touched di∣vers of these rising Members, and that as he was once so doing to the head of a childe, a man of Caire cried out unto him, Kali, Kali ante materasde, that is to say, Hold, hold, you know not what you do. A strange Fore-runner (if it be of undoubted credit) of the Resurrection of the whole Bo∣dy, presented yearly in the rising of these several parts.

Of less dispute, but not less rarity in nature, are these that follow. 1. That in all this Country it never raineth; or if a cloud do sometimes happen to dissolve upon them, it bringeth on their bodies innumerable sores, and strange diseases. 2. The annual overflowing of the River Nilus, and the many memorable things which are said to follow on the same. Of which it is thus said by Lucan;

Terra suis contenta bonis, non indiga mercis, Aut Jovis; in solo tanta est fiducia Nilo:

The earth content with its own wealth, doth crave No Forreign Mart, nor Jove himself; they have Their hopes alone in Nilus fruitfull wave.

This Nilus hath his head, not in the Mountains of the Moon, as the Ancients thought, but in the Lake Zembre, in Aethiopia Interior: and running in one continual Channel (excepting where it brancheth into little Islands, as it sometimes doth) till it washeth the mid-land of Egypt, is before its influx into the Sea, divided into seven great streams, opening into the Sea with so many mouths, namely, 1. Heracleoticum, 2. Bolviticum, 3. Schaniticum, 4. Patinicum, 5. Mendesium, 6. Caniticum, 7. Pelusaicum. The first and last of these currents (which are the only two now left) being far di∣stant from other, and growing into one, at the first point of the Rivers division, make that part of Egypt which is called Delta, because to such as come to this Country out of Greece, Italy, or Anatolia, it resembleth the Greek letter Δ. The other part is called Thebais, from Thebe, the chief City of it.

This Nilus from the 15. day of June, swelleth above his banks, for the space of 40. days; and in as many more, gathereth his waters again to their proper bounds. If it flow not to the height of fif∣teen Cubits, then the earth is deficient in her abundance of increase, for want of moisture: and if the waters surmount the superficies of the Earth, more than seventeen Cubits, then, like a drunken man, it cannot produce its natural operation, as having his stomack (as it were) over-laid, and sur∣charged with too much liquor: but if the mean be granted, there is no Country which can brag of the like Fertility; the Corn being all housed before the 20. of May. During this Inundation, they keep their beasts and cattel on the tops of such little hils, which either the Providence of Nature or the industry of man hath prepared for them; where they abide till the decrease of the Waters; and on these hills also stand the most of their Towns and Villages, appearing in the time of the Flood, like so many Islands, and holding a commerce and continual traffick by the entercourse of Boats and Shallops, by which they do transport their marketable commodities from one place to another. And if it chance at any time that the River doth not thus over-flow the Country, it is not only the Fore∣runner to a following dearth, but prognosticateth some ensuing mischief to the Prince and State. Confirmed by the testimony of good and creditable Authors; who have told us that in the 10. and 11. years of Cleopatra, the River increased not at all: that it was noted as a Foreteller of the Fall of those two great, but unfortunate Princes, Cleopatra & her Sweetheart Antonius. A second commodity which ariseth from the over-flowings of Nilus, is the health which it bringeth with it in most parts of the Country; the Plague which oftentimes miserably rageth upon the first day of the flood, abating in∣stantly: insomuch that whereas 500. may die of that disease in the City of Caire but the day before, there dieth not one of it on the day following. A third wonder in this River, is, that keeping its waters united in a body together after it falleth into the Sea; it changeth the colour of the Mediterranean fur∣ther then any part of it can be seen from the shore. Add unto these the many living creatures which the slime thereof engendreth on the withdrawing of the River to its natural channel: whereof Ovid thus,

Sic ubi deseruit madidos septemfluus agros Nilus, & antiquo sua flumina reddidit alveo, Plurima Cultores versis Animalia glebis Inveniunt.

Which I English thus.

So when the Seven-mouth'd Nile the fields forsakes, And to his ancient Channel him betakes, The Plough-men many living Creatures find, By turning up the mud that's left behind.

Amongst which Creatures so ingendered, are said to be such innumerable heaps of Frogs, that if Nature, or Divine Providence rather, did not furnish this Country with a proportionable number of Storks, by whom they are greedily devoured, the Plague of Frogs would come a second time upon them to their utter destruction. Now because Nilus runneth in its certain Channels, and that the People have no other water to make use of for all necessities, there are many By-trenches and deep Ditches cut in convenient places, (by the care and munificence of their Kings) to receive its waters, and to communicate them to the People, who know almost no other drink then the waters hereof, and indeed they need not, the water of this River being of such excellent both taste and vertue, that when Pescominus Niger saw his Souldiers murmure for want of Wine, What (said he) do you grumble for wine, having the waters of Nile to drink?

On the banks of the River stood that famous Labyrinth built by Psamniticus, which we have touched upon before; situate on the South of the Pyramides, and North of Arsinoe, or the City of Crocodiles. It contained within the compasse of one continued wall, a thousand houses, and twelve Royal Palaces, all covered with Marble, and had only one entrance, but innumerable turnings and returnings, sometimes one over another, and all in a manner invious to such as were not well ac∣quainted with them: The building more under the ground, then above; the Marble stones laid with such art, that neither Wood nor Cement was imployed in any part of the Fabrick; the Chambers so disposed, that the Doors upon their opening did give a report no lesse terrible then a crack of Thunder; the main Entrance all of White-marble, adorned with stately Columns, and most curious Imagerie: The end at length being attained, a pair of Stairs of 90 steps conducted into a gallant Portice, supported with Pillars of Theban stone; which was the entrance into a fair and spacious Hall, (the place of their generall Conventions) all of polished Marble, set out with the Statues of their Gods. A work which afterwards was imitated by Daedalus in the Cretane Labyrinth; though that fell as short of the glories of this, as Minos was inferior unto Psamniticus in power and riches.

On the Banks of this River also grew those sedgie Weeds called Papyri, of which Paper was made in former times: They divided it into thin flakes, (into which it naturally parteth) then laying them on a Table, and moyst'ning them with the glutinous waters of the River, they prested them to∣gether, and after dryed them in the Sun. By means of this Invention, Books being easier to be tran∣scribed and reserved then formerly, Ptolomie Philadelphus made his excellent Library at Alexandria: and understanding how Attalus King of Pergamus, by the benefit of this Egyptian Paper, strived to exceed him in that kind of magnificence, prohibited the carrying of it out of Egypt. Hereupon Attalus invented the use of Parchments, made of the skins of Calves and Sheep; from the materials called Membranae, and Pergamena from the place where they were invented. The convenience whereof was the cause that in short time the Egyptian Paper was worn out of use; in place whereof succeeded our Paper made of Rags, the Authors of which excellent Invention our Progenitors have forgotten to commit to memory. Before the use of these Papers and Parchments were first made known, I observe three wayes of writing amongst the Antients, (I hope I shall be pardoned this short digression.) 1. On the inward side of the Bark of a Tree, which is in Latine called Liber, and whence Books have the name of Libri. 2. On Tables framed out of the main body of a Tree, which being called Caudex, gave the Latines occasion to call a Book Codex. 3. They used to cover their Tables over with Wax, and thereon to write what they had to signifie, from whence a Letter-carrier was named Tabellarius. The Instrument wherewith they wrote, was a sharp-pointed Iron, which they called Stylus, a word now signifying (the Original derived from hence) the peculiar kind of Phrase which any man useth; as, Negligens stylus, in Quintilian; and Exercitatus stylus, in Cicero. I should have also noted, that they used sometimes to write in Leaves; That the Sibyls Oracles being so written and scattered abroad, had the name of Sibyllae Folia, and that from thence we have the phrase of a Leaf of Paper. But of this Argument enough.

Having thus done with the Rarities concerning Nilus, and that great increase of wealth which accrued thereby to all the Country, in the improvement of the natural commodities of the Earth: let us next look on the Red-Sea, and the great Riches which that brought unto this Kingdom, in the way of Trading. A Sea whereof we have spoke already, as to the reason of the name, the extent thereof, and the several Islands contained in it; and therefore shall not need to repeat it here. That which is proper to this Country, and to this alone, is the fame it hath for the miraculous passage of the Israelites through it as upon dry-land, and the drowning of Pharaohs Cenchres and all his people, at large commemorated in the books of Holy Scriptures: as also for that through it the Spices of India and Arabia were brought to Alexandria, and thence by the Venetians dispersed through all Eu∣rope, Africa, and Asia. I suppose I shall not do amisse to set down historically out of Galuano, a rela∣tion

of the beginning, continuance, and period of the Traffick through this Sea, by which all Europe formerly received so great commodity. Know then (saith he) that Ptolomie Philadelphus, 277 years before the Incarnation was the first that set on foot this Navigation: Cosir (of old called Myos-Hormos) on the sea-side, being the ordinary Haven, out of which they hoysed sail for India; and into which they re∣turned, full fraught with their commodities. From hence they were by land conveighed to Coptus, and so down the Nile to Alexandria: by which Traffick the City grew exceeding rich; insomuch that the Custom-house there yielded Ptol-Auletes 7 millions and an half of gold yearly. The Romans being Lords of Egypt, enhansed the Customs to double that sum: they sent into India every year (as Plinie witnesseth) 120 ships, whose lading was worth 1200000 Crowns; and there was made in return of every Crown, 100. When the Vandals, Lombards, Goths, and Moors had torn in peeces the Roman Empire, all commerce between Nations began to cease. At last perceiving the inconvenience, they began anew: conveighing the Indian commodities, partly by land, partly by water, unto Capha in Taurica Chersonesus, belonging to the Genoese: Next Trabezond was made the Mart-town, then Sarmachand in Zagatate, where the Indian, Turkish, and Persian Merchants met to barter wares: the Turks conveighing their merchandise to Damascus, Ba∣ratti, and Aleppo; from whence the Venetians transported it to Venice, making that the common Em∣porium of Christendome. Once again, viz. Anno 1300. the Soldans of Egypt restored the passage by the Red-Sea; which having continued more then 200 years, is now discontinued by the Portugals, Spaniards, English and Dutch, which bring them to their several homes by the back side of Africk: So that not only the Traffick of Alexandria is almost decayed, and the Riches of the Venetians much diminished; but the Drugs and Spices have lost much of their vertue, as impaired by too much moisture. So much saith he, touching the course and alteration of this Trading: to which I shall take leave to adde, That for the better and more quick return of such Commodities as were usually brought into this Sea, some of the Kings of Egypt attempted formerly to cut a main Channel from it, to the River Nilus, passable by Ships of greatest burden; the marks of whose proud attempts are remaining still. Sesostris was the first who designed the work, having before with good successe cut many Trenches from the River, and some Navigable, into many places of the Country; by which unprofitable Marishes were drained, the Country strengthened, Trade made easie, and the People better furnished with water then in former times. Darius the great Persian Monarch, seconded the same Project; so did one of the Ptolomies; The like is said of a Capricious Portugal in these later times. But they all gave it over on the same consideration, which was a fear lest by letting in the Red-Sea they might drown the Country, and perhaps make a second Deluge in the parts of Greece and Asia Minor which lay nearest to them; that Sea being found to be much higher then the Mediterranean, and the flats of Egypt.

But here we are to understand, that all which hitherto hath been spoken concerning Egypt, relates to Egypt strictly and specially so called, containing only so much of the Country of Egypt as lieth up∣on the Banks and Channels of the River Nilus; and not to all that tract of ground which lay betwixt the Red-Sea and the borders of Libya, which was reckoned in the compasse of the kingdom of Egypt; much lesse as comprehending Libya and Cyrene also, though now accounted Members of that great Body, and antiently parts or Provinces of the Diocese of it. For Egypt, in the largest sense and ac∣ception of the word, may be, and generally is divided into these three parts, viz. 1. Egypt, in the general notion, or the Kingdom of Egypt, extended on the Mediterranean from the borders of Idumaea to the the Roman Libya or Marmarica, lying Westward of the mouth of Nilus, called Heracleoticum, and on the borders of Aethiopia Superior, from the said Red-Sea, to the Country of Libya Interior. 2. Libya, or Marmarica, lying betwixt Egypt properly so called, and the Province of Cyrene, or Pen∣tapolis. And 3. Cyrene or Pentapolis, reaching from that Libya to the greater Syrtis, where it bor∣dered with that part of the African Diocese, which is now called the Kingdom of Tunis. And in this first acception of it we shall now proceed to a Survey of the Mountains, and chief Cities; which done, we shall describe the other in their proper places; and then unite them all in the Generall Story.

As for the Mountains of this Country, there are very many: there were no living else for the peo∣ple in the time of the overflowings of the River. The principal of these, 1. Those called Montes Libyei, lying in a long chain on the West of Nilus; 2. Alabastrinus; 3. Porphyritus; 4. Troigus; 5. Basanitus on the East thereof. Betwixt these Hils the course of the River is so hemmed in on both sides, that at the upper part of the stream where it first entreth into Egypt, the space betwixt the Mountains is not above four miles broad, enlarging afterwards to eight, then about Caire to thirty seven; thence opening wider and wider, till we come to the breaches of the Delta, as the Country doth increase in breadth. On these and other of the Mountains and lesser Hils, stand most part of the Towns, the receptacles of the Country-people in the time of the Flood, rising when least, to fifteen cubits, or seven yards and an half.

Rivers of note here are none but Nilus, nor indeed any one but that; that being sufficient of it self to enrich this Country, which otherwise would be nothing but a Sandy Desart. But what they want in Rivers, is supplied with Lakes and Trenches, which serve for watering their Cattel, temper∣ing of mortar for their buildings, and other such inferior uses; sometimes perhaps for drink for the poorer sort, who cannot be conveniently furnished with the waters of Nile. Amongst the Trenches (which were many, as before was said) those of most estimation were the Works of Ptolomie and the Emperor Trajan: the first falling into that branch of the Nile, which maketh the Isle called Heracleotis; the other into the main body of it, not far from Caire. These two, by reason of the many fresh springs which fall into them, have the name of Rivers in old Authors; and betwixt these was seated the

Land of Goshen, extending from Nilus to the Red-Sea, on the East and West. The chief of note a∣mongst the Lakes, were those called, 1. Mareotis, not far from Alexandria, by Plinie called Arapotes, Maria by Ptolomie; all which names are now lost, and changed into that of Lagodi Antacon, from a Town of that name near unto it. 2. Laccus, supposed to be the same which in the book of Maccabees is called Asphar, lib. 1. cap. 9. And 3. Moeris, now called Buchaira, more memorable then the rest, in compasse 3500 furlongs, 50 fathom deep, in the midst whereof were two Pyramides 50 fathoms above the water, and as much beneath it: the Fish of this Lake, for one fix moneths in the year, said to be worth twenty of their pounds a day to the Kings Exchequer; for the other six, each day a Talent. 4. The Lakes called Amari, into which the Trench or River called Ptolomaeus, doth discharge its waters, conveyed from thence into the Red-Sea.

The whole divided antiently into two parts only, 1. That called Delta, betwixt the two extreme branches of the River Nilus, the form of which letter it resembleth to him who standing on the Sea∣shore could take a view of it. 2. That called Thebais, from Thebe the principal City of it, compre∣hending all the rest of the course of that River, shut up on both sides with the Mountains spoken of before. But this Division leaving out all those parts hereof which lie on the East-side towards the Arabian Golfs, and on the West as far as to the borders of Libya Marmarica: the Macedonians lay∣ing it all together, divided it into 18 Cantreds or Districts, by them called Nomi, increased in the time of Ptolomie the Geographer to 46. Ortelius out of divers Authors hath found 20 more. When con∣quered by the Romans, and made a Diocese of the Empire, it was divided into four Provinces, (not reckoning Marmarica, and Cyrene into the accompt:) that is to say, 1. Aegyptus specially so cal∣led, containing all the Delta, and the District or Nomus of Mareotica, bordering on Marmarica, 2. Augustanica, so called from Augustus Caesar, on the East of the Delta, betwixt it and Arabia Pe∣traea. 3. Arcadia, so called from the Emperor Arcadius, in whose time it was taken out of Thebais, lying on both sides of the River, from the Delta to the City of Antinous. 4. Thebais, extending on both sides of the River from the borders of Libya Marmarica to the Red-Sea, (as the other doth) unto Aethiopia. Divided otherwise by some, into Superiorem, reaching from Aethiopia to the City of Antinous; Mediam, stretching thence to the point of the Delta; and Inferiorem, which comprehend∣eth all the rest. But at this time, that part hereof which lieth on the South and East of Caire, is called Saud, or Salud, honoured heretofore with the dwelling of the antient Pharaohs, because nearest unto Aethiopia their most puissant neighbour. 2. That betwixt Caire, Rosetta, and Alexandria, hath the name of Errifia, wherein the Ptolomaean Princes did most reside, because most convenient for re∣ceiving supplies of men from the States of Greece. And finally, that from Caire to Tenese and Dami∣ata, is now called Maremna, in which the Turks and Mamalucks made the seat of their Empire, be∣cause more neighbouring to the Christians, whom they stood in fear of, as likewise to invade them upon that side. In the whole Country there was reckoned in the time of Amasis the 2^d. no fewer then 20000 Cities: but if the Towns and Villages be not reckoned in, I should much doubt of the accompt. By Diodorus Siculus it is said that there were 3000 in his time: but Ortelius, on a diligent search, finds 300 only.

Those of most note in the Province of Augustanica, 1. Pelusium, the most Eastern City of Egypt towards Idumaea, situate on the most Eastern channel of Nilus, called hence Pelusiacum; by Ammi∣anus said to be the work of Peleus the Father of Achilles, commanded by the Gods to purge himself in the Lake adjoyning, for the murder of his brother Phocus. Accounted for the chief door of Egypt towards the Land, as Pharos was to those who came thither by Sea; the Metropolis of the Province of Augustanica, the birth-place of Ptolomie the Geographer, and the Episcopal See of S. Isidore, sir∣named Pelusiotes, whose eloquent and pious Epistles are still extant. Out of the ruines hereof (if not the same under another title) arose, 2. Damiata, memorable for the often Sieges laid unto it by the Christian Armies; for none more then that under John de Brenne the titulary King of Jerusalem, and the Princes of Europe, An. 1220. During which (being of 18 moneths continuance) the Famine and the Pestilence so extremely raged, that the Town in a manner was dispeopled, before the Besiegers knew any thing of their condition: till in the end two venturous Souldiers, admiring the silence and solitude of so great a City, in a Bravado scaled the walls, but found no man to make resistance: the next day the whole Army entred, where they found in every house and every corner of the streets whole heaps of dead bodies, none to give them burial; A lamentable and ruthful spectacle! 3. Heros, or Civitas Heroum, in the Arabian Isthmus, at the very bottom of the Golf; remarkable for the first interview betwixt Jacob and Joseph, after his coming into Egypt. 4. Heliopolis, or the City of the Sun, now called Betsames, in the Scriptures On, of which Potiphar the Father of Asenath (whom Pharaoh married unto Ioseph) was priest or Prince, as is said Gen. 41. 45. Given (as Iosephus telleth us) for an habitation to the sons of Iacob; by consequence one of the chief Cities of the Land Ra∣meses or Goshen; and memorable in times succeeding for a publike Temple built for the Iewes with the consent of Ptolomie sirnamed Philadelphus, by Onias the High-Priest, then dispossessed of his au∣thority and office by the power of Antiochus: a Temple much esteemed by the Hellinists or Gre∣cizing Iews; and though Schismatical at the best in its first original, yet not Schismatical and Ido∣latrous, as was that of Mount Garizim. 5. Bubustis, somwhat more North then Heliopolis, by some of the Antients called Avaris, by the Scriptures Pibeseth, another City of that tract, now better known by the name of Zioth, supposed to be the same which the Notitia calleth Castra Iudaeorum; memo∣rable in times of Paganisme for a famous Temple of Diana. 6. Arsinoe, on the shore of the Red Sea, so called in honour of Arsinoe sister of Philadelphus, and wife to Lysimachus King of Thrace; after∣wards

called Cleopatris, in honour of Queen Cleopatra: now better known by the name of Sues; Of great commerce and trading in the time of the Ptolomies: Now almost abandoned, and would be utterly deserted, were it not made the station of the Turkish Gallies, that command the Gulfe: which being framed at Caire of such Timber as is brought thither by sea from the Woods of Cilicia, and sometimes from the Shores of the Euxine Sea, are again taken in peeces, carried from Caire unto this City on the backs of Camels, and here joyned together. Conceived to be the same which in for∣mer times was called Baal Zephon (of which see Exod. 14. 9.) the last incamping-place of the Tribes of Israel, who from hence passed through the Red Sea, as upon dry land. 7. Gleba Rubra, by the Greeks called Hiera Bolus, and sometimes Erythra Bolus also more neer the Latine; the redness of the soyl giving name unto it: situate on the River or Trench of Tralan: more memorable for a misfortune that befell it then for any thing else; purposely burnt by Amenophis the fift, upon this occasion: Being blinde, he was assured by some of his Wizards that if he washed his eyes with the Urine of a Woman which had never known any but her own husband, he should be restored unto his sight. After a long search and many vain tryals, he met with one whose water cured him; whom he took to wife: and causing all the rest whom he had made tryal of, to be brought together to this Town, he set sire on the Ci••y, and burnt both it and all the women there assembled; which tale, if true, is little to the credit of the Dames of Egypt.

Places of most note and observation in the Province of Egypt strictly and specially so called, are 1. Alexandria situate Westward of the Delta, over against the Isle of Pharos; and built upon a Promontory thrusting it self into the Sea; with which on the one side, and the Lake Mareotis on the other, it is exceeding well defended: the Work of Alexander the Great, and by him peopled with Greeks immediatly after his conquest of Egypt. The Regal Seat of the Ptolomies, whilst Egypt did maintain the State of a Kingdom: and afterwards the Metropolis of it, when a Roman Diocese; Adorned with many stately buildings; of which most memorable the Serapium (or Temple of their God Separis) for sumptuous workmanship, and the magnificence of the Fabrick, inferiour to none but the Roman Capitol: and next to that, the Library erected by Philadelphus, who had stored it with 700000. Volumes; unfortunately burnt in the War against Julius Caesar; a City of great tra∣ding, and infinite Riches; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the greatest Empory of the World, as is said by Strabo. Wanton with which, the Citizens so abounded in all licentiousness both of life and speech▪ that they spared not the Emperour himself, if he came in their way. But they paid dearly for their folly. For Caracalla not so patient of a Contumely as some wiser Princes, having felt the lashes of their tongues, when he was amongst them, assembled all the youth of the City, as if out of them he would have chosen some to attend his Person; and suddenly gave command to his Souldiers, to put them all to the sword. A slaughter so great and universall, that the River Nilus coloured with the blood of the slain, might not improperly at that time be called a Red Sea. In this City, Anno 180. Gantenus read here both Divinity and Philosophy to all such as would come to hear him: which as it is conceived to give the first hint to the instituting of Vniversities in the rest of Christendom; so from that small beginning the Schools of Alexandria grew so great and eminent, that Nazianzen calleth them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the shop, or work-house, as it were, of all kinds of Learn∣ing. Much short of what it was even in point of trading, especially since the diversion of the Tra∣ding from the Bay of Arabia; and utterly divested of those beauties which once it had. Inhabited at the present by a mixture of Nations, Moors, Jews, Turks, Greeks, and Christian Cophtives; more for some little gain which they reap by Traffick, then any pleasure in the place; Now called Scande∣ria by the Turks, remarkable only for the house of the Patriarch (though he dwell for the most part in Caire) and a Church in which S. Mark their first Bishop was said to be buried. 2. Canopus, situ∣ate east of Alexandria, and on the principal branch of the Nile, called Heracleoticum, so called from Canopus the Pilot of Menelaus, who having suffered shipwrack upon this coast, was there in∣terred by his Master: A Town so branded in old times for varieties of all kinde of beastliness and luxury, that as Seneca very well observed, he that avoided the viciousness and debauchery of it, could not scape the infamy: the very place administring matter for suspicion. 3. Rosetta, on the same branch of the River, and not far from Canopus, out of whose ruines it arose; built by a Slave of one of the Egyptian Caliphs, unwalled and destitute of all Fortifications, but plentifully accommo∣dated with all sorts of commodities, and well frequented by the Merchant. 4. Nicopolis, now cal∣led Munia, the Monument of some eminent Victory, and probably of the conquest of Egypt by the Macedonians; the name being Greek, and the Town standing within 30. Fu••longs of Alexandria. 5. Aphrodites and Aphroditopolis, so called from Venus who was here worshipped: situate betwixt the two middle branches of the Nile. 6. Sais, betwixt the same branches of the River also; whence that Nomus or Division had the name of Saites. It is now called Sibnit, or Signiti. 7. Plinthine, on the Sea-side; and 8. Hierax, more within the land: the chief Towns of the Region called Maraeotica.

In Arcadia, called also Heptanomus, because it contained seven of the Nomi or Divisions into which Egypt was distributed by the Macedonians, the Places of most note were and are 1. Memph••••▪ on the Western bank of Nile, not far from the sharp point of the Delta, where the River first be∣ginneth to divide it self; the Regal City of the old Egyptian Pharaohs, by one of which who remo∣ved the Seat Royal from Thebo hither, it is said to be built; and called thus by the name of his daugh∣ter. In compass, when it flourished, about 20. miles; Great, populous, and adorned with a world of Antiquities; amongst others with the Temples of Apis, Venus, and Scrapis, beset with Sphyr••••••▪

now nothing left of the Ruines of it, but the Statues of some monstrous Resemblances, sufficient to ••hew what it hath been formerly. The Pyramides before described, stood not far from hence; to which the Poet relateth, saying,

Barbara Pyramidum sileat miracula Memphis.

Let barbarous Memphisbrag no more Of her Pyramides, as before.

2. Babylon, called for distinctions sake, Babylon Aegyptiorum, built on the other side of the River, and somewhat more unto the North: said to be founded by Cambyses the Persian Monarch, the first that made this Kingdom stoop to the yoke of a forreiner; and by him peopled with some Babylonians or Chaldaeans, transplanted hither. Great, as appeareth by the ruines; amongst which many of the Christian Temples and Monasteries do lie there in rubbish; the Castle whereof served long after for the Garrison of the three Legions, appointed to defend this Country in the time of the Romans. This, thought by some to be the Babylon mentioned by S. Peter in his 1 Epistle cap. ult. which the following words, and Mark my son, (S. Mark being the first Bishop of the Alexandrians, and the Apostle of Egypt) may make somwhat probable: but the truth and reality hereof, I dispute not now. Out of the ruines of this City arose, 3. Caire, now, and for many Ages past the chief of this Country: raised from the ashes of old Babylon by the Chaliphs of Egypt, and by the Mamalucks made the Seat-Royal of their Kingdom. In compasse not above eight miles, but full of Streets, the number of which said to be 18000. every one of them fortified with a Gate at each end; which being well barred, made every several street an impregnable fortresse. Found so by Selymus the first, when he conquered Egypt, who spent three dayes in forcing his way through it with his numerous Army. The private buildings very mean; the publique, specially the Mosques, beyond thought magnificent. Visited every seventh year with a dreadful Pestilence; yet still so populous, that it is conveived to be in good health▪ if there die not above a thousand in a day, or 300000 within that year. Adorned with many delicate Orchards both within the City, and without; full of variety of contentments, and neigh∣boured by a pleasant Lake, but made more pleasant by the company which meet there in Boats, for their mutual solace and delights. Fortified at the South end with a stately Castle (the Palace of the Mamaluck Sultans) situate on the top of a Mountain, overlooking the City, and a great part of the Country also. So large, that it seemeth a City of it self, immured with high walls, divided into many partitions or several Courts, in times past the places of exercise; and entred by dores of iron. De∣stroyed for the most part, by Selimus, for fear of giving opportunity to some rebellion; or envying the Mamalucks the glory of having been the Masters of so brave a Mansion: that which is left, now serving for the habitation of the Turkish Bassa, who hath the Government of this Kingdom 4. Ma∣tared, or Matarea, not far from Caire; the soile whereof is said to be so rich and fertile, that the People are fain to cover it with sand or gravel, so moderating the extreme ranknesse of it. 5. Arsinoe, on the West side of the Nile, and somwhat South of the famous Labyrinth before described; called also (to difference it from another of the same name on the shores of the Red-Sea) the City of Croco∣diles, in regard of the divine honours there done that Monster. 6. Nilopolis, or Nili Civitas, in the Island called Heracleotis, made by the imbracements of the River: most memorable for being the Episcopal See of Cheraemon, a right godly Prelate; of whom see Eusebius in the 6 Book and 34 Chap. of his Ecclesiastical History. 7. Troia, on the Eastern stream which makes that Island, not much observable but for giving name to the Montes Troici lying neer unto it, out of which were digged the stones which made the Pyramides. 8. Cynopolis, in a little Island up the water. 9. Hermopolis, or the City of Mercurie, called also Hermopolis magna, to difference it from another of that name not far from Alexandria; to which they give the Adjunct of Parva. 10. Antinous, now Antius, founded by Adrian the Emperor, in honour of Antinous his especial favourite; the most Southern City of this Province, on the banks of the Nile. 11. Dionysias, or the City of Bacchus, situate on the Southern end of the Lake of Moeris, in the Nomus or Division called Oasis parva. 12. Clysma, upon the shores of the Golf, a Roman Garrison.

Cities of most note in the Province of Thebais, 1. Panopolis, the Panos of Antoninus, one of the greatest of this part. 2. Ptolomais, the foundation of one of the Ptolomies, and the goodliest City of this Province, succeeding unto Thebe both in power and greatnesse. 3. Saiet, a fair and large Town, six dayes journy from Caire, going up the water; but by what name called amongst the Antients, I do nowhere find. Affirmed (erroneously, I think) to be the dwelling-place of Joseph and Mary, when they fled with CHRIST our Saviour from the fury of Herod. Beautified with a goodly Temple, but now somwhat ruinous; of the foundation of Helena the mother of Constantine. The City much resorted to (on the strength of this Tradition only) by many aged Christian Cophties, who desire to die there. 4. Diospolis, or the City of Jupiter; all of them on the banks of the River. 5. Tentyra, in a little Isle so called, made by the circlings of the Nile: The inhabitants whereof were the onely men who durst encounter the Crocodile; A creature of a terrible name, but a cowardly nature; of which it is said by Ammianus Marcellinus, that it assaulteth those which flie from it, and flieth from those who do assault it; In that point very like the Devil, of whom it is said by the Apostle James, 4, 7. that if he be resisted, he will flie from us. Or as the good old Poet hath it,

Est Leo, si fugias; si stas, quasi Musca recedit.

Give ground, a Lyon he will be; Stand to it, and away flies he.

6. Coptos, upon the head of a Trench or water-course which falleth into the Nilus, on the South of Tentyra, but on the other side of the River; in old times a most noted Emporie for Indian and Arabian wares; from whence not only the Christians of this Country are thought to have the name of Coph∣ties, but the whole Country to be originally called Aegyptus, from Ai-Coptus, or the land of Coptus. 7. Thebe, the residence and foundation of that great Tyrant Busiris, in compass 140 furlongs, or 17 miles and an half; called also Hecatompylae, from the number of an hundred Gates which were said to be in it. So beautified with Colosses, Temples, Palaces, the Sepulchres of the old Egyptian Pharaohs, and other Ornaments of State, that it was thought 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, to be the Nonesuch of the world. Decayed on the removing of the Court to Memphis, it became a ruine so long since, that there was nothing left of it in the time of Iuvenal; as he telleth us, saying,

Atque vetus Thebe centum jacet obruta portis.

Old Thebe, yielding to the Fates, Lies buried with its hundred Gates.

8. Abydus, now called Abutick, once the seat-royal of Memnon, from thence called Memnonium, renowned for the Temple of Osiris; more for the Statue of Memnon, which though made of stone▪ did at the rising of the sun yield a vocal sound. 9. Elephantis, on the banks of Nile, neighboured by Crophi and Mophi, two sharp Rocks, betwixt which the River falling-down with a violent current, makes the Lesser Cataract; of which, and of the greater, we shall speak more fully in Aethiopia. The City seated in an Island of the River Nile, on the borders of Aethiopia sub Aegypto, (as the Antients called it) known unto Ptolomie by the name of Elephantina, but to our Ecclesiastical writers by the name of Tabenna. Memorable in times of Heathenism for the Town and Temple of Onuphis, wherein stood the Nilometrium or standing-pillar, by which they did observe the increase of the River; removed since to the Castle of Michias, two miles from Caire: in times of Christianity, for the dwel∣lings of infinite numbers of Monks and Hermits, called from this place Tabenisiotae. 10. Syene, (now Asna) a little North of Elephantis, situate directly under the Tropick of Cancer, and memorable for a deep Well there digged by some Astronomers; which when the Sun entred into that Sign, was wholly enlightened with his beams, without any shadow; so perpendiculary did the body of it stand over the pit. This the last City of Egypt towards Aethiopia.

And now I should proceed, according to my Method in other places, to the Storie of Egypt: but being that Libya and Cyrene are now accompted Members of it, the fortunes whereof they have also followed in all or most of the mutations of State & Government, I shall first take a view of them as the limbs of this body, and shew you how they were united under that one Head, by which now directed.

2. MARMARICA.

2. LIBRA or MARMARICA, hath on the East, Egypt, properly so called; on the West, Cyrene; on the North, that part of the Mediterranean Sea, which was hence called Mare Libycum, and sometimes Parthenium; and on the South, some part of Aethiopia Superior.

It had the name of Libya, from the old Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, signifying black, agreeable to the com∣plexion of the people, which is black and swarthie; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, antiqua lingua Graca niger, saith a learned Writer; or possibly enough from Lub, an Arabian word signifying thirst, as suitable unto the nature of the soile, which is drie and sandie, in which respect called by the Greeks Xero-Libya, or Libya sicca. From hence the South-wind, blowing from these Coasts towards Greece and Italy, had the name of Lybs, and the Promontorie in Sicilie opposite unto it, that of Lilybaeum. It was also called Marma∣rica, perhaps from the Marmaridae, a chief People of it, though placed by Ptolomie in Cyrene: and sometimes Barca, from Barce a chief City in it; of late times Barca Marmarica, by both names united.

The Country for the most part very dry and barren, and but meanly peopled; insomuch as Ale∣xander passing through part of it towards the Temple of Iupiter Hammon, in the space of four dayes saw neither Man, Beast, Bird, Tree, nor River. Covered over in most places with a thick, light sand, which the winds remove up and down continually, turning vallies into hils, and hils into vallies. Found by Cambyses to his cost, who as basely esteeming of the Gods as he did of his Subjects, sent part of his Army into this Country to destroy the Temple above mentioned; but in the passage towards that prohibited place, fifty thousand of them were overwhelmed and smothered in a storm of sand, the rest with much adoe escaping. Called therefore Xero-Libya, or Libya Sicca, as before was noted; and Libya sitiens, thirsty Libya, (—per calidas Libyae sitientis arenas) in that Verse of Lucan.

The people, neighbours unto Egypt; and consequently much of the same condition. Said by He∣rodotus (by whom they are called Adyrnachidae) to be governed by the like Lawes and Customs as the Egyptians were; but to differ from them in their habit. Of colour dark and black, of constitution

lean and dry, and inclining to Melancholy; angry on every light occasion, very litigious, and eager prosecutors of their dues. By an old observation among themselves, they abstained both from Beef and Hog-meat. So obstinate in denying their accustomed Tributes, that he who could not shew the marks of his sufferings for it, either black or blue, was accompted no body: And so resolved to con∣ceal any thing disgraceful to them, that if any of them were apprehended for a Robbery, no torment could compell him to tell his name. At this time, little differing in person, temper or condition, from the Egyptians, Moors, and Arabes, intermixt amongst them.

Converted to the faith of Christ, with, or not long after the rest of Egypt, of which then reckoned for a Province, it became part of the Patriarchate of Alexandria; whose jurisdiction over it was confirmed by the Council of Nice: to the calling of which famous Council, this Country occasionally concurred, by bringing into the World that wretched Arius, who with his Heterodexies and con∣tentious Cavils had disturbed the Church. His Heresie condemned in that famous Council; but his Person, by the Divine justice of God, reserved to a more remarkable punishment. Being sent for by the Emperor Constantine to make a Recantation of his former Heresies, he first writ out a Copy of his own Opinions, which he hid in his bosom; and then writing out the Recantation expected from him, took oath that he did really mean as he had written: which words the Emperor referred to the Recantation, he to the Paper in his bosom. But God would not be so cozened, though the Emperor was. For as he passed in triumph through the streets of Constantinople, he drew aside into a private house of Ease, where he voided his guts into the draught, and sent his soul as an Harbinger to the Devil to make room for his body.

Not more infamous for the birth of this Miscreant, who denied the Divinity of Christ; then fa∣mous for the birth of one of the Sibyls, hence sirnamed Libyca, by whom the same had been fore∣shewn. Which Sibyls seem to have taken denomination from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, i. Iovis consiliorum consciae. They were in number ten, viz. 1. Persica, 2. Libyca, 3. Delphica, 4. Cumaea, 5. Samia, 6. Hellespon∣tiaca, 7. Tiburtina, 8. Albunea, 9. Erythraea, and 10. Cumana; which last is affirmed to have written the Nine books of the Sibyls. They were all presented by an old woman to Tarquinius Superbus; but he not willing to pay so great a sum of mony as was demanded, denied them; whereupon the old women burnt three of them, requiring as much mony for the other six, as for all; which being denied, she also burnt the other three, asking as much for the three remaining, as for the rest; which Superbus, amazed, gave, and the old Trot vanquished. These books contained manifest tokens of the kingdom of Christ, his name, his birth, and death. They were burned by the Arch-traitor Stilico. So that those Prophecies of theirs which are now extant, are for the most part only such as had been extracted out of other writings, where their authority had been quoted. Concerning which, though Causabon and some other of out great Philologers conceive them to be piae fraudes, composed of purpose by the Fa∣thers of the Primitive times, to win credit to the Faith of CHRIST; yet dare I not so far disparage those most godly men, as to believe they would support so strong an edifice with so weak a prop, or borrow help from falshood to evict a truth; Or if they durst have been so impudently venturous, how easie had it been for their learned Adversaires, Porphyrie, Julian, and the rest of more eminent note, to have detected the Imposture, and silenced the Christian Advocates with reproach and scorn? But of this enough here; more at large elswhere.

Rivers of note I find not any. 'Tis well, if in a Country so full of sands, there be any at all: some Lakes I meet with in my Authors, the principal of which, 1 Laccus, 2 Lacus Lacomedis, now Linxamo, 3 Cleartus; sufficient to preserve their few Cattel from the taint of thirst. The Mountains of most note, those called Anogombri, 2. and that named Azar; this last extended West and East in a strait line, from the 51 degree of Longitude, to the 53. 3 Aliphus; 4 Ogdomus; 5 Tmodes; 6 Alpis; not much observable, but that they serve for Land-marks to discover the Country.

Towns of note there are none now in it. Of most esteem in former times, 1 Batrachus, by some called Menelaus, an Haven-town. 2 Phthia, and 3 Anesisphyra, two Port-towns also. 4 Tetrapyrgia, so called from its four Towers, the Antipyrgus of Ptolomie. 5 Mesuchis, more within the land. 6 Mazacila, another midland town. 7 Chaereola, mentioned among the chief Cities of this tract, by Ammianus. 8 Paraetonium, now Porto-rassa, which with Pelusium are by Florus called the two Horns of Egypt, which whosoever held fast, would be sure to master it. By some old writers it had formerly been called Ammonia, as we read in Stephanus and Strabo, from the Temple of Jupiter Ham∣mon, seated very near it. So antiently honoured with an Oracle, (if that were any honour to it) that Semiramis is said to have come hither to enquire of her death; Perseus and Hercules, touching their Adventures. The like, but not long after, was done by Alexander the Great: but the Oracle by that time had learnt to flatter, and puffed him up with a proud conceit of being the son of that God whom he came to worship. The Temple seated in the middle of a vast sandie Desart, environed with a plea∣sant and delightful Grove, about six miles or more in circuit, watered with wholsom springs, refreshed with a temperate air, and shaded with Fruit-bearing trees, which carried in their leaves a perpetual spring; Fortified with a triple wall, within the first whereof was a Royal Palace of the kings, within the second a Seraglio for his Women, in the third Lodgings for the Officers of Court; The Oracle fitly placed (so the Priests would have it) near the Seraglio of the Ladies; Before the entrance a fair Fountain, wherein the Oblations were first washed, then offered. A place of great repute in sacred and Civil estimate; all the adjoining Country taking hence the name of Ammoniaca, and by that name reckoned amongst the Provinces of the Patriarchate of Alexandria. 9 Antiphra, on the East border of it, towards Alexandria. 10 Barce, called afterwards Ptolemais, by the name of one of the

Ptolomies, by whom repaired and beautified. Of such accompt, that from hence the whole Country had the name of Barca, and the Inhabitants of Barcaei, (—Latéque furentes Barcaei) as in that of Virgil.

The old Inhabitants hereof, were the Libyarchae and Bassachitae, in the North; the Ogdoni, Buzes, and Adyrmachidae, in the South; the Goniatae, and Prosaditae, in the midland parts; the Libyaegyptii, bordering nearest unto Egypt, with the people whereof so intermingled, as to make up betwixt them but one name and nation. Others there were of lesse, or as little note, but all descended properly of Naphtuhim the son of Misraim▪ from whom the name of Neptune, originally a Libyan Deity, seems to be deri••ed ••et so, that Lehabin his brother must come in for a share; the founder, as it is conceived, of the Libyaegyptii before mentioned. Being then of the same original with those of Egypt, they fol∣lowed the same fortunes also, till the times of the Ptolomies; by whom sometimes given for portion, with the title of a ••ingd••m to their younger children. By the last will and testament of Apion, the last King hereof, a Bastard-son of Ptolomie sirnamed Euergetes, the seventh King of that house, be∣qu••athed unto the Senate and People of Rome. By whom first suffered to live under them, as a Free-Estate ••••ll the conquest of Egypt; then reckoned as a part of that, and so accordingly described by Ptolomic; wh••re Libya, Marmarica, and Ammoniaca, occurre amongst the Nomi or Divisions of i•• Afterward made a distinct Province of that Diocese and governed by a Lord President, under the Praesectus Augustalis, or Supreme Commander for the Emperours.

3. CYRENE.

CYRENE is bounded on the East with Marmarica, on the West with Africa Propria, or the Realm of Tunis, and some part of the Mediterranean, and the Creater Syrtis; on the North with the Mediterranean wholly; on the South with Libya Inferior, or the Desarts of Libya.

It took this name from Cyrene the chief City of it, from whence sometimes also called Cyrenaica; by Plinie and some other Roman Writers it is called Pentapolis, from five chief Cities which were in it, viz 1 Cyrene, 2 Ptolemais, 3 Arsinoe 4 Darnis, 5 Berenice; by Ammianus for the same reason Libya Pentapolis, the name of Libya extending over many of these Roman Provinces. And finally, at the present, it passeth with that last described by the name of Barca, or Barca Marmarica: the whole extent whereof in length from the Greater Syrtis unto Egypt, is no lesse then 13000 miles, but the breadth not above 200.

The Country in the South parts desolate and barren, stored with few Towns, and not many Vil∣lages; the People living up and down in scattered houses and at such a distance, as if it were in so many Islands. Destitute not of Springs and Rivers only, but of Rain-water too, the Clouds not very often dropping: if any fell, it was dried up presently by the ••ands. But within fifteen miles of the Sea▪ indifferently fruitful, and well inhabited.

The People in old times were said to have been utterly ignorant of buying and selling, of fraud and stealing, not knowing or not caring for the use of money; con••ent with little, not superfluous in their clothes or buildings, their houses for the most part (except only in their greater Cities) made of Osier∣twigs. Much altered in the first part of their character, since the coming of the Arabians hither; now a Theevish nation, given wholly to Robbery and spoile. So lazie, that they will not manure or till their Land, but provide themselves with Corn from Sicily, laying their Children to pawn for it, till by their Thieving they can raise a sufficient summe to discharge the debt.

One onely River I find in it, but of fame enough to serve for many; By Ptolomie called Luthon, by Plinie Lethon, by the Poets Lethe. Swallowed by the Earth not far from its first original, it riseth up again about Berenice fained therefore by the Poets to come from Hell, and to create for∣getfulnesse in all them that drink of it; it being the condition of the dead to remember nothing. Thence the occasion of the fancie. Some Lakes I find also in it, whereof one occasioned by this River, not far from the Sea; another more within the land (where indeed more necessary) neer Paliurus. With Mountains better stored, (though not much better for them) the principal whereof, 1. Those called Herculis Arenae, the Sands of Hercules, thwarting the Country East and West; 2. Bucolicus, on the South of those; and 3 Volpos, a long ridge of hils; bordering upon Africa Propria.

Cities of most note in it, 1. Apollonia, in the East parts, neer the Promontorie called Zephyrium, in the confines of Libya or Marmarica. 2. Cyrene, in the West of that; once of such power, that it c••ntended with Carthage for some preheminencies: Then the chief Lady of this tract, which it gave this name to. The birth place of Eratosthenes the Mathematician, Callimachus the Poet, and of that Simon of Cyrene▪ whom the Jewes compelled to carry our Saviours Crosse. 3. Ptolemais, betwixt Cyrene and Arsinee, built or repaired by Ptolomie Philadelphus; the Episcopal City of Synesius, a learned and religious Bishop of the Primitive times, as appears by his Epistles extant. 4. Arsinoe, on the East side of the River Lathon, so called in honour of Arsinoe, the sister of Philadelphus, and wife of Magas once King of this Country. 5 Berenice, on the Western bank of the said River; so called from Berenice the mother, or (another of the same name) the daughter of Magas: the furthest Town of all this Country, bordering on the Promontory called Boreum, and the greater Syrtis. This last a Quick sand very dangerous to Mariners, in compasse 635 miles, and by them carefully avoided. 6. Paliurus, more within the land, but on the borders of Liby•• or Marmarica, South to Apollonia. 7 Aptungis, now Lungifari, by Ptolomie called Aptuchi Fanum. 8. Herculis Turris, the Tower of Hercules, near the greater Syrtis; erected in the honour of Hercules, his killing of the Dragon▪ and

robbing the Orchards of the Hesperides of their golden Apples. Those Hesperides said to be Aegle, Arethusa, and Hesperethusa, the three daughters of Atlas: their Orchard placed by Ptolomie betwixt this Tower and Paliurus; by Pomponius, in the Atlantick Islands; by Virgil, in Mauritania Tingi∣••ania; by Plinie, both in Mauritania and this Cyrene; and possibly in all alike. 9 Zemythus. 10 A∣cabis, in the midlands; all worn out of memory. 11 Fessan, of greatest name now, though scarce worth the naming.

The old Inhabitants of this Country, were the Asbetae on the East, the Barcitae near the Greater-Syrtis, the Macatutae and Laganici, near the Mountains of Hercules; all probably descended from Naphtuhim the son of Mizraim, of whom there still remain some footsteps in Aptuchi Fanum, the ••ane or Temple of Aptuchus. This Aptuchus by some mistakingly called Autuchus, and by the Gre∣cians said to be the son of Cyrene, and the brother of Aristaeus: who being sent out to seek their for∣tunes, Aristaeus fell into the Isle named Ceos; and Aptuchus or Autuchus into Libya, both by them first planted. Neptune, the Deity of this Country, by the Egyptians called Neptitim, seems to come from Naphtuhim; most highly worshipped by this people, because he first taught them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Art of training Horses to the Coach or Chariot; in which the Cyreneans after grew so expert, that they could drive their Chariots in a round or circle, and alwayes keep their Chariot-wheels in the self-same tract. Of no great power, till Battus a noble Spartan landing in this Country, had built the City of Cyrene; and founded it in so good a course of life and discipline, that in short time it came to have dominion over the most part of this Country, and to contend with Car∣thage about their territories. Warred on by Apryes King of Egypt, they sued unto the Greeks ••or aid, and by their assistance overcame him. Long after which, falling at odds among themselves, they craved aid of Ptolomie the first of that race, by whom they were finally subdued. Left by him at his death to Magus, a son of his last wife by a former husband, whom he had married to Arsinoe one of his daugh∣ters; it came again to the Crown of Egypt, by the marriage of Berenice the daughter and heire of Magus, with the son of Ptolomie Philadelphus. Aliened from which Crown again, for the preser∣ment of some of the younger Princes, and in the end given by one of the Ptolomies, the last king here∣of, to the People of Rome. Reduced into the form of a Province by Augustus Caesar, by whom uni∣ted in one Government with the Isle of Crete; but made a Province of it self by the following Emperours: never since separated from the fortune and affairs of Egypt, to which now we hasten.

That the Kingdom and Nation of Egypt was of great Antiquity, is not a matter to be doubted; the question in this point, betwixt them and the Scythian, being not easily decided. Whether it were so antient, as the Egyptians say, may perhaps be controverted. By them it was affirmed, that they had the memorie and storie of 13000 years, and a succession of 330 Kings in the time of Amasis the second, who was Cotemporary with Cyrus. Which number of years, if understood of Solarie years, measured by the course of the Sun, must not be allowed of, because it maketh them many thousand years older then the Creation: but if of Lunarie, which is most agreeable unto the Accompt of the Egyptians, who reckoned their years by moneths, it will amount unto no more then to 1000 or 1100 years, and so fall answerably to the times following after the Flood. But for their Kings, 330 in their reckonings, and those of 24 or 25 several Dynasti••s, the matter is not so soon made up: For either those Kings, must not be all Kings, or Supreme Lords of Egypt, as the Pharaohs were, but their several Regents or Vicegerents, armed with Regal power; those Dynasties not the successions of so many Regal families, but of their Substitutes and Lieutenants, many of which might live successively under one Supreme: or else we must needs look on Egypt, as distracted in those times into several kingdoms, amongst the Princes of those Dynasties before remembred: or finally, we must look for some of those Kings and Princes before the Flood. By either of these wayes, the business may be well agreed: For if that most of them were but the names of several Regents, (as probable enough it is) there might be many such in the reign of one King; according to the Kings fancie, the merit of particular persons, or the necessities of State: Changes of great Officers, especially if grown too great, are not new nor strange. If they were all Kings or Supreme Rulers, (as is also probable) we find not any thing of moment to perswade the contrary, but that many of them lived and reigned in their several parts (as in other Countries in those times) till the greater had devoured the less. Or if they were the names of such Soveraign Princes as had the sole command of Egypt before the Flood, (as some think they were) they might amount in all to so great a number, and so many Dynasties; the iniquity of those times, the ambition of great persons, and consequently the short lives of the Kings being duely pondered. That Egypt and most part of the world was peopled before the Flood, hath been already proved in our Generall Preface: If peopled, then no question under some form of Government, the names of which Governours (call them Kings, or Rulers, or what else we please) might be preserved in Egypt on pillars of brass or stone, or otherwise transmitted by tradition unto Cham the Father of Mizraim, by whom this Country was first planted after the Confusion of Babel. But that old stock of Kings and People being destroyed in the general Deluge, the Children of Mizraim succeeded next in their desolate dwellings: yet so, that the posterity of Chus and L••habim, two others of the sons of Cham, had their shares therein. From the first of which descended the Inhabitants of those parts of Egypt, which lay along the shores of the Red-Sea, or Golf of Arabia: in which respect not only one of the Nomi or Divisions bordering on the Isthmus, had the name of Arabia; but the people dwelling on those shores, were called Arabes, divided into the Arabes Azarei, and Arabes Adei. And from the other came that mixture of Nations, called Liby-Aegyptii▪ or Libyans and Egyptians intermixt together,

inhabiting in Maraeotica and the Western parts. But though these People were derived from seve∣ral Ancestors, they made one Nation in the totall: Subject to Mizraim as their chief, and after his decease, unto his Successors in the Kingdom of Egypt. Concerning whom we may observe, that in Cham our greatest Antiquaries finde the name of Iupiter Hammon; Mizraim they guess to be Osiris the great God of Egypt. To him succeeded Typhon not by right of blood, but by usurpation. Who dispossed by Lehabim, the brother of Mizraim (whom the Greeks call Hercules Egyptius) the King∣dom was restored to Orus the son of Osiris. During the time of these few Princes hapned all those things which are recorded in the Scriptures concerning Egypt: from the first going down of Abra∣ham in the time of Osiris, to the advancement of Ioseph in the Reign of Orus: in which there passed the 15. 16. & 17. Dynasties of Regal Vice Royes; Lieutenants only, as I take it▪ to those mighty Princes. The Kings themselves called generally by the name of Pharaoh, though they had all their proper and peculiar names: as afterwards their Successors here had the name of Ptolomy, and the Ro∣man Emperours, that of Caesar. Not troubling our selves therefore with their many Dynasties, we will lay down the Succession of their Kings, as well as we can; the disagreement of Historians and Chronologers, touching this Succession, being irreconcileable.

The Pharaohs or Kings of Egypt, of Egyptian Race.

• A. M.
• 1. Mizraim, the son of Cham, by the Gricians called Osiris, in whose time Abraham went into Egypt.
• 2 Typhon, an Usurper.
• 3 Orus, the son of Osiris, restored un∣to the Kingdom by his Uncle Le∣habim: the Advancer of Ioseph.
• 2207. 4 Amasis Themosis, or Amos, in whose time Iacob went down into E∣gypt. 25.
• 2233. 5 Chebron. 12.
• 2245. 6 Amenophis, or Amenophthis, 21.
• 2266. 7 Amarsis, the sister of Amenoph∣this, 22.
• 2288. 8 Mephres.
• 2300. 9 Mespharmuthesis. 25.
• 2325. 10 Thamosis, or Thuthmosis, 10.
• 2335. 11 Amenophthis II. supposed to be Memnon, and the Vocal Statue, 31.
• 2366. 12 Orus II. the Busiris of the Greci∣ans, a bloody Tyrant, who com∣manded the male-children of Is∣rael to be slain, 37.
• 2403. 13 Acencheres, by some called Ther∣mutis, the daughter of Amenoph∣this the second, and afterwards the wife of Orus, who preserved Moses, 12.
• 2416. 14 Rathosis the son of Orus, 6.
• 2422. 15 Acencherus, 12.
• 2449. 16 Cenchres, by some called Arenasis, Bocchoris by others; drowned in the Red-Sea with his horse and cha∣riots, 16.
• 2453. 17 Acherres, 8.
• 2462. 18 Cherres, 10.
• 1472. 19 Armais by the Grecians called Da∣naus, whose 50. daughters being married to the 50. sons of his bro∣ther Egyptos, murdered their hus∣bands: for which cause Danaus being forced out of Egypt, passed into Greece, where attaining to the Kingdom of Argos, he gave un∣to the Grecians the name of Danai.
• 1575. 20 Rameses, surnamed Egyptus, the brother of Danaus.
• 1550. 21 Amenophthis, III.
• 2590. 22 Sethos, or Sesothis 55.
• 2645. 23 Rhapsaces or Ranses, 66.
• 2711. 24 Amenophthis, IV. 40.
• 2751. 25 Rameses, II. 26.
• 2777. 26 Thuoris 7. After whose death suc∣ceeded a Race of twelve Kings, called the Diospolitani, who held the Kingdom for the space of 177 yeares; their names we find not but that one of the latest of them, whose daughter Solomon married, was called Vaphra; and perhaps Ogdoos who removed the Royal Seat from Thebes to Mem∣phis, might be another, and the eighth, as his name importeth.
• 2961. 39 Smendes, the Sisac of the Scri∣ptures, who made War upon Re∣hoboam the son of Solomon; con∣ceived to be the Sesostris of Hero∣dotus and others of the ancient Writers. Of whom it is reported, that being a king of great wealth and puissance, he had brought un∣der subjection all his neighbouring Princes: whom he compelled in turns to draw his Chariot. It hap∣ned that one of these unfortunate Princes, cast his eye many times on the Coach wheels: and being by Sesostris demanded the cause of his so doing, he replyed, that the fal∣ling of that spoke lowest, which but just before was in the height of the wheel, put him in minde of the instability of Fortune. The King deeply weighing the parable, would never after be so drawn in his Chariot. He also was the first that encountred the Scythians in battel; having already in conceit conquered them, before he led his Army against them. The Scythians

• much marvelled that a King of so great Revenues would wage War against a Nation so poor; with whom the fight would be doubtful, the Victory unprofitable; but to be vanquished a perpetual infamy and disgrace. For their parts they resolved to meet him, as an Enemy, whose overthrow would enrich them. When the Armies came to joyn, the Egyptians were discomfi∣ted, and pursued even to their own doors by the Enemy. But the Scy∣thians could not enter the Coun∣trey, because of the ••ens, with whose passage they were unac∣quainted; and so they returned.
• 2987. 40 Pseusenes, conceived to be the Cheops of Herodotus. founder of the vast Pyramis before descri∣bed, 41.
• 3028. 41 Nepher-Cherres. 4.
• 3032. 42 Amnoiphtis, V.
• 3041. 43 Opsochon, the Asychis of Herodotus.
• 3047. 44 Psamuchos, 9.
• 3056. 45 Psusennes, II. 14.
• 3070. 46 Sesonchis, 21.
• 3091. 47 Vsorthon, 15.
• 3106. 48 Takellotis, 13.
• 3119. 49 Patubastis, 40.
• 3159. 50 Osorchon, the second Hercules Aegyptius, as some will have it, 8.
• 3167. 51 Psamnis, 15.
• 3185. 52 Bochoris, called So, 2 King. 17. 4. taken and burnt by Sabacon the King of Ethiopia. 44.
• 3229. 53 Sabacon King of Ethiopia, 8.
• 3238. 54 Sevachus son of Sabacon. 14.
• 3252. 55 Tarachon, falsly supposed to be the Therah of the Scriptures. 18.
• 3270. 56 Stephinates, 7.
• 3277. 57 Niclupses, 6.
• 3288. 58 Psamniticus, who first made the Grecians acquainted with Egypt, 54.
• 3335. 59 Necho, who slew Josiah at the bat∣tel of Megiddo, 25.
• 3360. 60 Psamnis II. 6.
• 3366. 61 Aprios, called Hophra, Ier. 44.sub∣dued by Nebuchadnezzar, and deposed by Amasis. 25.
• 3391. 62 Amasis II. 44.
• 3435. 63 Psamnites, or Psamniticus II. a King of six moneths only; van∣quished by Cambyses, the second Monarch of Persia, who united Egypt to that Empire, under which it continued till the time of Darius the sixth King of the Medes and Persians, in the II. year of whose reign it revolted from him, and became a kingdom of it self, as in former times.
• 3555. 64 Amyrtaeus, the first King after the Revolt, 6.
• 3561. 65 Nepherites, 6.
• 3567. 66 Achoris, 12.
• 3579. 67 Psamnites III, 1.
• 3580. 68 Nepherites II. a King of two moneths only.
• 69 Nectanebos, 18.
• 3598. 70 Teos, 2.
• 3600. 71 Nectanebos II. the last King of the natural Egyptian race, that ever governed Egypt, by the name or a King. For in the 18 of the reign of this King, Egypt waa again re∣covered by the valour of Ochus the eighth Emperor of Persia. And when Alexander had overthrown Darius. he came & without blows won this fertile kingdom; which yielded him, during his life, the yearly value of 6000 talents. After his death, this kingdom fell to the share of Ptolomeus the son of La∣gus, from whom all the subsequent Kings of Egypt were called Pto∣lomies,

The Ptolomean Kings of Egypt.

• A. M.
• 3641. 1 Ptolomie, one of Alexanders Ca∣ptains, reputed the son of Lagus, but supposed to be the son of Phi∣lip of Macedon, and half-brother to Alexander. 40.
• 3681. 2 Ptol. Philadelphus, who filled the Library of Alexandria with 700000 Volumes, and caused the 72 Inter∣preters to translate the Bible.
• 3717. 3 Ptol Euergetes, the son of Phila∣delphus, vanquished Seleucus Cal∣linicus, and probably had subdued that kingdome, if not called back by domestick dissentions. 26.
• 3743 4 Ptol. Philopater, a cruel, voluptu∣ous, and incestuous Prince; cruelly slew Cleomenes the last king of Sparta, who had sled to his father for relief in the time of his exile. 17
• 3760. 5 Ptol. Epiphanes, at the age of five years succeeded his father; pro∣tected by the Romans against An∣tiochus the Great of Syria, who had an aim upon his kingdom. 28.
• 3784. 6 Ptol. Philometor, the son of Epi∣phanes, by Cleopatra the daughter of the great Antiochus; protected in his nonage by the Romans also: caused himself to be crowned king of Syria, but again relinquished it. 35.
• 3829. 7 Ptol. Euergetes II. for his desorm∣ity called Physcon, the brother of Ptol. Philometor: A wicked Prince, and one that spent the greatest part of his reign in a cause∣less war against Cleopatra his wife and sister. 29.
• 38••8. 8 Ptol. Lathurus, reigned 16 years with Cleopatra his mother, by whom dispossed of his estate for

• the space of ten years; after her death was sole Lord of Egypt. His brother Alexander being taken by the Queen-mother as her Asso∣ciate in the time of his deprivation, and passing in the Accompt of the Kings of Egypt.
• 3892 9 Ptol. Auletes, the son of Lathu∣rus, sirnamed also Dionysius, whose Brother being setled by him in the Isle of Cyprus, was most unjustly suipped by the power of the Ro∣mans, and he himself outed of Egypt by his own subjects, but re∣stored by the a••d & love of Pompey.
• 3922. 10 Ptol. Dionysius called also Junior, or the younger, together with Cleopatra his wife and sister, suc∣ceeded Auletes in the throne, which they held together by the space of three years. In the last of which, Pompey was barbarously slain on the shores of Egypt, by the com∣mand of Achilles the young Kings Governour; and the young King himself unfortunately slain in the Alexandrian Tumult against Julius Caesar.
• 3925. 11 Cleopatra, the wife and sister of Dionysius, restored to the Crown of Egypt by the bounty of Caesar, of whom exceedingly beloved for her wit and beauty. After which she governed Egypt 19 years in her own sole right, with great pomp and splendor: when being im∣barqued in the bed and fortunes of Marc. Antonie, she killed her self not long after his fatal o∣verthrow at the battel of A••••∣um, that she might not be ••ed in triumph through Rome.

These Ptolomean Princes of Egypt, were for the most part in wars with the Kings of Syria, in which they were by turns victorious, and vanquished; neither Prince having cause to boast of his bargain. After the death of Cleopatra, whose life and love with Marcus Antunius I will not now relate; this Country fell to the share of the Roman Emperours, and was by them highly prized, and warily looked into. The Governour hereof was but a Gentleman of Rome; no Senator being permitted to come into it; it being a maxim of State, not to suffer men of great houses to come into that Country, whose revolt may endanger the whole Empire. Of this nature was Egypt. For be∣sides the natural situation of the place very defensible; and besides the abundance of money, with which it was stored; this Country alone furnished the City of Rome with Corn, for four moneths yearly. Whence Vespasian being chosen Emperor by the Syrian Legions, and hearing of the defeat of his concurrent Vitellius, hastened hither; to this end only, that detaining the ordinary provision of victuals, he might by famine compell the City of Rome to stand at his devotion: Vt urbem quoque externe opis indigam ••ame urgeret•• as the Historian hath observed. When made a Province of that Empire, it was counted as the Emperors sole Peculiar: afterwards made (as well it might) an entire Diocese of it self, subordinate to the Praefectus Praetorio Orientis. In the division of the Empire allotted to the Constantinopolitans, whose Government being thought to be insupportable by this wanton People, they called in the Saracens, by whom the Greek Garrisons were cast out, and the Country made subject to Haumar the third of the Caliphs. Afterwards, weary of them also, they would have a Caliph of their own revolting totally from the Caliph of Bagdat. So that from this time forwards we shall meet with two Caliphs at a time, the one residing at Caire in Egypt, to whom the Saracens or Moors of Spain and Africk did submit themselves; the other at Bagdat, who Lorded it over all the rest, at least as to the ••upr••me title and some chief Prerogatives, though the main power was cantonned and disposed of among their Sultans.

The Caliphs of Egypt.

• A. Ch. A. H.
• 870 247. 1 Achmades, or Achmat. 10.
• 88•• 257. 2 Tolen. 3.
• 883. 260. 3 Hamaria. 29.
• 903. 280. 4 Abarun, slain by Mucta∣phi, the Caliph of Babylon.
• 940. 317. 5 Achid Muhamid, the son of Tangi. 3.
• 943. 320. 6 Abigud, the son of Achid. 27.
• 970. 347. 7 Meaz Ledin, Illahi, of the race of Phatime and Hali. 5.
• 975. 352. 8 Aziz, the son of Meaz. 21.
• 996. 373. 9 Elhachain. 23.
• 1019. 396. 10 Etaber Leazizdin Illah••. 16.
• 1035. 412. 11 Musteratzer Billahi. 60.
• 1096. 472. 12 Musteale. 5.
• 1100. 477. 13 Elamir Bahacan Illahi. 35
• 1135. 512. 14 Elhapit Ladin Illahi.
• 15 Etzahar.
• 16 Elphaiz.
• 17 Etzar Ledin Illahi, the the son of Elphaiz the last Caliph, or King of Egypt, of the race of Phatime: the Turks succeeding after his death in this opulent kingdome. Concerning which we are to know, that Elphaiz the father of Etzar, being over-power'd by Almericus King of Hierusalem craved aid of Norradine the Turkish Sultan of Damascus, which he received under the conduct of Sarracon, or Shirachoch, a right valiant and stout Commander; who taking his advantages, not only cleared the Country of Almericus, but got the whole kingdom to himself; dashing out the brains of Elphaiz with his horsemans-mace. And though Etzar his son assumed for a while the title of Caliph; yet the destruction of himself, and the whole Phatimean family, rooted out by Sarracon, soon put an end to that claim, and left the king∣dom in the peaceable possession of the Turkish Sultans.

The fourth Dynastie, or the Race of the Turkish Kings or Caliphs of Egypt.

• 1163. 1 Asereddin, sirnamed Shirachoch, called Sarracon by the Christian writers; the first of the Turks which reigned in Egypt; of the Noble family of Alub.
• 1186. 2 Zeli-heddin, called Saladine by the Christian writers, the son (or as some say, the nephew) of Sarracon or Shirachoch; confirmed in his estate by the Caliph of Bagdet, under whose jurisdiction he redu∣ced the Egyptian Schismaticks; He obtained also the kingdom of Damascus, conquered Mesopota∣mia, Palestine, and in the year 1190 regained the City of Hierusalem. A Prince who wanted nothing to commend him to succeeding A∣ges, nor to glorifie him in the kingdom of Heaven, but the sa∣ving knowledge of CHRIST JESUS.
• 1199. 3 Elaziz, the second son of Saladine, succeeded in the Realm of Egypt, which he exchanged afterwards with his brother Eladel for the kingdom of Damascus.
• 4 Eladel, or El-Aphtzel, by the Christian writers called Meledine, succeeded upon this exchange, in the kingdom of Egypt: and over∣came the Christians, without the losse of a man, at the siege of Caire, by letting loose the Sluces of Ni∣lus, which drowned their Army, and forced them to covenant with him at his own pleasure.
• 1210. 5 Elchamul.
• 1237. 6 Melech Essalach, by the Christian writers called Melechsala, the son of Elchamul, who overcame Lewis the 9. of France; and going with that King towards Damiata, was slain by the souldiers of his guard, called Mamalucks.
• 1242. 7 Elmutan, the son of Melech Es∣salach, succeeded for a time in his Fathers throne; But the Mama∣lucks being resolved to obtain the kingdom for themselves, inforced him to flie to a Tower of Wood, which they set on fire; & the poor Prince, half burned, leaping into a River (which ran close by it) was there drowned: & the Mamalucks setled in the kingdom, An. 1245.

These Mamalucks were the ofspring of a People on the banks of the Euxine Sea, vulgarly called the Circassians: whom Melechsala either bought of their Parents, or (at the second hand; of the Tartars, then newly Masters of those Countries, to supply the want of valour in the idle and effeminate People of Egypt: and out of them selected a choise Band of men for the guard of his person. Knowing their strength, and finding their opportunity, they treacherously slew Melechsala their Lord and Master; appointing one Azeddin Ibek, a Turco-man by nation, and therefore by most Christian writers called Turquimeneius, (one of their own number) a man of great spirit and valour, to succeed in the Throne. Unwilling to re-give the Supreme Authority into the hands of the Egyptians; and not permitting their own sons to enjoy the name and privilege of Mamalucks, they bought yearly certain numbers of Circassian slaves, whom they committed to the keeping of the Egyptians, by them to be instructed in the Egyptian language, and the Law of Mahomet. Being thus fitted for im∣ployment, they were taught the Discipline of War, and by degrees advanced unto the highest Offices of power and trust; as now the Janizaries are in the Turkish Empire: in choice and ordering of whom, as the Ottoman Turks were Precedented by those of Egypt; so it is possible enough that the Janizaries may make as great a Change in the Turkish Empire, as the Mamalucks did in the Egy∣ptian. So unsafe a thing it is for a Prince to commit the sole guard of his person, or the defence of his Dominions, to the hands of such, whom not the sense of natural duty, but the hopes of profit or preferment may make useful to him. For thus we find, that Constantius a King of the Britains was murdered by his Guard of Picts: most of the Roman Emperours, by the hands of those whom they intrusted either with the guard of their persons, or the command of their Armies: And I think no man can be ignorant how many times the Princes and Estates of Italy have been brought into the ex∣tremest dangers, by trusting too much to the honesty of mercena••ie Souldiers and Commanders. Take we for instance the proceedings of Giacopo Picinino, who with his Followers first took Pay of Ferdinand the first of Naples; left him, to fight for his vowed Enemy Iohn Duke of Calabria the son of Renè Duke of Anjou; whom also he forsook in his greatest need. The like we find of Francisco Sforza, first entertained by the Duke of Millain, from whom he revolted to the Florentines, from

them to the Venetians; and being again received into the Pay of the State of Millain, made use of their own Army to subdue that City. Nor can I speak better of the Switzers or their dealing in this kind with the French Kings, the Sforza's Dukes of Millain; and with whom not (to say the truth) that ever trusted or employed them.

Now as it is unsafe for a Prince to commit the custody of his person, or the defence of his Estates to the faith of Forreiners; so is it dangerous to him to call in such aids, and to commit his fortunes either wholly or principally unto their fidelity. A moderate supply of men, money, or munition, from a confederate King, is, I confesse, in most cases convenient, in some necessary: as well to save their Natives from the sword; as to trie a friend, and interest an Allie in the same cause. But to invite so great a number of Succours, as from Helpers may become Masters, and oppresse the people whom they came to defend; is that Rock on which many Realms have suffered shipwrack, and which a good Pilot of the State should with all care avoid. For as in the sickness of the body natural, it is hurtful to a mans health and life, to take more physick then it may (after the effect thereof be wrought) either di∣gest, or put out again: so in the body politick, it is a perilous matter to receive more succours, then what (after they have done the deed they were sent for) we may either with conveniencie reward and settle with us, or at liberty expell. Of all Surfeits, this of Forraign supplies is most uncurable: and Ne quid nimis, if in nothing else true, is in this case, oracle. There is no Kingdom (I am verily per∣swaded) under the Sun, which hath not been by this means conquered; no Common-wealth, which hath not been by this means ruined. To relate all examples, were infinite and tedious; to inferre some, pleasing to the Reader; and to illustrate the point, not unnecessary. To begin with former times: Philip of Macedon, called into Greece to assist the Thebans against the Phocians, brought all that Country, in a manner, under his command. The Romans, by aiding the Sicilians against the Carthaginians, possessed themselves of that flourishing Island; by assisting the Hedui against the Sequani, mastered France; by succouring Androgeus against Cassibelan, seised on Britain; by siding with the Aetolians against Perseus, united to their Empire all the Kingdom of Macedon; and by the same course what not? In after-ages, the Britains called in the Saxons, and were by them th••st out of all; the Irish called in the English, by whom they were in process of time totally subdued; and the Indians called in the Mogul-Tartars, who now Lord it over them. These forrein supplies are invited or let into a Country, commonly in four cases. First, when some one man upon discontent or desire of revenge, openeth them a way to a Country: upon which motives, Narses invited the Lombards into Italy; and Count Julian brought the Moors into Spain: the one to be revenged on the Empresse Sophia, who had despitefully reviled him; the other to revenge himself on King Rodo∣rick, who had ravished his daughter. Secondly, when a weaker Faction makes way for them, to main∣tain their cause against a stronger: On which ground the Duke of Burgundy being oppressed by the faction of Orleans, made way for Henry the fifth to passe into France; and the Leaguers drew the Spaniards in, to hold up their declining cause against Henry the 4th. Thirdly, when an ambitious Prince makes use of a forrein power, to usurp upon the rights of another man: And for that cause Ludowick Sforze perswaded Charles the 8. to undertake the Conquest of the Realm of Naples, that by the countenance of his Arms he might appropriate to himself the Dukedom of Millain. Fourthly, when a King overburthened by a forrein or domestick force, which he is not able to resist, requires the help of a forrein friend: in which case, Plus à medico quam a morbo mali, the Physick proves many times worse then the Disease: for thus the Kings of Naples of the house of Aragon, being in danger of the French, drew in the Aids of Ferdinand the Catholique, the Cousin-German once removed of the King then being: And the Caliphs of Egypt, not able to withstand the forces of Almericus, craved aid of the Turks; by which meane both those kingdoms were made a prey to their forrein friends, and by avoiding Scylla fled into Charybdis. Nay many times it so happeneth, that these forrein succours joyn in design with those against whom they were called, and divide the conquered State between them: And so we find that the Burgundians being called by Stilico into Gaul, to prevent the breaking in of the Franks or French, joyned with them in a common league against the Romans, whom they dis∣possessed at last of all that Country. Onely amongst so many examples to this purpose, we find the Low-Country-men to have prospered by these forrein aids; who by the assistance of the English, ransomed themselves from that yoke of bondage which was intended to be put upon them by the King of Spain. This I acknowledge to be true, and look upon it as a great Argument of the integrity and honesty of the English Nation; although it be as true withall, that the English never had such an Army there, as to be able to subdue them. But give me such another instance, I will quit the cause: for the same Low-Country-men found it otherwise with the Duke of Anjou, Brother to Henry the 3. of France, whom they created Duke of Brabant, and their Governour-Generall; permitting him to bring in as many of the French, as either his authority or their own monies were able to raise: who was no sooner setled in that command, but he made it his chief business to seize upon their strongest Holds, and to be a more absolute Prince amongst them, then ever the Spaniards or Burgundians had been before. So that I think I may conclude, that these forrein Succours are the last to be tryed, and the least to be trusted, of any remedies in State. But it's now more then time to return to the Mama∣lucks; and in them to

The third Dynastie of the Egyptian Kings, or the Race of the Mamalucks.

• A. Ch.
• 1255. 1 Turquimeneius, who being pro∣moted to the kingdom, released King Lewis, whom Melechsala his predecessor had taken prisoner; but performed not half of the con∣ditions agreed upon.
• 2 Clothes (by some called Elmu∣tahaz) taking advantage of the miseries of the Turks then distres∣sed by the Tartars, seised on the greatest part of Syria and Pale∣stine.
• 1260. 3 Bandocader perfected the begun∣conquests of Clothes, and took from the Christians the strong City of Antioch, carrying on his Armies as far as Armenia, where he did much spoil.
• 4 Melechsait, or Melechsares, re∣stored the power of the Mama∣lucks in Syria and Palestine; where it had been much impaired by Edward the son of Henry the 3. of England, and Henry Duke of Mecklenburgh, &c.
• 1289. 5 Elpis, or Alphix, recovered from the dissenting Christians, the strong Cities of Tripolis, Berytus, Tyre, and Sidon; all which he razed to the ground, that they might not be any more serviceable to the af∣fairs of the Christians.
• 1291. 6 Araphus, or Eustrephus, by birth a German, released Henry Duke of Mecklebourg, after he had been prisoner 26 years. He rooted the Christians out of Syria, took Pto∣lomais the last Town they there held, and so razed it, that he made it fit to be ploughed.
• 7 Melechnesar, when he was Lieu∣tenant to Arapbus, was discom∣fited by Cassanes, a great Prince of the Tartars, with the loss of 40000 Egyptians: but Cassanes being de∣parted, he recovered again all Sy∣ria, and destroyed Hierusalem; for which service he was afterward made Sultan of Egypt.
• 8 Melechadel, whom I suppose to be that Sultan that governed Egypt, when Tamberlane with unresist∣able violence conquered it; but of this I am not certain; neither can I meet with any constant and continued series (which I dare re∣lie on) of his successors in this king∣dom, till I come to
• 9 Melechella, or Melechnaser, who in the year 1423. subdued the Isle of Cyprus, and made the Kings thereof to be from thenceforth Tributaries to the Mamaluck Sul∣tans.
• 1465. 10 Cathbeyus, who much reformed the State of Egypt, and was a pro∣fessed enemy of Bajazet 2. the 8^th King of the Ottomans.
• 1498. 11 Mahomet the son of Cathbeyus, deposed by the Mamalucks, for fear the kingdom might by him be made hereditary; it being against their usual custome, that the son should succeed his father in the name and privileges of a Mama∣luck.
• 1499. 12 Campson Chiarsesius, succeeded on the deposing of Mahomet.
• 13 Zanballat, who dethroned Camp∣son, and not long after was depo∣sed by
• 1500. 14 Tonombeius; outed of his Estate by the joynt-consent of the Ma∣malucks, so to make way for Cam∣pson Gaurus.
• 1501. 15 Campson II. sirnamed Gaurus, reformed the disordered and fa∣ctious estate both of Court and Country, and for the space of 16 years governed very prosperously: But siding at the last with Hysmael the Persian Sophie against Selimus the first of that name, the 3. Em∣peror and ninth King of the Otto∣man family, he drew his Kingdom into a war, in which his Armies were overthrown, and himselfe slain in battel.
• 1517. 16 Tonombeius II. succeeded Camp∣son Gaurus both in his Kingdom and misfortunes: vanquished in his first year by the said Selimus the first, An. 1517. Who having conquered this rich Kingdom, was used to say, That he had gotten a Farm to feed his Gomoglans, or young Souldiers. So Egypt became a Province of the Turkish Empire, as it still continueth.

What the Revenues of it were in the time of the Pharaohs, I am not able to affirm. Great they must be, beyond the proportion of belief, or else they could never have been Ma∣sters of sufficient Treasure to finish those vast Structures which they un∣dertook. Twelve thousand and five hundred Talents they amounted An∣nually unto in the time of the Ptolo∣mies, which of our money makes the summe of Two Millions and 347750

pounds. Which summe, Augustus Caesar (appropriating this Province to himself) is said to have doubled: But whether he had it all in Money, or part hereof in Money, and the rest in Corn, I de∣termine not. Certain it is, that there was yearly shipped hence for Rome, in the time of that Empe∣rour, Two hundred thousand Measures of Wheat, every Measure weighing Twenty pound weight; which cometh to Seven Millions and an hundred forty thousand of our English Bushels: Sold by him, or distributed gratis amongst the Poor, as he saw occasion. So that there might be very well some a∣batement in Money, considering that the Corn amounted to so great a summe. Nor were they much lesse, if ought at all, when the Mamalucks ruled in this Country. For Campson Gaurus, at his coming to the Throne, gave no lesse then Ten millions of Ducats, at one clap, amongst his Souldiers. But the Turks at this day, partly through their Tyrannical government, and partly through the discontinuance of the usual Traffick through the Red-Sea, receive no more then Three Millions; one of which is hoorded in his own Coffers; the second is appropriated unto his Vicegerent Bashaw, for support of his charge; the third is distributed among his Garrison-souldiers, and such of them as by land guard his own Million to Constantinople; for by sea he dareth not venture it, for fear of the Florentine, who with a few ships Lordeth it in the Mediterranean.

And so much for EGYPT.

OF BARBARY.

BARBARY is bounded on the East with Cyrenaica; on the West with the Atlantick Ocean; on the North with the Mediterranean, the Straits of Gibraltar, and some part of the Atlantick also; on the South with Mount Atlas, by which separated from Libya Inferior, or the Desarts of Libya.

It containeth in it the whole Diocese of Africk, & part of the Diocese of Spain: subject in former times to the Commonwealth of Carthage, and the great Kings of Mauritania and Numidia. When conquered by the Romans, they gave to that part of it which they won from the Carthaginians, the name of Africa; calling that Province by the name of the whole Peninsula; and afterwards ex∣tended it over all the rest of the Country on the North of Atlas. Which name it held till the subju∣gation of it by the Saracens, by whom called BARBARY, either from Barbar, signifying in their language an uncertain murmur, such as the speech of the Africans seemed to them to be; or from the word Bar signifying, a Desart; which doubled, made up first Barbar, and after Barbary.

It is situate under the third and fourth Climates; so that the longest Summers day in the parts most South amounteth to thirteen houres three quarters, increased in the most Northern parts to fourteen houres and a quarter. In length extended from the Atlantick Ocean to the greater Syrtis, for the space of 1500 miles; in breadth from Mount Atlas to the Mediterranean, where narrowest 100 miles; but towards the Straits, where broadest, almost three hundred.

The Country in such parts as lie nearest to the Mediterranean, is full of hils, covered with woods, and stored with plenty of Wild-beasts; provided reasonably well of most sorts of Fruits, but unfit for Wheat, insomuch that most of the Inhabitants live of Barley-bread. Betwixt which and Mount Atlas is a Champain country, watered with many pleasant Rivers issuing from that Mountain, and liberally furnished with Cherries, Figs, Peares, Plumes, Apples of all kinds; abundance of Oile, Honey, Sugar; some Mines of Gold, and that for purity and sineness nowhere to be bettered. Here are also besides large Herds of Cattel, some Elephants, Lyons, Dragons, Leopards, and others of the like savage nature, and of Apes great multitudes; Horses good store, of excellent both strength and beauty. But taking it in the best parts, it falleth extremely short of that infinite fertility which is ascribed to it by the Writers of elder times. For besides the miracle of five hundred ••ars of Corn growing on one stalk, (whereof more anon) Pliny reporteth, that not far from the City of Tacape, in the way to Leptis, a man might see a great Date-tree overshadowing an Olive, under the Olive a Fig-tree, under that a Pom-granat, under that a Vine, and under all, Pease, Wheat, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉; all growing and flourishing at one time. It is affirmed also by the same Author, that the Vin•• beareth twice a year, that some fruits or other are gathered in it at all times of the year; and that a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of ground of four cubits square, was usually rented out at so many Denarii: by which accompt, (as the learned Budaeus doth compute it) an Acre of that ground must be worth yearly 12800 of the Roman Sestertii, which make 320 Crowns. An infinite and unparallel'd increase of the Fruits of the Earth, if the Author were not out in his valuation.

The People are of a duskish colour, but inclining to blacknesse: much of the same nature with the Arabians, by whose numerous families formerly they were overspred; but the Africans of the two the better active of body, well skilled in Horsmanship, but impatient of labour; covetous of honour, inconstant, crafty, and unfaithful; studious in matters of their Law, and in some of the Liberal Sci∣ences, especially Philosophie and the Mathematicks, of which in many parts of the Mahometan Coun∣tries they are admitted to be Readers: they are also said to be stately of gate, exceedingly distrustful, in their hate implacable, and jealous of their women beyond all compare. The women of a comely body, and well featured, beautiful in blacknesse, of delicate soft skins; and in their habit and apparel beyond measure sumptuous: so drest, to make themselves more amiable in the eyes of their hus∣bands; for otherwise not permitted to stir abroad, and seldome to see any body but those of their own houses.

The Language spoken at the present in most of the Maritime Towns, except those of Fesse and Morocco, is the Arabick tongue. In those two Kingdoms, and most part of the Country-villages, the Punick or old African, the antient languages of the Country: the Punick, spoken in all places where antiently the Carthaginians were of any power; the African (whatsoever it was) in the parts of Mauritania, not subject to them. Of the Latine there is no remainder; which though it was the Language of the Roman Colonies, yet never could it spread so far as to extinguish or suppresse the old natural tongues: and in the Colonies themselves so much degenerated in short time, so barbarously and imperfectly spoken; that a Sister of the Emperor Severus, who lived in Leptic, a Roman Colonie, coming to Rome to see her Brother, spoke it so incongruously, that the Emperor was ashamed to hear it. And though the Sermons of S. Augustine, an African Bishop, were preached in Latine, because preached in Hippo his Episcopal See, which was then a Colonie of the Romans; yet he confesseth that he was sometimes fain to use such words as were not Latine, to be the better understood of his Congregation.

The Christian faith was first planted, in that part hereof which was called Africa Propria by Epae∣netus, one of the 70 Disciples; by Dorotheus in his Synopsis, affirmed to be the first Bishop of Car∣thage: In Mauritania, by S.Simon the Apostle, sirnamed Zelotes. Metaphrastes addeth, that S. Simon Peter preached here also, when by the Decree of Claudius Caesar he was forced from Rome; and at his going hence, left Crescens his Disciple to promote the work. But by whomsoever planted first, it found good increase, and was so propagated in short time over all this Country, that in the year 250. or before, there were in it above 90 Bishops; for so many were assembled in the Synod of La∣besitum: and in the year 398. when the faction of the Donatists was of greatest power, we find no sewer then 214 Catholick Bishops met together in the Councel of Carthage. Which as it is an ar∣gument of the great increase of Christianity, in those parts of Africa; so it shewes also that the Church was in ill condition; so overpower'd by the violence of that mighty faction, who had at least 270 Bishops of their own opinion; that the Orthodox party was necessitated to increase the num∣ber of Bishops, for fear of being over-balanced by the contrary side, if ever the difference should come to be examined in a publike meeting. These Bishops ranked into six Classes, according to the number of the African Provinces: the Bishops of each Province subject to their own Metropolitan, who in this Diocese (contrary to the usage of all other Churches) had the name of Primates: but all of them subordinate to the Primate of Carthage, originally invested with Patriarchal jurisdiction over all these parts. Latius fusa est nostra Provincia: Habet enim Numidiam, & Mauritanias duas, sibi cohaerentes, are S.Cyprians words. Which shew, that Leo Africanus was a better Geographer then an Historian or Divine: He would not else have told us in such positive terms, that those of Barbary remained in their old Idolatrie till 250 years before Mahomets birth, at what time they received the Gospel, and not before. But the good man mistook the reviving of the Orthodox faith, in the time of Justinian, after it had been long suppressed by the Vandals of the Arian faction (who at one time banished hence 300 Catholike Bishops) for the first planting of the Gospel. Otherwise not to be ex∣cused. But after this Reviver, it held not long, when suppressed by the Saracens; and so suppressed, that except it be in some few Towns possessed by the King of Spain, and the Crown of Portugal, there is no tract of Christianity to be discerned in all this Country; Mahometism being elswhere uni∣versally imbraced amongst them.

Amongst the men of most note for Souldiery, which have been born in this Country, we may reckon Amilcar the Carthaginian, and his three sons: 2. Annibal, 3. Asdrubal, and 4. Mago; men hardly to be parallel'd in any Ages: 5. Masinissa, King of the Numidians, one of their Co∣temporaries: and in the following times. 6. Septimius Severus, the Roman Emperour. Amongst those addicted to the Muses, those of most note, 1. Terence, 2. Apuleius. But for Divines, no Region in the world afforded men of more eminent note, nor better deserving of the Church. 1. Tertullian, 2. Cyprian, 3. Inlius Africanus, 3. Arnobius, 4. Lactantius, 5. Victorinus Afer, 6. Optatus Melevi∣tanus, 7. Victor Vticensis, and above all, 8. the most learned and divine S.Augustine, a man of such admirable abilities, and indefatigable industry, so constant a Defender of all Orthodox do∣ctrines against the Hereticks of those times, that he deservedly got the name of Malleus Haereticorum.

Principal Mountains of this Country, besides Mount Atlas, (of which hereafter by it self) 1. Phocra, 2. Heptadelphus, and 3. Atlas minor in Mauritania Tingitana; 4. Cinnaba, 5. Garas, 6. Madethubadus, and 7. those called Gariphi, in Caesariensis, 8. Thambes, 9. Mampsarus, 10. Vsaletus, and 11. Zu∣chabarus, in Africa Propria. Of which, and others, we may speak more, if occasion be, in our de∣scription of the Provinces in which they are. And for the Rivers of most note, though none of any long course in so narrow a Country: we have in Tingitana, 1. Sala, falling into the Atlantick, out of Atlas minor; 2. another of the same name, and the same exit also, but far more to the North, to∣wards the Streit of Gibraltar; 3. Mosocath, mollified by Salust the Historian into Mulucha, and by him placed betwixt the Numidians and the Moors; 4. Malva, the boundarie at this day betwixt the Kingdoms of Fesse and Algiers; 5. Phthuth, of more same then any, of which more anon: in Caesa∣riensis, 6. Nasabath, 7. Sisaris, and 8. Sorbetes: in Africa Propria, or the Kingdom of Tunes, 8. Ru∣bicatus, which rising out of Mount Thambes, falleth into the Mediterranean near Hippo Regius; 9. Triton, which issuing out of the hill called Vsaletus, and making the great Fen called Tritonia Palus, endeth its course also in the Mediterranean; and finally, 10. Bagradas, the greatest in all this tract, which rising out of Mount Atlas, first runneth towards the East, and then receiving from the hill called Mampsarus the addition of another Stream, passeth directly Northward to the City of Vtica, and there ends his course.

Having thus laid together the chief Metes and Land marks, I should now proceed to the descri∣ption of the several Provinces hereof, as in other places. But because each part almost hath had for these later times its particular History, and that it is divided at the present into several Government, and under the command of several Princes: I will here lay down so much of the Storie of it as con∣cerns the whole, before such division; and afterwards pursue the Historie and Chorographie of the several parts. And for the whole we are to know, that this Country was first peopled by P••ut the third son of Cham: who leaving his brother Mizraim well setled in the Land of Egypt, passed to∣wards the West; and leaving Lehabim his nephew betwixt him and Mizraim, possessed himself of all the rest from the greater Syrtis to the Ocean. Remainders of whose name we find in the River Phut, (by Ptolemy called Phthuth, with but little difference, save that it savoureth more of the African roughnesse) near which Josephus findeth a Region called the Country of Phut, a Nation called he

Phuteans: seconded herein by S. Hierome, who speaking of this Regio Phutensis in Mauritania, (where the River Phuth is placed by Ptolomy) voucheth in generall terms the testimony of old Writers, both Greek and Latine. So that of this there is no question to be made. Such Nations as descended of this Plantation, shall be hereafter spoke of in their several Provinces. Governed at first by the Chiefs of their several families; but in the end reduced under the command of the Kings of Mauritania and Numidia, and the State of Carthage. The two first, Natives of this Country, of the race of Phut; the last descended also of the seed of Cham, their common Parent, by the line of Canaan; who on the conquest of their Country by the Children of Israel, forced to seek new dwellings; and having store of ships to transplant themselves and their families, setled in the mari∣time parts of Mauritania, and Africa properly so called. For, that the people of those parts, though lost into other names and families, were antiently of a Canaanitish or Phoenician, race, may be made apparent, 1. By the nearnesse of their Language, the Punick or Phoenician, and old Hebrew tongue, differing only in the dialect and pronunciation. 2. By the name Poeni, or Phoeni, little differing from that of the Phoenices. 3. By this testimony of S.Augustine, who telleth us in the Comment on S. Pauls Epistle to the Romans, begun, but not finished by him; Interrogati Rustici nostri quid sint, respondent Punici Chanani; that is to say, that when any of the Inhabitants of this Country (he himself was one) were asked what they were, they answered, Chanaanites. 4. We find in Hero∣dotus, how Cambyses having totally conquered Egypt, intended a war against the Carthaginians, who were then a State (it seemeth) of some power: but the Phoenicians, being the onely Sea-faring men Cambyses then had, absolutely denied to be imployed in that service; they being sprung from the same tree, that the Carthaginians were. 5. We read in Procopius, (out of which it is cited by Eva∣grius Scholasticus) how on two marble-pillars, situate nigh unto Tingis or Tanger, there was in the Phoenician language and character engraved, Nos fugimus à facie Joshuah praedonis, filii Nave: that is to say, We flie from the face of that Robber, Joshuah the son of Nun. The setling of this people there, a great incitement questionlesse unto Dido to come thither also; who feared as much danger from her brother Pygmalion King of Tyre, whose hands had been embrued in the blood of her husband, as the others did from the sword of Josuah. Gathering together all her treasures, which were very great, accompanied with her brother Barca and her sister Anna, the set sail for Africk; and landing in the Bay, where after stood the City of Carthage, she obtained leave to build a Fort of no greater bignesse then the could compasse round about with an Oxes hide. This the beginning of that City; hence the name of Byrsa, which at first it had. First founded in or about the year of the world 3070. which was about 144 years after the building of Solomons Temple, 143 years before the building of Rome, and about 290 years from the destruction of Troy. By which accompt (I note this only by the way) it is impossible that Dido or Elisa (for by both these names we find her called) should ever see the face of Aenaeas, unlesse it were in picture, or imagination; and therefore as impossible she should either fall in love with him, or be got with child by him, or finally kill her self on her being forsaken. All which being delivered by Virgil in his excellent Poem, did for long time obtain a generall belief with most sorts of men. Hereunto consenteth Ausonius, who honouring the Statua of this abused Princesse with an Epigram of 18 verses, among others gives us these four.

Invida cur in me stimulasti Musa Maronem, Fingeret ut nostra damna pudicitiae? Vos magis Historicis (Lectores) credite de me, Quam qui furta deum, concubitusque canunt.

Why didst thou stir up Virgil, envious Muse, Falsely my name and honour to abuse? Of me let Histories be heard, not those, Who to the World, Jove's theft and lusts expose.

Credible it is, that Aenaeas being driven on the coast of Africk, was by some Prince there courteously entertained, as a man whose fame had been his harbinger: but why the story should be fastned on Dido, I see not. Perhaps the unfortunate death of this Queen, who laid violent hands on her self, gave occasion to the Poet to fain, that it was for the love of Aenaeas: whereas it was indeed to avoid the lust and fury of Jarbas, a potent King in Africk, who violently desired to have his pleasure on her.

But to proceed. This City thus founded in a place commodious for trade and merchandise, in short time grew exceeding wealthy; And having wealth enough to hire mercenary souldiers (of which the needy Mauritanians & Numidians did afford good store) they conquered all the Sea-coasts from Cyrene to the Streits of Hercules (now called the Streits of Gibraltar) and so much also towards the South, as was worth the conquering; within which space possessed of 300 Cities. Grown to such height, that all the African Kings and Princes, and amongst them the Kings of Numidia and Mauri∣tania, were at their devotion: They began to cast their eyes on Sicily, a wealthy Island, lying near unto their Coast; which questionless they had possessed, if the Romans, envious of their greatness, and fearing their neighbourhood, had not took upon them the defence of the Mumertines, and under that pretence got some footing in it. The end of this war, after many brave exploits on both sides, was the driving the Carthaginians out of Sicil, their abandoning all the Islands betwixt them

and Italy, and the payment of 3200 Talents, amounting to about two millions of Crowns. And such end had the first Punick war, managed for the most part in Sicil: during which time, and the first war there managed by the Carthaginians, Africk it self was twice invaded; first by Agathocles Tyrant of Syracuse, (or so commonly called) and afterwards by Regulus a Roman General; but with no other great successe, then the spoil of the Country. The second followed not long after, but the Scene was altered: begun in Spain, prosecuted in Italy, and ended in Africk. Begun by An∣nibal the son of Amilcar, descended from Barca the brother of Dido or Elisa; who having conquered a great part of Spain, and thereby both increased his reputation and experience, conducted his victo∣rious Army through Gaul, and over the Alpes, into Italy it self; defeated the Army of the Romans, and slew some of their Consuls; so prosperous in the battel of Cannae, where the whole strength of Rome was broken, that had he followed his good fortune, and made use of his victory, he might within four or five dayes after have dined in the Capitol. Having for 18 years together held them work in Italy, he was called home to defend Africk from the forces of Scipio: who having driven the Carthaginians out of Spain, had very prudently translated the war to Carthage. The issue was, that on the losse of the battel of Nadagara, the Carthaginians were necessitated to submit themselves to the will of the Conqueror; that is to say, to deliver up all their Elephants, together with all their Ships and Gallies excepting ten; to make no war without leave of the Romans, to pay for the charges of the war 10000 Talents, and such other extremities. So ended the second Punick war, An. V. C. 602. And the third followed not long after; not any way occasioned by those of Carthage, but out of the inveterate hatred of the people of Rome, who would not think themselves safe whilest that City stood, and therefore sent another Scipio to lay siege unto it; by whom, after a long and stout resistance, it was at last taken and destroyed; the Treasure which was found in it, notwithstanding their former losses, and the low estate it was reduced to, besides what was consumed by fire, and reserved by the souldiers, amounting to 470000 pound weight of silver, which cometh to a Million, four hundred and ten thousand pounds of our English money.

Such end had Carthage, and therewithall the rest of the States of Africa, who though in hatred to the Carthaginians they had armed against her, and aided the Romans in these wars, yet they soon found their own fortunes buried in the self-same Grave. Subverted, one after another, as occasion was, they became all subject unto Rome, their Kingdoms and Estates turned to Roman Provinces. Of these were reckoned seven in all, that is to say, 1 Africa Propria, called also Zeugitana, and Pro∣consularis, 2 Byzacena, 3 Tripolitana, 4 Numidia, 5 Mauritania Caesariensis, 6 Sitisensis, and 7 Tingitana. Of which the last (I know not why) was laid to the Diocese of Spain, called therefore Hispania Transfretana. Spain on the other side of the Sea, by some elder Writers: the other six made up the Diocese of Africk, subordinate to the Praefectus Praetorius for Italy, who had here his Vicarius or Lieutenant. In this condition it continued, till subdued by the Vandals, a German nation, inhabit∣ing beyond the Elb on the Coast of the Baltick, where now lie the Dukedoms of Mecklenbourg and Pomerania. Their memory still retained there in the stile of those Princes, who call themselves Duces Vandalorum; and in the Confederacie of the Hanse-towns, called by some Latine Writers, Civitates Vandalicae. A Nation of great power, and numbers, (the Burgundians being only a part of these) one of the five into which Pliny doth divide the Germans. In the 11. year of the Empire of Arcadius and Honorius, they were invited into Gaul by the treacherous practises of Stilico, Lieutenant of the Western Empire; and after an abode of three years passed into Spain, together with the Suevi and Alani their Associates. But after 18 years, the Goths made that place too hot for them also. So that they could not but willingly accept the offer of Bonifacius, the Emperours Vicegerent in Africa: who stomacking to see his Office bestowed on Castinus an unworthy man, and his enemy; betrayed the Country to these Vandals, in the last year of the life and reign of Gundericus; an Arian in Religion, as were the rest of the Nation, to which induced by their neighbourhood and acquaintance with the Goths: which Heresie as they brought with them into Africk, driving thence all the Orthodox Chri∣steans; so they continued in it till their extirpation.

The Vandal Kings of Africa.

• A. C.
• 412. 1 Gundericus, who first invaded Gaul, Spain, and Africk. 16.
• 428. 2 Gensericus, who at the request of Eudoxia the widow of Valentini∣an, invaded Italy and sacked the City of Rome, the spoil whereof for 14 dayes he gave to his soul∣diers: but at the request of Eu∣doxia, whom he afterward married, he did not burn it. This Eudoxia was wife to the Western Emperor Valentinian; who having a mind to a Lady of Rome, the wife of one Maximus, he cunningly slipped the Ring of Maximus off his finger, and by that token sent for the Lady to the Court; and when she was come, ra∣vished her. To revenge this disgrace, Maximus slew Valentinian, made himself Emperor, and forced Eudoxia to be his wife. But she stomacking a match so unequal to her high birth, and having some incling of the man∣ner of her husbands death, sent for Gensericus into Italy. This Gensericus conquered Carthage and Hippo, and reigned 48 years.
• ...

• 476. 3 Honoricus, son of Gensericus. 7.
• 484. 4 Gundebundus, son to Genzo the brother of Honoricus. 15.
• 499. 5 Trasimundus, brother to Gunde∣bundus. 24.
• 523. 6 Hildericus, the son of Honoricus, deposed.
• 530. 7 Gilmir, the son of Genzo, one of the Descendents of Gensericus; over∣come by Belisarius a worthy and politique Leader, whom the Em∣peror Justinian imployed in that service.

And thus ended the Kingdom of the Vandals, (having continued in Spain and Africa, 146 years) by the valour of Belisarius. Who after this good service, was imployed by Justinian against the Gothes, then reigning in Italy; against whom he proceeded very fortunately: but being on I know not what envy, called to Constantinople, his eyes were put out, and he was forced to beg his bread at the Gate of the Temple of S. Sophia. A bad reward for so good a servant. But to go on: Justinian having regained Africk, to honour his new Conquest, exempted it from the command of the Praetorio-Praefectus of Italy, to which formerly subject; and increasing the number of the A∣frican Provinces by the addition of the Isle of Sardinia, made it a Praefecture of it self; appoint∣ing his Praefectus Praetorio Africae to reside in Carthage, as the chief City of his charge; which he then also raised to a Consular Province, having in former times been Proconsular only. But long it held not in this state: For in the year 647. the Romans were finally expulsed by Hucba a famous Leader, whom Osmen the third Caliph of the Saracens had designed to this service. Africk, from that time forwards, reckoned amongst the Provinces of the Saracenical or Mahometan Empire. But in the end, the Authority of the Caliphs growing lesse and lesse, and every one of their Sultans or Provincial Officers getting what he could for himself; this Country was distracted into many Kingdoms and Principalities, but all at last reduced to four of most consideration; that is to say, the Kingdoms of 1 Tunis, 2 Tremesen or Algeirs, 3 Fesso, and 4 Morocco. To the Chorography and History whereof we do now proceed, adding hereto in the fifth place the Isles of Barbay.

1. TVNIS.

THe Kingdom of TVNIS (in Latine called Regnum Tunctanum) hath on the East Cyrene, on the West the Kingdom of Algeirs or Tremesin, on the North the Mediterranean, on the South Mount Atlas. So called from Tunis the chief City of it.

The Country towards the East barren and destitute of water; but in the Western parts sufficiently plentiful of Corn and other fruits, and generally well set with Trees. The people more patient of labour then the rest of Barbary, and for that cause perhaps more healthy; but questionlesse of so good constitution, that they live commonly to great Age, unlesse a violent death prevent them; and are not much afraid of sickness, or much troubled with it.

It contains in it the two whole Provinces of Africa Propria (or Africa Minor, as some call it) and the Numidia of the Romans, called since Numidia Antiqua, to difference it from the present Numidia, lying on the other side of Mount Atlas. The principal Mountains of which Countries, be∣sides those spoken of already, were 1 Audas, 2 Buzara, 3 Cinna, 4 Dios, or the Hils of Jupiter, 5 Gillius, by some named Gigion, and 6 those called Thizibi. Rivers of most esteem with them, though not much with others, besides those mentioned before, 1 Ampsaga, now called Collo, and by some Sat Gemar, which divideth this Kingdom from that of Tremesen; 2 Catuda; 3 Cyniphus, issu∣ing from the hils called Zuchabarus, and falling into the Sea not far from Tripolis. Besides which there were some great Lakes; the chief whereof, 1 Hipponites near Mount Cinna; 2 the Lake of Pallas, or that called Palus Tritonia, where Minerva was said to have shewed herself the Inventress of Spin∣ing and of Oyle, and for that much worshipped by this People; 3 Sylura, another great Lake, but not so famous as the former, because not honoured by a Goddesse.

The whole divided by the Romans into these four parts, viz. 1. Africa specially so called, lying on the Sea, from the River Ampsaga to the Lesser Syrtis; 2. Tripolitana, from the Lesser Syrtis to the Greater; 3. Numidia, lying on the West of Zeugitana, or Africa Propria; and 4. Byzacena, so called from Byzacium, or Byzacina, a chief City of it; the territory whereof so extremely fruitful, that 400 Ears of corn were sent to Rome in the time of Augustus, and 360 in the time of Domitius Nero, growing on one stalk. But this Division being long since worn out of memory, it is divided at the present into the Provinces of, 1. Ezzab, 2. Tripolis, 3. Tunis, 4 Constantina, 5. Bugia. 1. EZZAB is that part of this Kingdom which lieth next to Cyrene: A small Region, and not very fruitful; yet the Inhabitants hereof are conceived to be rich, (the richer, in regard they are free from tributes) their wealth not rising from the commodities of their own Country, which affordeth them little else besides Dates and Olives; but from such merchandise which they buy of the Venetians, and sell to the Numidians. The richest, those of Mesrata, (a little Province of this Tract) which lieth near the Sea. Towns it hath some, but none of note: the chief of which, 1. Mesurata, 2. Sibeca, both upon the Sea; of which the first gives name unto that little Province spoken of before. Of more note in the former times was Philoeni Villa, situate on the Greater Syrtis, near the Promontory then called Hippi, but now Cabo de Surta; memorable for the adjoyning Altars called Phileni Arae, erected by the Carthaginians upon this occasion. Some controversies being grown betwixt those of Carthage and Cyrene, about their bounds; it was agreed, that two men at a set houre should be sent out of each

City towards the other; and where they met, there to be fixed the Meer-stone of their several Terri∣tories: The Phileni, two brothers nominated for Carthage, were so quick of foot, that they had got∣en a good way into the Country of the Cyrenenses, before they were met; wherewith the Cyreneans much enraged, put to them this choice, either to go so much back again, or to die in the place: This last accepted by the Phileni, who preferred the common good of their Country before their own; for preservation of whose name and honour to succeeding Ages, the grateful Carthaginians did erect these Altars.

2. West of the Province of Ezzab, lieth that of TRIPOLIS, which together with Ezzab made that Province which the Romans called Tripolitana: Not much more fruitful then the other, except in Barley; but more commodiously seated in regard of the Sea, which is here more safe for navigation, the former lying wholly on the greater Syrtis. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Leptis Magna, so called to distinguish it from another, but of lesse note, and therefore called Leptis Parva, situate in the (now) Province of Tunis. A town of so great wealth and trade, that it was worth a Talent daily to the Carthaginians. 2. Euphranta, called also Pyrgos Euphranta from some strong Tower in it, on the Western-bank of the greater Syrtis. 3. Cinsterna, on the Eastern side of the River Cyniphus. 4. Cabis, the utmost City of this Province westward; the same which Ptolomie cals Tacapa, situate at the fall of the River Triton into the lesser Syrtis. 5. Sabratha, and 6. Heva; not else observable, but that together with Leptis Magna they made up that one City which the Romans called from thence Tripolis. 7. Tripolis, founded by the Romans, and by them peopled with Colonies from those three Cities before mentioned. A City of great name and riches, till destroyed by the Saracens: By whom rebuilt adorned with many fair Temples, Colleges, and Hospitals; and flourishing in much wealth and lustre, it became a Kingdom of it self, but subject to the Kings of Tunis, till taken by the Genoes with a Fleet of 20 sail, and by them sold to the King of Fesse. Recovered not long after by the King of Tunis, it came once more to have a King of its own; till by the valour of Peter of Navar, it was conquered for Ferdinand the Catholique, the first Monarch of Spain; whose Nephew Charles the 5. conferred it on the Knights of S. John of Hierusalem, then expelled from Rhodes: whom the Turks under Sinan Basa General of Selimus the second, dispossessed by force, An. 1551. since that the ordi∣nary Residence of the Turkish Begterbeg for these African Provinces, and made an usual retreat for Pyrats▪ who infest these Seas, and do much mischief to the Coasts of Sicil, Italy, and others of the Christian Countries.

3. The Province of TVNIS, lying Westward to that of Tripolis, taketh up so much of this Kingdom, as antiently contained the Province of Byzacena; and so much of the Roman Africk, as lieth on the East of the River called Guadilharbar, the Hipponites Lacus of the Antient writers. The Country antiently so fruitful, that it yielded usually an increase of an hundred and fifty fold: For proof of which, besides the testimony of approved Authors, the wonderfull, if not prodigious Ears of Corn which before we heard of, may serve sufficiently. Now indigent, and so unprovided of all Grain for the use of their families, that they are fain to furnish themselves out of other places: the People not daring to manure or sow their land, for fear of the Arabians, who ever and anon fall into these parts, and spoil what they meet with.

Places of most note in it, in the elder times, 1. Adrumetum, or Adrumystus, now called Machometta, once a Roman Colony, and the Metropolis of the Province of Byzacena; by consequence, in the times of Christianity an Archbishops See: walled and repaired by the Emperor Justinian, and by his com∣mand called Justiniana. 2. Zama, the incamping place of Annibal before his battel with Scipio. 3. Nadagora, memorable for the great battel betwixt the two renowned Generals of Rome and Car∣thage, not parallel'd since their own times, nor in those before them. In which the great Controversie between those Cities being to be tried, the fortune of the day fell unto the Romans: For though Annibal shewed his singular judgment in ordering his Souldiers, as Scipio could not but acknowledge; yet being far the weaker in horse, and by an Order of the Senate of Carthage to fight in a place of dis∣advantage, he could do no marvels: the Romans with the losse of no more then 1500 of their own men, killing 20000 of the Carthaginians in the fight and chase. 4. Salera, the first place took by Scipio after the landing of his Army. 5. Vtica, a Tyrian Colony, beautified with an Haven capable of the greatest ships; much spoke of in the wars of Carthage, and memorable for the death of Cato (hence sirnamed Vtican) who here slew himself, for fear of falling into the hands of Caesar. It is now called Biserta. 6. Byzacium, seated in liberal and fruitful soils, as was shewn before; whence the Province had the name of Byzacena. 7. Ruspinum, made by Caesar the seat of his war in Africk, against the sons and faction of Pompey: as memorable in the times succeeding, for being the Epi••∣copal See of S. Fulgentius. 8. Thystrus, remarkable for the Tragedie of the Gordiani: Of which the Father in this City was saluted Emperor by the Souldiers, in hatred to Maximinus then their Em∣peror, whose Procurator they had slain in a tumult: but his party being discomfited by Capellianus whom Maximinus sent against him, and his son killed in the defeat; upon the hearing of the news, he here hanged himself. 9. Hippagreta, on a great Lake betwixt Carthage and Vtica; once of the Towns which held out longest for the Mercinaries, in their desperate Rebellion against the Carthaginians; by which the Estate of that great City was in danger of ruine, at the end of the first Punick war. 10. CARTHAGE, once the Lady and Mistresse of Africk; situate in the bottom of a safe and capacious Bay, the entrances whereof were very strongly fortified both by art and nature; Environed with the Sea, except upon one side only, where joyned unto the Land by a narrow Isthmus about two miles and an half in breadth: In compasse 24 miles; but measuring by the outward wall, it was 45.

For without the wall of the City it self, there were three wals more, betwixt each of which there were three or four Streets, with Vaults under ground of 30 foot deep, wherein they had place for 300 Elephants and all their Fodder, with Stables over them for 4000 Horse and all their Proven∣der; and Lodging in those Out-streets for the Riders of the said Horse, and for 20000 Foot besides, which never came within the City to annoy or pester it. On the South side stood the Castle called Byrsa, which took up two miles and an half in compasse; first built by Dido, on that ground which she obtained of the Libyans, when she got leave to buy only so much land of them, as she could com∣passe round about with an Oxes hide. In that, the sumptuous Temple of their antient Deities, Juno, Apollo, Aesculapius, Belus. On the West-side, a standing Pool made of the Sea-water; let into it by so narrow a passage, that there was but 70 foot open for the Sea to enter: On which they had a stately Arsenal, with their Ships and Gallies riding by it. Of the foundation and affairs of this mighty City we have spoke already. The Government of it first by Kings, those absolute enough at first, afterwards limited by the Senate, and finally made meerly titulary by the power of the People: which unproportionable mixture is much condemned by Aristotle in the 2. of his Politicks. Their Territories, before the second Punick war, when they were at the greatest, extended on the Sea∣coasts of the Mediterranean, from the Greater Syrtis to the Streits, and so unto the River Iberus, for the space of 2000 miles in length: their Revenues answerable, and readily brought in, by reason of their infinite trading. Which made the Roman people think themselves unsafe, whilst this City stood. Resolved on the destruction of it, they sent against it L. Martius and M.Manlius, their two Consuls, with a puissant Army: to whom the Carthaginians willingly delivered up their Arms and Shipping, contracting only for the preservation of the City it self, which was faithfully promised. But when they had withall given up the sons of their principal men to be sent to Rome for Pledges of their future loyaltie; they were told, that a City consisted not in wals, but in lawes and government. These with the Corporation, should remain as formerly; the Town to be removed ten miles further off, where there was no Sea to thrive and grow rich upon. Enraged herewith, it was resolved to abide the utmost; but they wanted necessaries for resistance. That want supplied for want of Iron to make Arms, with Gold and Silver; the Houses pulled down to furnish them with timber to build a Navy; and noble Ladies cutting off the hair of their heads, to make Ropes and Cordage; 25000 Women listed to defend the wals. But the fatal moment being come, a second Scipio is sent thither to dispatch the work; by whom at last the Town was taken, and for 17 dayes together consumed with fire; the Queen and multitudes of the People burning themselves in the Temple of Aesculapius, because they would not fall into the hands of the Romans. Reedified by Iulius Caesar, and made a Colonie, it recovered some part of her former lustre; but so, that her chief glory was rather to be sought for in her antient, then her present fortunes. Populi Romani Colonia, olim Imperii ejus pertinax amula, & priorum excidio rerum, quam ope prasentium clarior; was her character in the times of Pomponius Mela. But in this last Estate, accompted for the Metropolis of the Diocese of Africk, the Residence of the Vicarius or Lieutenant-General, and the See of the chief Primate of the African Churches; who had 164 Bishops under him in that one Province wherein Carthage stood. Destroy∣ed in the succeeding times by the Vandals, and after that by the Saracens; it is at last reduced to no∣thing but a few scattered houses, not above five and twenty shops, one Temple: all the rest a ruine. So truly said the antient Poet,

Sic patet exemplis Oppida posse mori. Thus by examples do we see, That Towns may die as well as we.

Of note at the present, 1. Tunis, supposed to be the Themisa or Thunisa of Ptolomie; of small ac∣compt till the last destruction of Carthage, by whose fall it rose. Situate not far from the ruines of that famous City, in compass about five miles, and in that compass said to contain 10000 housholds. Of great traffick, and well frequented by the Merchants of forrein nations, chiefly from Genoa and Venice. Remarkable in the Story of the Holy Wars, for the sieges and successes of two of our English Princes; that namely of King Edward the first, in his fathers life time; and that of Henry the fourth, then but Earl of Darby: by both which (though the last served only under the command of the French) the City was compelled to a Composition; Lewis the 9. commonly called S. Lewis, dying at the first siege of it. 2. Goletta, a strong Fort, built for defence of the Haven of Tunis, in a Demy-Iland, divided from the main Land by two narrow passages, but so that it commands them both. Taken, but not without extreme difficulty, by Charles 5. Ann. 1535. together with the Turkish Navy riding in the Lake fast by it; but again recovered by the Turks about 40 years after, Ann 1574. 3. Cairoan, built by Hucba, who first conquered Africk for the Saracens, in a sandie Desart, about 100 miles from Tunis, and 36 from any part of the Sea, to secure himself from any invasion, which the commodiousness of the Sea might bring upon him. Adorned by the first founder of it, with an admirable Temple raised on Pillars of Marble, who placed also in it a College of Priests, and made it the chief Residence of his posterity for the space of 170 years, who reigned here under the great Caliphs as the Sultans of Africk. Destroyed by the Arabians, in the 424 year of their Hegira, but regained from them by the King of Morocco; and still of such esteem amongst these Mahometans, that their chief men are brought thither to be buried from all parts of the Country, hoping by the prayers of those Priests to find a shorter way to Heaven then in other places.

4 More Westward yet lies the Province named CONST ANTINA, so called from Constantina the chief City of it. Extended from the Lake Hipponites, now named Guaditharbar, to Constantine a

Mountain bordering on Bugia, which I conceive to be the same with Mons Audus in Ptolomie. The soil hereof said to be very rich and fruitful both for Corn and Cattel, yielding abundance of Fruits, and great store of Butter. Rubricatus, by Orosius called Ordalio, now Ludog, the chief River of it.

Principal Cities of this Province, 1. Tabraca, on the East; and 2. Hippo Regius, on the Western bank of Rubricatus: both Roman Colonies, but this last most famous, in being the Episcopal See of re∣nowned S. Augustine. 3. Bona, the birth-place of that Father, built by the Romans about an hundred miles from the Sea, but situate in a large Plain, containing 40 miles in length, 25 in breadth: so rich and fertile, that the Town flourisheth to this day, adorned with a sumptuous Mosque, and never with∣out the company of Merchants coming from Genoa, Tunes, and the Isle of Zerby, for their Fruits and Butter. 4. Thuburnica, another Colonie of the Romans. 5. Sicca Veneria, another Town of the same nature; by Solinus called Veneria only, and by Pliny, Sicca. 6. Culcua, another of the Roman Colo∣nies, by the Moors now called Cucutina, but Constantina by the Latines, and most Nations else; Now the chief City of this Province, situate near a Mountain of the same name near the edge of Bugia. An antient City, but containing still 8000 families, many sumptuous buildings, amongst which a large Temple, two Colleges, and three or four Monasteries frequently visited by the Merchant, every Trade having here its peculiar Street; their chief commodities, Wooll, Cloth, Silks, Oyl, and some sorts of Fruits; which they exchange for Dates, or Slaves, who are here good merchandise. The City for the most part fenced about with high craggy rocks; and where those want, with strong wals, of a great height, and most exquisite workmanship, declaring the antiquity of it; A further argument whereof may be a fair Triumphal Arch not far from the City, and some Hot Bathes, after the manner of the Romans.

5. Most Westward lieth the Province of BVGIA, extended from Mount Constantine to the River Ampsaga, now called Chollo or Sef-Gemar: which with so much of Constantina as lieth on the West∣side of Rubricatus, made up that Province which the Romans called by the name of Numidia. The length hereof 150 miles on the Mediterranean, the breadth not above half so much. Narrower then Mauritania, as is said by Pliny; sed ditior & magis culta, but the richer of the two, and the better peopled. The Country of a sat soil, plentiful both in fruits and corn, but most fit for pasturage; to which the people were so addicted, that many of them cared not for building Houses, (instead where∣of they used the Hold of a Ship with the Keel turned upwards) but removed from one place to an∣other, as their Pastures failed them. From thence called Nomades by the Grecians, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 signi∣fying to feed or grase. The people of good mettal, swift of foot, and well skilled in horsmanship; but better in the onset and to give a charge, then in standing to it: such as the wild Arabians are now said to be.

Chief Towns hereof (besides Thuburnica, Culcua, Bona, Hippo, spoken of before, belonging to Numidia, though not to Bugia) 1. Bugia, built by the Romans on the side of a lofty Mountain looking into the Sea; by some conceived to have been the Thebuaca of Ptolomy, now the chief City of this Province, adorned with many sumptuous Mosques, some Monasteries and Colleges for Students in the Law of Mahomet, and many fair Hospitals for relief of the Poor; Fenced also with a strong Castle. Secured by the strength whereof, and growing rich by the fruitfulness of the situation, the Citizens began to grow proud and wanton; working much mischief to the Spaniards by their Gallies which they had at sea, till taught more modesty by Peter of Navar a Spanish Captain, A. 1508. by whom the Town was taken, and the people plundered. 2. Chollo, upon the Sea-side, the Chollops Magnus (as I take it) of Ptolomie; reported for a wealthie City. 3. Nicaus, seated towards Mount Atlas, in a pleasant and delightful country; which though interspersed with many hils, yet being those hils are clothed with woods, yield them good store of Goats and Horses, and feed the Vallies with fresh springs which do issue from them; they rather adde then detract any thing from the plea∣sures of it. 4. Madaura, by some called Madurus, the birth-place of Apuleius. 5. Thunudromum, another of the Roman Colonies. 6. Cirta, or Cirta Julia, the Metropolis of Numidia when a Roman Province, and formerly the Seat-royal of Syphax King of the Masaesyli, within whose country it was reckoned in former times, though afterwards laid unto this Province. Situate near the mouth of the River Ampsaga, and memorable for the tragedie of Sophonisba, the daughter of Asdrubal of Car∣thage; a Lady of most exquisite beauty, and yet carried more charms in her tongue then in her eyes. ••spoused first unto Masinissa King of the Numidians, but after upon reason of State married unto Syphax: who being took prisoner by his Rival, and brought to Cirta, the Lady upon hopes of liberty and honour both, bestowed her self on her first Lover: but Scipio fearing lest that marriage might withdraw Masinissa from the Roman party, caused the Lady to be seized on; which Masinissa not being otherwise able to prevent or remedie, sent her a Cup of poyson, which she drank and died.

Of these Numidians there is much mention in the Stories of Rome and Carthage; imployed by this last City in all their wars, both in Spain, Italy, and Sicil. Siding at last with Scipio against that State, they did good service to the Romans in the weakening and destruction of that City; whose fall they did not long survive: first conquered in the war of Jugurth; after the death of Juba, made a Roman Province. Their Kings, as far as I can trace the succession of them, follow in this Order.

The Kings of the Numidians.

• 1 Gala, the Father of Masinissa.
• 2 Desalces, the brother of Gala; according to the laws of the Country, which gave the Crown unto the brother, not the son of the former King, (like the law of Tanistry in Ireland) succeeded Gala.
• 3 N. N. a son of Desalces, in the absence of Masinissa, then serving under the Cartha∣ginians in the wars of Spain, possessed him∣self of the throne: slain not long after by a Rebel.
• 4 Masinissa, son of Gala, recovered the king∣dome of his Fathers; but again outed by Sy∣phax and the Carthaginians, betwixt whom and Masinissa, touching Sophonisba, there was deadly feud. Aided by Scipio and the Romans, with whom associated against Car∣thage, he not only recovered his own king∣dome, but was gratified with the greatest part of that which belonged to Syphax. A professed Enemy to Carthage, (the final ruine whereof he lived to see) till the time of his death, being then ninety years of Age.
• 5 Micipsa, the son of Masinissa; of whom no∣thing memorable.
• 6 Jugurth, the son of Mastanabilis, one of the Brethren of Micipsa, having wickedly made away the two sons of Micipsa, usurped the kingdom; & manifestly withstood the Romans, whose attempts sometimes by force, some∣times by subtility, but chiefly by money and bribes, he overthrew and made frustrate: Et fuit in Ingurtha (saith Florus) quod post Annibalem timeretur. At last, being broken by Metellus, vanquished by Marius, and by Bocchus delivered into the hands of Sylla, he was by Marius led in triumph to Rome. In this Triumph was carried 3700 pound weight in Gold; in Silver-wedges, 5775 pound weight; and in ready Coin, 28900 Crowns: it being the custome of the Romans in their Triumphs, to have carried before them all the riches and mony which they had brought out of the conquered Countries, to put into the common Treasury.
• 7 Hiempsal, son of Bocchus king of Mauri∣tania; gratified for his Fathers treacherie in betraying Jugurth, with the kingdome of Numidia: Relieved Marius, in his exile.
• 8 Hiarbas, another of the Marian faction, preferred to the Numidian Crown, but van∣quished and deprived by Pompey, at that time one of Sylla's Captains.
• 9 Hiempsal II. preferred by Pompey to this kingdom.
• 10 Juba, the son of Hiempsal the second, who siding with Pompey against Caesar, in the Civil wars, gave a great overthrow to Curio one of Caesar's Lieutenants; Curio himself slain, his whole Army routed, such as were taken prisoners murdered in cold blood. But being discomfited by Caesar, after Pom∣pey's death, Numidia was made a Province of the Roman Empire.

Thus by the fall of Carthage, and the death of Juba, came the whole Provinces of Africa Pro∣pria, and Numidia (containing the now Kingdom of Tunis) into the power of the Romans. Of which, the Nations of most note were the Nigitimi, on the Eastern parts of the Mediterranean, the Machyni, near the Lesser Syrtis; the Libya-Phoenices and Mideni, bordering upon Carthage; the Ionii, Navatrae, and Cirtesii, taking up all the Sea-coasts of Numidia. Such as inhabited more South∣wards on the back of these, not so much considerable: None of them to be staid upon, but the Libya-Phaenices, a mixt people of the old Libyans and new Phoenicians, as the Liby-Aegyptii were of the said Libyans and the neighbouring Egyptians. The memory of all of them so defaced by the violent inundation of the Arabians, that there is scarce any tract or footsteps of them in all the Country. When conquered by the Saracens, they were at first subject to the Caliph or Sultan of Cairoan: after the spoile whereof by the Arabians, subdued by Abdul Mumen King of Morocco, and by him added to that Kingdom. In the distractions of that State, made a peculiar Kingdom by some of the Relicts of the Stock of the Almohades, who took unto himself the title of King of Tunis, that City being his chief Seat. By him transmitted unto his posterity, till the dayes of our Grand∣fathers; when Muleasses, one of the youngest sons of Sultan Mahomet, having first murdered Mai∣mon his eldest brother, and put out the eyes of twenty of the rest, usurped the Soveraignty. Rosetta, the onely one of those Princes who escaped this massacre, by the aid of Solyman the magnificent ob∣tained the Crown: outed thereof not long after by Charles the fifth, appearing in favour of Mule∣asses, An. 1535. But the Tyrant did not long enjoy his ill-gotten Soveraignty, when his eyes were were also put out by his own son Amida, and so committed to close prison: Nor did Amida enjoy it long, dispossessed by Abdamelech his fathers brother. To Abdamelech, Mahomet his son succeeded, and in his life another Mahomet the brother of Amida; who being supported by the Turks, recover∣ed from the Christians the strong Fort of Coletta; and dying, left the Turk his heire, who doth now possesse it.

2. TREMESEN, or ALGIERS.

THe Kingdom of TREMESEN is bounded on the East with the River Ampsaga, (now called Ma••or) by which parted from the Kingdom of Tunis; on the West with the Kingdoms of Fesse and Morocco, from which separated by the River Malutha or Malva. So called from Tremesen or Teleusine, the chief City of it. Called also the Kingdom of Algiers, from the City so named, sometimes the Seat-royal of their Kings.

In the flourish of the Roman Empire, it had the name of Mauritania Casariensis: Mauritania, because a part of the Kingdom of Juba King of Mauritania, of which more anon; Casariensis, from Casarea the chief City of it, as that so called in honour of Augustus Caesar, on whom the Kings here∣of depended. Time made more antiently the Kingdom of the Masaesyli one of the most powerful Nations in all this tract, over whom reigned Syphax before mentioned; called therefore by Strabo, Masaesylilia, with good propriety; and corruptedly, Massylia.

The Kingdom extended in length from East to West, for the space of 380 miles, but of breadth not answerable: Is generally of the same nature (as to the Soil and Air) with the rest of Barbary; sufficiently fruitful towards the Sea, more barren and uncomfortable in the Southern parts. But mean∣ly peopled, by reason of the continual spoils made by the Arabians, who possess the Desarts; and the Cities of it much wasted by continual wars. Nor have the People any peculiar Character, but what belongeth to others of these Africans also.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Guagyda, inconveniently seated, as paying their accustomed tri∣butes to the King of Tremesen, their natural Prince, and contribution to the Arabians, who are here so numerous and powerful, that the Kings themselves of this small kingdom were fain to buy their peace of them at excessive rates. 2. Tigedent, somtimes famous, and abounding with men of learn∣ing; now almost forsaken, by reason of the ill neighbourhood of these Arabians. 3. Tebocrit, in∣habited for the most part by Weavers. 4. Bresch, the Inhabitants whereof use to paint a black Crosse on their cheek, and another on the palm of their hands: the reason of which custom they are ignorant of, but some conceive it to be a remembrance of their Christianity. 5, Ned-Roma, built as the people do pretend, by the antient Romans, as an Epitome or Abridgment of that mighty City, to which it is said to have some resemblance; and that imported by the name, which signifieth in their language, Like to Rome. Perhaps the same which Ptolomy calleth Novum oppidum or the New-town, then a Roman Colonie. 6. Batha, once a great City, since decaied by wars. 7. Oran, a noted Haven on the Mediterranean, said to contain no sewer then 10000 Families. Powerful at Sea, and much in∣festing with their Gallies the Coasts of Spain; till taken for Ferdinand the Catholick▪ by Peter of Navar A. 1506 since which time peopled & possessed by the Spaniards: In vain besieged by the Turks, A. 1562. 8. Masalquivir, a fair and capacious Haven on the same Sea also, and taken by the said Peter of Na∣var, about the same time. 9. Haresgol, in former times of much esteem amongst the Moors; but be∣ing destroyed by the King or Sultan of Cairoan, it bequeathed its greatness unto Tremesen, which after grew into renown. 10. Tremesen, once adorned with many beautiful Mosques, and five sumptuous Colleges, curiously wrought with Mosuick work. So populous, that there were reckoned in it 16000 families; and so well fortified, that it held out seven years against Joseph the great King of Fesse: not taken after that, though they were very much weakned by Abulthasen or Albohacen his son, suc∣cessor, under a siege of 30 moneths. By those, and the succeeding troubles it hath undergone, exceed∣ingly impaired both in strength and beauty. More antient, 11. Siga, an African City, and a Roman Colonie; the retiring place of Syphax and Bocchus, sometimes Kings of this Country. 12. Arsenaria, another Colonie of the Romans. 13. Jol, the seat-royal of king Bocchus, after such time as this country was conferred upon him by the Romans, on the taking of Jugurth: called afterwards Casarea, in honor of Augustus Caesar, whose Feudatories the Kings hereof were then accounted; or as some say, in honor of Claudius Caesar, by whom made a Colonie: the Metropolis of it also when a Roman Province, which from hence was called Caesariensis. Situate in or near the place where Oran now stands, which seemeth to have risen out of the ruines of it. 14. Saldae, a Roman Colonie also, out of whose ruines rose Algiers. 15. Algiers, by the Arabians called Gezeir, now the chief City of this Kingdom, situate near the Sea, in the form of a Triangle, with an Haven to it, but neither great, nor safe from the north∣winds, which do much annoy it. The buildings very beautiful; the publike Innes, Bathes, and Mosques, exceeding sumptuous; every Trade having a several place or street by it self. But that which is the greatest grace of it, is the situation of the houses standing in even streets one above another upon the rising of a steep Hill; so that the windows of one street or row of housing do all along overlook the tops of the other next beneath, which yieldeth to the Sea a most pleasant prospect. A City not so large, as strong; and not so strong, as famous. Famous for being the receptacle and retrait-place of the Turkish Pirats, who domineer so infinitely over the Mediterranean, to the great damage of the Merchants of all Nations, that frequent those seas. Famous also for the shipwrack which Charles the fifth here suffered, who besieging this Town, lost in the haven of it at one tempest, besides an infinite number of Karvels and small Boats, divers strong Gallies, 140 ships, a great many excellent peeces of Ordinance; such a number of gallant Horses, that in Spain the race of horses for service had like to have been lost for ever; and above half his men. It long enjoyed the benefit of proprietary princes, (but Homagers or Tributaries to the Kings of Tremesen) till such time as Selimes and Mahomet faling out, made the first, and that an irreparable breach in the Government. For Selimes, to strengthen his

side, implored the aid of Hairaccius Barbarossa, a noble Pirate; who taking his best advantage, slew the disjointed Brethren, and setled himself in the kingdom: which he had scarce made warm, when he left it to Hairadine Barbarossa his brother, An. 1514: This Hairadine drove the Spaniards out of Bugia, and was so renowned for Martial prowesse, that Solyman the magnificent made him Lord High-Admiral of his Fleet: which office, when to the prejudice of Christendome he had fortunately and for long time undergone; he died lamented, and made the Turk the heir of his kingdom; the king∣dom of Tremesen being made subject to the Turks much about that time. 16. Tetuan, and 17. Sargel, situate Westward of Algiers; Towns of Trade and Pyracie.

The old Inhabitants of this Kingdom, when a Roman Province, were the Herpiditani, Taladusii, Thalesssii, Malchubii, Maccurebi, Chituae, and others of as little note; the most predominant Nation being the Masasyli, over whom (and in that over all the rest) reigned Syphax, spoken of before; unfortunately famous for his tragical love to Sophonisba; for whose sake siding with the Carthagini∣ans against the Romans, he was vanquished and sent prisoner to Rome. His kingdom given to Masi∣nissa King of the Numidians, continued in his line till the death of Jugurth; and then bestowed upon the Kings of Mauritania, part of whose kingdom it was reckoned in the following times, till made a Province of the Empire by the Emperor Clandius. Won from the Romans by the Vandals, and then by the Saracens, it followed the fortunes of these last, while they stood and flourished: But growing into many distractions, and every Sultan or Provincial Governour shifting for himself, it became a Kingdom, under the stile and title of the kingdom of Tremesen. The majesty of it much impaired by Abulthasen or Albohacen king of Fesse, who brought it, not long after, under his command. Recovering after some short time its former liberty, it became a Kingdom once again, and so con∣tinued till the time of Abuchemen; who incurring the hatred of his people, because by his supine neglect the Spaniards had surprised and taken Oran and Masalquivir, their two best Havens, made an easie passage for his brother Abuzeiden to the Regal diadem. Abuzeiden scarce well setled, lost it to Hairadine Barbarossa, An. 1515. He to Charles the fifth, by whom Abuchemen was restored, becoming Homager and Tributary to the Crown of Spain. But his successor Abdulla, weary of the Spanish ser∣vitude, put himself under the protection of Solyman the magnificent, as a Prince of his own Religion; to whom at his decease he left the possession of his Kingdom also; ever since subject to the Turks; whose Beglerbeg or Supreme Officer for these African Provinces, resides for the most part in Algiers, and hath 40000 Timariots under his command.

3. FESSE, & 4. MOROCCO.

THese Kingdoms I have joyned in title, because united for the most part in the storie and affairs thereof, and of late times making but one entire Estate under the Xeriffes of Morocco: and therefore handled both together in the point of History, though of a different consideration in the way of Chorography.

They contain in them the whole Country of Mauritania, truly and properly so called; divided antiently into Tingitana, and Sitifensis: Caesariensis being naturally a Numidian Region, the Masa∣syli and the rest of the Inhabitants of it, of Numidian breed; not laid to Mauritania, nor accompted any part thereof, till the death of Iugurth, when given to Bocchus King hereof, in reward of his treason for betraying that unhappy Prince into the hands of the Romans.

It took this name from the Mauri, the Inhabitants of it, when that name first given; the word Tania, signifying a Nation, being added to it; as in Britannia, Lusitania, Aquitania, and perhaps some others; and the name of Mauri given them 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which signifieth amongst other things obscure or black, by reason of the darknesse of their complexion. Accompted in their times, an hardy, but a bloody people; carelesse of life, fearlesse of death; implacable, if once offended, their thirst of revenge not to be quenched but by blood. Mauri sunt genus hominum suapte nature cadis avi∣dissimum, nibilque non facile audens, & desperatis similes, contemptu viz. mortis & periculorum: the character given of them in Herodians time, and it holds good still; notwithstanding the intermixture of Goths and Saracens incorporated into the same nation with them, and passing by the same name in the Writers of the middle time. Post baec Mauri totam Hispaniam & Provinciam Burgundiam &c. dominio suo manciparunt, as my Author hath it; where by Moors we are to understand the Saracens which came out of Africk.

Chief Mountains of this Country, 1. Atlas Minor, so called to difference it from the greater Moun∣tain of that name, from which it is seven degrees more North, but shooteth as that doth with a point or Promontory into the main Atlantick Ocean, on the South of Salla. 2. Durdus, extended also into Caesariensis, 3. Diur, 4. Phocra, of which little memorable. Rivers of most note, 1. Sala, 2. Subur, 3. Zilia, 4 Phuth, 5. Diur, 6. Cusa; all falling into the Atlantick: this last the same, as I conjecture, which our modern Writers call Ommirabili. And for the rest, we must find amongst them, 1. Sifelmel, 2. Tensist, 3. Niffis, the names of the chief Rivers, as at this time called.

The old Inhabitants here of in the time of the Romans, were the Metagonita neer the Streits, giving name unto Metagonitis an adjoyning Promontory; the Succosii, Verbicae, Nectiberes, Vacuatae, Voli; and on the East-side the Mauresii. These last participating of that common name, in which all united. Called by the Latines, Mauri; by the Greeks, Maurusii: The Etymologie as before. Their descent originally from Phut, the son of Cham; whose memory preserved here in the River Phut. To that, the coming of the Chanaanites, of the same extraction, served but as an Accessory. From those two

fountains sprang the whole Nation of the Mauri. Governed by Kings; the most considerable of which when first known to the Romans, was that Bocchus, who betrayed Jugurth his friend and son in law, into the hands of the Romans: gratified for that treacherie with the Country of the Masasyli, (reckoned for part of Mauritania from that time forwards) as Hiempsal one of his sons was, not long after, with the Kingdom of Numidia. The whole Estates of Bocchus, Syphax, and Masinissa, united by this means in the person of Juba one of his posterity; the most potent Prince of all these parts: who falling in the African war against Julius Casar, Numidia was forthwith made a Province of the Roman Empire; Crispus Salustius being made the first Governour of it. But Mauritania, extending at that time from the Ocean to the River Ampsagus, he gave to Bocchus and Bogud, two of his Confederares, but descended of the old Regal family. Bogud unluckily taking part with Mark Antony against Augustus, was by Bocchus, who declared for the other side, dispossessed of his part, (that which now makes the Kingdom of Fesse) in which confirmed for his good service, by the con∣quering Emperor. Juba the son of the former Juba, grown famous for his eminent learning, was of a Prisoner made a Prince; invested affect the death of Bocchus in all the Dominions of his father, ex∣cept Numidia: and by the bounty of Augustus, a great Patron of Learning, advanced to the marri∣age of Selene, daughter of Antony and Cleopatra. After whose death, and the death of Ptolomy their son, murdered by Caligula, Mauritania was by Claudius added to the patrimony of the Roman Empire; divided into two Provinces, viz. Caesariensis, betwixt the two Rivers Malva and Ampsaga, now the Kingdom of Tremesen; and Tingitana, from the River Malva to the Western Ocean. This last di∣vided into Tingitana, and Sitifensis, (the River now called Ommirobili being the boundary betwixt them) by the Emperor Constantine: who leaving Sitifensis to the Diocese of Africk, laid Tingitana (why I know not) unto that of Spain. Cained from the Romans by the Goths, after by the Saracens; they became members of those Empires; in the declining of the last, divided into the two Kingdoms of Fesse and Morocco, to the description and history whereof we do now proceed.

3. MOROCCO.

THe Kingdom of MOROCCO hath on the East the River Malva, by which parted from Tre∣mesen; on the West, the Atlantick Ocean; on the South Mount Atlas; and on the North the Kingdom of Fesse. So called from Morocco, the chief City of it; in former times known by the name of Mauritania Sitifensis, from Sitiphis, in those times the principal City, as Procopius telleth us.

The Country said to be fruitful of all things necessary to life, pleasing to the fight, and sweet to smell to: particularly, well stored with Grain and Pulse, plentiful of Oyl, Honey and Sugar, liberally furnished with Dates, Grapes, Figs, Apples, Pears, and all sorts of Fruits; exceedingly well stocked with Cattel, but with Goats especially, whose skins afford a very excellent kind of leather, and of their ••leece materials for the finest Chamlets, which are here made in most of their Cities. The whole Country divided commonly into these seven parts, viz. 1. Guzzula, 2. Sus, 3. Morocco specially so called, 4. Hea. 5. Hascora, 6. Duccala, and 7. Tedles.

1. GVZZVLA, the most Southern Province of this Kingdom hath on the East some part of Tremesen, on the West Sus or Susa, from which parted by a ridge of Mountains called Ilda; on the South Mount Atlas; and on the North, part of the territory of Morocco, and the rest of Susa. The Country rich in Mines of Brasse, Iron, and other metals, of which are made many Vtensils for do∣mestick uses, exported hence into other places. The People barbarous and rude, not easily acknow∣ledging subjection to the Kings of Morocco; and at continual wars amongst themselves, except only for two moneths in the year; which being the time of their publike Marts, and then much visited with Strangers from other Countries, they lay aside their private quarrels, and cheerfully entertain such Merchants as repair unto them. Walled Towns here are not any, but some very great Villages; the chief whereof, 1. Guzula, on the Northern bank of the River Sus, whence the name of the Province. 2. Tagressa, not far off, but on the other side of the water, towards the foot of Mount Atlas. 3. Tedza, inclining towards the borders of Morocco. Of these nothing memorable.

2. West of Guzzula, lieth the Province of SVS or SVSA, so called from the River Sus, (with which well watered) or giving name to it. Rich in Gold-Mines, the cause of continual wars amongst the people; well stored with Sugar-Canes, which the Inhabitants know neither how to boyl nor purifie; and on the Sea-shores furnished with great plenty of Amber, bought by the Por∣tugals of the people at an easie rate. Chief Towns hereof, 1. Cape D'Aguer, on a Promontory so called; a place of such importance to the Portugals, that the taking of it by Mahomet then King of Sus (after of Morocco also) made them all the Forts which they had in this Country. 2. Tagavast, a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and wealthy Town, the greatest in the Province, and situate in a large Plain near the foot of Mount Atlas. 3. Teijent, situate in a spacious Plain also, but on the banks of the River Sus: divided into three parts, each a mile from the other; which joyned together, make the exact figure of a Tri∣angle. 4. Messa, or Massa, seated at the influx of the said River, on the Promontory called Ca•••• Gilen: three Towns in one; not much the better for the Sea, and but ill befriended by the Land, as leated in a barren and unpleasing soile; remarkable for a fair Temple, the beams and raster•• of which are made of the bones of Whales, which usually are left dead on the sh••re. 5. Taro••••••, a large Town, built by the Africans, before the conquest of this Country by the Geths or Sarace••s; the Residence of the Vice-Roy for the Kings of Fesse, when the Lords of this kingdom, but more enriched

of late by the Merchants of France and England, who have here a Staple for their Sugars. By this Commerce the people made more civil then in other parts of this Province: the whole number of them thought to amount to 3000 families. 6. Tedza, more within the land, bigger then Taradant, but less wealthy; the chief Ornament of it being a fair Mahometan Temple, liberally furnished with Priests and Readers of that Law, at the common charge. Not far from hence the Hill Anchisa, where it snoweth at all seasons of the year, and yet the people go extreme thin in the sharpest Winter. No∣thing else memorable of this Province, but that a little before the Xeriffe made himself King of Mo∣rocco, it had the title of a Kingdom, and gave the title of King to Mahomet the second Xeriffe, made King of Tarada••t or Sus, before he dispossessed his brother of the Crown of Morocco. 3. Northward of Sus, lieth the Province of MOROCCO, specially so called, the most fruitful and best peopled part of Barhary; not much unlike to Lombardy in wealth, and pleasures: the very Hills hereof as fruitful as the Vallies in other places. To which fertility of the so••l, the Rivers 1 Tensist, and 2 Asisin••ad, give no small advantage, though much defaced by the frequent incursions of the Portugals, who have extreamly spoiled this Country. Places of most observation in it, 1. Delgumaba, built upon a very high Mountain, and environed with many other Hills; at the foot whereof the Fountain of Asisi∣••uad. 2. Elgiumuba, a small but ancient Town, on the River Sisseva. 3. Tesrast, a small Town up∣on Asifinuad. 4. Imizmizi, situate on a Rock, spacious, and seated neer the entrance of a narrow way leading into Guzzala. 5. Tenezze, an old Town, but very well fortified. 6. Agnet, upon the River Tensift, all ruined except the Fort, and some scattered houses: formerly second unto none but Mo∣rocco, (from which distant 24 miles) the Hils and Valley about it adorned with pleasant Gardens, fruitful Vineyards, a fair River, and Fields so fertile that they yield a fifty-fold increase. 7. Se••sina, where they have snow at all times of the year. 8. Temnella, an Heretical Town differing in opinion from the rest of the Mahometan Sect; and so well grounded in their ••enets, that they challenge all their Opposites to a Disputation. 9. Hantera, very full of Jewes. 10. Morocco, the principal of this province, and of all the Kingdom situate in or near the place where once stood the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Ile∣merum of Ptolomy. Once reckoned amongst the greatest Cities of the World, at what 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was ••a••d to contain 100000 families: since so defaced and wasted by the depredations of the Arabians, and the removal of the Seat-Royal to Fesse, when that Kingdom was in the Ascendent, that it is hardly a third part so great as formerly. The founder of it Joseph, sirnamed Telesinus, the second King of the house of the Almoravides; but much enlarged and beautified by Abdul-Mumen, one of his successors. The principal buildings in it are the Church and the Castle: the Church of Mosque, one of the greatest in the World, adorned with many sumptuous pillars, brought out of Spain, when the M••••rs had the possession of that Country; and beautified with a stately Steeple, in compass at the bottom an hundred yards, and of so great height, that the Hils of Azati (one of the branches of the Lesser Atlas) being 130 miles distant, may be thence easily discerned: the Castle very large, and strong, on a Tower whereof stand three Globes made of pure Gold, weighing 130000 Barbary Duckets; which divers Kings have gone about to take down and convert into money, but all desisted in regard of some crosse accident or other which befell them in it; insomuch that the common people think them to be guarded with spirits.

4. North of Morocco, on the further side of Tensift and Asifinuad, is the Province of HEA: Rough, mountainous, and woody, yet watered with many pleasant Rils, and would be plentiful enough in all commodities, if the industry of the people were not wanting to it. A sort of people little better then meerly barbarous, without all Artists either Ingenious or Mechanick; except some Chirurgeons, whom they keep to circumcise their Children; and some few Teachers of their Law, which can hardly ••ead. Their food a Pap made of Barley-meal, which in stead of Spoons they claw forth with their fingers; the Ground they eat on, serving for table, stools and napkins. At endless ••eud with one another; yet so kind to strangers, that in one of their chief Towns, called 1 Tedneft. the Gentlemen used to cast lots who should entertain them. A town of good esteem in former times, situate in a large Plain on the River Tensift: but in the year 1514. almost wholly abandoned, upon a rumor that the Arabians had a purpose to sell it to the Portugals. 2. Teculeth, seated on a good Port, and once very well traded, there being in it at that time 1000 families, some Hospitals, and a beautiful Musque; in the year 1514. destroyed by the Portugals. 3. Tenent, a Sea-town in the hands of the Portugals. 4. Fl∣muridin, a strong peece, as the name importeth, the word signifying the Disciples Fort; so called, be∣cause a certain Heretick in the Law of Mahomet (whereof this Kingdom yields good plenty) retired hither with his Disciples, fortified it and defended it against the King of M••recco. 5. Iguillinguigu••l, seated on the top of an hill, and fortified by the Country-people (or old African Moers•• against the Arabians. 6. Tefethne, beautified with a pretty Haven, but not capable of any great sh••pping. 7. Taglesse, a Den of Thieves and Cut-throats. 8. Tesegdelt; as courteous and civil, as the other barbarous: At the Gates whereof a Guard is set fo•• entertainment of Strangers; whom if they have no acquaintance there, they are to provide of Accommodation in some Gentlemans house, where it 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them nothing but thanks, and some kind acknowledgment.

5. Northwards of Hea, stands the Province of DVCALA, bounded on the West with the main Atlantick, and on the North with the River Ommirobili, by which parted from the Kingdom of Fesse. Of three dayes journy long, about two in breadth; thrusting into the Ocean with a craggy Promontory, which some of the Ancients called Ulagium, others the Promontory of the Sun; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by the Christians of Europe called the Cape of Cantin; by the Moors, Gebelelhudi••. Populous enough, the quality of the men considered, ignorant both of letters and of all good manners: Yet not ••o

populous as it hath been in former times, much of the Country being abandoned for fear of the Por∣tugals who have taken all their best towns on the Sea-coast, and destroyed the rest. Amongst these, 1. Azasi, at the foot of the hils so called; surprised by the Portugals, under colour of making a Store∣house for their Merchandise. 2. Azamez, seated at the mouth of the River Ommirobili, the furthest town of this kingdom towards that of Fesse; the people whereof were extremely addicted unto Sodomy, till subdued by the Portugeze. 3. Elmedina, once the Metropolis of this Province; but now for feat of those Invaders, in a manner desolated. 4. Conte, of the foundation of the Goths. 5. Tic, built by the old African Moors, but possessed by the Portugals. 6. Subeit, 7. Teneracost, 8. Centpuis, 9. Terga, 10. Bulahuan; all sacked and ruined by the same people, when they took Azamor (the Key of this Province) which was in the year 1513. At which time it is said, that Mahomet King of Fesse passing through this Province with an Army to repress these insolencies, at every Altar (whereof here are many in the Roads) kneeled, and said unto this effect: Lord, thou knowest that the cause of my coming into this wild place, is only to free this people of Duccola from the rebellious and wicked Arabians, and their cruel Enemies the Christians: which purpose if thou doest not approve of, let the punishment fall upon my person, but not upon my followers who deserve it not. With greater piety then could be looked for from a blind Mahometan.

6. Eastward of Duccala, along the banks of Ommirobili, lieth the Province of HASCORA, a fruitful Country, intermixt of rich fields and pleasant gardens: furnished with most sorts of choisest fruits, and amongst others, Grapes of such extraordinary greatness, that they are said to be as big as a Pullets egg; Good store of Honey it hath also, and some Mines of Iron. Inhabited by a more civil people then any of the rest, and consequently more deserving so rich a soil. Places of most importance in it. 1. Ezo, an old town, situate on a lofty mountain. 2. Eluinina, of a later erection. 3. Alemdine, conquered for the King of Fesse by a Merchant, whose Paramour the Prince or Governour hereof had taken from him: Situate in a pleasant, but little Valley, but begirt with hils, and well inhabited by Gentlemen, Merchants, and Artificers. 4. Tagodast, on the top of an hill, environed with four others of equal height.

7. More East, betwixt Hascora and the River Malva, is the Province of TEDLES, bounded on the East with the Kingdom of Tremesen, and on the North with that of Fesse, from which last parted by the River Servi, which on the North east border of it meets with Ommirob••li. The whole Province in form triangular; of no great either length or breadth, but sufficiently fruitful, and well inhabited for the bigness. Some Towns it hath, and those not meanly populous for so small a Province; the chief whereof, 1. Tesza, built by the old African-Moors, and beautified with many Mahometan Mosques; the wals of which made of a kind of Marble, which they here call Tesza, whence the name of the town. 2. Esza, seated on the River Ommirobili, where it receiveth that of Deyme, which rising out of Atlas-Minor, and passing by Tesza last mentioned, doth here lose its name. 3. Chythite, renowned for the stout resistance which it hath made from time to time against those of Fesse. 4. Ethiad, abounding in all sorts of victuals.

These Provinces make up the Kingdom of Morocco: infested miserably while it remained subject to the Kings of Fesse, by the Portugals on the one side, and the wild Arabians on the other. Concern∣ing which last people we are to know, that when the Saracens conquered Africk, they contented themselves with the command, and left unto the Natives the possession of it; forbidding the Arabians (with whose course of life they were well acquainted) to passe over Nilus. Elcain, the last of the successors of Hucba in the Kingdom of Cairoan, having subdued the rest of Africk, and added it unto his Estate, passed forwards into Egypt, which he conquered also, assuming to himself the title of Caliph: But in his absence, the Lieutenant whom he left in Africk rebelled against him, and acknowledging the Caliph of Bagdet for his lawful Lord, received of him for this good service the Kingdom of Africa. Despairing to recover his lost Estate, and yet not willing that it should be useful unto his Enemies, he licenced the Arabians, for a Ducat a man, to passe over the Nile with their tents and families: On which agreement, almost half the Tribes of Arabia Deserta, and many of Arabia Felix, went into Africa; where they sacked Tripolis, Cairoan, and the rest of the principal Cities; tyrannizing over all Barbary, till restrained at last by Joseph the founder of Morocco, (of whom more hereafter.) Since which time, though they lost their unlimited Empire, yet they still swarm like Locusts over all the Country; and neither apply themselves to tillage, or building houses, or any civil course of life; nor suffer those to live in quiet, who would otherwise manure and improve the Country. The rest of the Storie of these Kingdoms we shall have anon, when we have taken a Survey of the Kingdom of Fesse.

4. FESSE.

THe Kingdom of FESSE is bounded on the South with the Realm of Morocco, on the North with parts of the Atlantick and Mediterranean; on the East with Malva, parting it from the Kingdom of Tremesen; and on the West with the Atlantick wholly.

It takes this name from Fesse the chief City of it. Known to the Ancients by the name of Mauri∣tania Tingitana, so called from the City Tingis (now Tanger) then of greatest note. Called also Hispania Transfretana, Spain on the other side of the Sea, because a part of that Diocese: and by some (Pliny amongst others) Bogudiania, from B••gud one of the Kings hereof, to whom given by Caesar: by others Ampelusia, from its abundance of Vines. The Inhabitants of it, by the Spaniards, now called Alarbes.

The Country of good temperature in regard of the Air, if not in some places of the coldest: but very unequally disposed of in respect of the Earth; here being in it many Desarts and large Forrests, not well inhabited; but intermixt with many rich and delightful Fields. So that taking the estimate in the gross, it may be said to be a rich and flourishing Country, hardly inferior unto any. The parti∣cularities of which are to be considered in the Characters of the several Provinces, into which it now doth stand divided, that is to say, 1 Temesna, 2 Fesse specially so called, 3 Elchaus or Chaus, 4 Garet, 5 Algara, 6 Erritis, and 7 Habat.

1. TEMESNA hath on the South the River Ommirabili, on the West the Ocean; extended in length from West to East 80 miles, and in breadth 70. A champain Country, very level; and once so populous, that it contained 40 Cities, and 300 Castles; most of them ruined by the wars, and the wild Arabians, the greater destroyer of the two. The principal of those remaining, 1 Teyeget, neer the River Ommirabili, once of greater note, but now inhabited only by poor people, and a few Smiths compelled to live there for the making of Iron-instruments to manure the land. 2. Thagia, on the course of the said River; much visited by those of Fesse, for the Sepulchre of an holy Prophet, who was there interred; the Fessans going thither in pilgrimage with such numbers of men, women and children, that their Tents seem sufficient to lodge an Army. 3. Adendun, more towards the Sea, but on a small River called Guirla, well walled, and fenced on one side by a Lake or Pool. 4 Amsa, on the shore of the Atlantick, once of great trade, and well frequented both by the English and the Portugals, by which last destroyed. 5. Munsor, destroyed in like manner by the wild Arabians. 6. Nuchaida, situate in so fertile and rich a soil, that the inhabitants would have given a Camels bur∣den of Corn for a pair of shooes; Nothing now left of it but one Steeple, and a piece of the wall. 7. Rabut or Rubut, built by Mansor, or Almansor, a King of Morocco, neer the mouth of the River Burugrug, and by him made one of the best peopled Towns in Africk; built after the model of Morocco, but now so wasted, that there are not in it above 500 families; most of the ground within the wals being turned into meadows, vineyards and gardens. 8. Fanzara, on the River Subu, the Subur of Ptolomy, falling not far off into the other. 9 Mahmora, in the same tract also, once pos∣sessed by the Spaniards; neer which the Portugals received a great defeat by the King of Fesse, for want of good intelligence betwixt them and the Castilians. 10. Salla, the Sala of Ptolomy, by the inhabitants called Zale, in ordinary Maps by mistaking, Cale; at the mouth of the River Rebato, which the antient Writers called Sala, as they named the Town. Beautified by King Almansor (who is here interred) with a stately Palace, a goodly Hospital, a fair Temple, and an Hall of Marble, cut in Mosaich works: intended for the burial-place of his posterity. A town much traded formerly by the Christian Merchants, of England, Flanders, Genoa and the Golf of Venice. Took by the Spaniards An. 1287. and within ten dayes lost again: and of late times made a nest of Pyrates, as dangerous to those which ••ailed in the Ocean, as the Pirates of Algiers to the Mediterrean. Whose insolencies the King of Morrcco not able to suppress for want of shipping, desired the aid of His Majesty Charles King of Great-Britain; by whom the Town being blocked up by Sea, and besieged to the Land∣ward by the King of Morocco, it was at last compelled to yield, the works thereof dismantled, the Pirates executed, and 300 Christian Captives sent unto His Majesty, to be by him restored to their former liberty; to the great honour of His Majesty, and the English Nation, An 1632.

As for the fortunes of this Province, they have been somwhat different from the rest of this King∣dom; trained by a factious Prophet to revolt from the King of Fesse and Morocco, whose Estate they very much endangered, sending an Army of 50000 men to the Gates of Morocco. But being dis∣comfited by Joseph, sirnamed Telephinus, he followed them into their own Country, which he wasted with great cruelty for ten moneths together, consuming above a million of them, and leaving the pro∣vince to the mercy of Wolves and Lyons. Repeopled afterwards by Almansor with Arabian Colo∣nies: Given about fifty years after that, by the Princes of the Marine family, to more civil Inhabi∣tants, by whom the Arabians were expelled, and the Province consequently reduced into some good Order.

2. Westward of Temesna lieth the Province of FESSE, properly and specially so called. Ex∣tended in length from the River Burugrug to the River Inavis, for the space of 100 miles. A very fruitful Province, well stored with Cattel, and exceeding populous; the Villages hereof as big as the better sort of Towns in other places; but contrary to the custom of other Countries, better in∣habited on the hils then amongst the vallies; the people making choice of the mountains for their habitation, as places of defence and safety; but husbanding the vallies which lie neerest to them. Places of most consideration in it, 1. Macarmeda, on the River Inavis, in a goodly Plain, but in a manner all ruined except the wals. 2. Gualili, memorable for the Sepulchre of Idris, the first founder of Fesse. 3. Peitra Rossa, where they have some Lyons so tame, that they will gather up bones in the streets like dogs, without hurting any body. 4. Agla, where they have brought their Lyons to so strange a cowardise, that they will run away at the voice of a child; whence a Bracchadochio is called proverbially a Lyon of Aga. 5. Pharao, by reason of the name thought by the Vulgar to be founded by some King of Egypt; but the Latine Inscriptions therein feund, declare it to have been some work of the antient Romans. 6. Maquille, of more antiquity then note. 7. Fesse, the Metropolis of this Province, and the chief of the Kingdom, supposed to be the Volubilis of Ptolomy, but much enlarged and beautified by some new Acces••ions. Situate for the most part upon little hillocks, and watered by a pleasant and gentle Rivers (derived by Aquaducts and Conduits, into all parts of the City) which they now call the River of Fesse,

conceived by some learned men to be that which was anciently called Phuth, from Phut the first Planter of the African Nations. A City so beautifull and well seated, as if Nature and Art had plaid the Wantons, and brought this forth as the fruit of their dalliance. The Founder or enlarger of it, one of the Race of the false Prophet Mahomet, his name Idris, who built on the East side of the River; that on the West side, being the Work of one of his sons: both so increasing that at last they were joyned together. To these the Suburbs being added, have made a third. The whole called Fesse, from Fezian Arabick word, signifying Gold, whereof great quantity was found when they digged the Foundations: Divided into three parts, by the River, all of which contain 82000 housholds, and 700 Moschees, or Saracenicall Temples: the chief of which is Carne, or Carnven, being a mile and a half in compass. It hath 31 gates, great and high; the roof is 150 yards long, and 80 broad: round about are divers Porches, containing 40 yards in length, and 30 in breadth; under which, are the publike store-houses of the Town. About the walls are Pulpits of divers sorts, wherein the Ma∣sters of their Law read unto the people, such things, as they think to pertain to their salvation. The Revenue hereof is 200 Ducats a day of the old Rents; for so it was, Anno 1526. when Leo Afer wrote. The Merchants have here a Court, or Exchange, inclosed with a strong wall, with 12 Gates, and 15 streets. There is also a Colledge called Amarodoc, a most curious and delicate building. It hath three Cloysters of admirable beauty, supported with 8 square pillars of divers colours: The roof curiously carved, and the Arches of Mosaique work of gold and azure. The gates are of brass, fair wrought; and the doors of the private chambers of inlayed Work. This Colledge did cost the Founder, king Abuchenen, or Abu Henen, 480000 Crowns. Here are finally said to be in it many Hospitals, little inferior to the Colledges in building and beauty, all very liberally endowed; and about an hundred hot Bathes well built, with four Halls to each, and certain Galleries without, where they put off their clothes when they go to bathe themselves: and besides these 200 Inns, built three sto∣ries high, each of them having 120 Chambers in it, with Galleries before all the doors for their Guests to walk in.

3. Eastward of the Territory of Fesse, lieth the Province of CHAUS. extended in length from the River Gurngrut, or Gurguigarn, by which parted from Temesna, and Fesse, to the borders of Tremesen for the space of 190 miles, and 170 miles in breadth. So that it is thought to contain one third part of the whole Kingdom: but meanly populous for the bigness, the Country being poor and barren, and the Inhabitants fierce and warlike; more given to prosecute their quarrels, then to Trade or Tillage. Chief Towns hereof, 1 Ham Lisnan, a Town built in the more mountainous parts of the Country by the old Africans. Famous for the Temple of an Idol here worshipped; to which at certain times men and women resorted in the night; where, after their devotions ended, and the Candles put out, every man lay with the woman he first touched; the exact platform of the Family of Love, if all be true which is told us of them; and anciently, but faisly, charged on the Primitive Christians. 2 Tezza, adorned with three Colledges, many Baths, and Hospitals, and some beautifull Temples; one of them larger, though not fairer then that of Fesse; in both Towns men of the same Trade have a street by themselves: for greatness, wealth, and numbers of People, esteemed the third City of this Kingdom. 3.Dubdu, an ancient Town, but not much observable. 4 Teurert, seated on the top of an Hill, in the midst of a Plain, but compassed about with Desarts. 5 Beni sesseten neigh∣boured by Iron Mines, in which their greatest bravery and wealth consisteth: the women here wear∣ing Iron-rings for ornaments to their ears and fingers. 6 Tezergui, subject to the Arabians. 7.Adag∣gia, the most Eastern Town of all this Region, situate in a Peninsula, made by the consluences of Muluso and Malva. In this Country is the head of the River Subur, which rising out of a great Lake in the woods of the Mountain Seligus, and receiving many lesser waters, with a large and Navigable stream falleth into the Ocean.

4. Northwards of Chaus lieth the Region called GARET, extended thence as far as the Me∣diterranean; and reaching East and West from the River Malva, where it bordereth on Tremesen, to that of Nochor, where it toucheth on Errif, and Algaria. The length hereof 25 Leagues, the breadth but twenty. The soyl in most places dry and delart, like the Sands of Nismidia: especially all along the banks of the Malva, neer unto which from the Mediterranean to Chaus, it is wholly desart and unpeopled, not well inhabited in the most fruitfull parts of it, being full of mountains; the worse for the ill neighbourhood of the Spaniards possessed of 1 Chesusa, and 2 Medela, two chief Towns hereof. 3 Pennon de Veles, by some called Velez de Gomenera, fituate on the shore of the Mediterranean, betwixt two high Mountains; built by the Africans or Gothes; but now in the possession of the Spaniards also. 4 Jasserin,situate on the Sea also, founded by the Mahometans of the Marine Family. 5 Tezzora standing on an hill, to which there is but one passage only.

5. Westward of Garet lieth ASGARA, extended from thence unto the Ocean: Shut up on the South east-side with the great Mountains Zalaga, Zaron, and Gomara, out of which last runneth the River Luccus, called Lix by Ptolomy. The Aire hereof very temperate, and the soyl as sertile; supplying with the over-plus of its Commodities, the mountainous parts of Fesse, and the Desarts of Garet. Once full of Towns, till ruined and destroyed by the wars. A Monument whereof, 1 Giumba, built by the ancient Africans, of which remains nothing but the Ditches. 2 Larache, in Latine La∣rissa, the Lixa of Ptolomy, situate at the mouth of the Lix or Luccus, and furnished with a good Port, but of difficult entrance, garrisoned when possessed by the Moors with 300 light horse, and 300 Harcabuziers; but better fortified then before, since possessed by the Spaniards, into whose hands

it was put by Muley Sheck king of Morocco and Fesse, when worsted by Muley Sidan his younger Brother, in the beginning of the civil Wars betwixt them. 3 Cusar Elcubin given by Almanser to a poor Fisher, who had entertained him unknown, one night in his Cottage, when he lost his Company in Hunting: Adorned with many Temples, one Colledge of Students, and a stately Hospital.

6. On the North of Asgara is the Province of EL-HABAT, or HABAT coasting along the Atlan∣tick Ocean to the mouth of the Straits, in length 100 miles, about 80 in breadth. The Country very plentifull of all manner of necessaries and very well Peopled; the mountains which are here of a great height, being well inhabited. In former times replenished with many Cities, both of the foun∣dation of the Gothes, Romans, and old African Moors, now much diminished by the Wars. Those of most note. 1 Ezaggen, the Inhabitants whereof by an ancient Priviledge granted by the Kings of Fesse, were licensed to drink wine, though prohibited by the Law of Mahomet. Situate on a moun∣tain, neer the River Guarga, about 35 leagues from Fesse: and garrisoned with 400 Horse for fear of the Portugals, who sometimes make their excuisions thither. 2 Basra, once a walled Town and the Walls still standing, but very little or no Town in them. 3 Homar, some∣times wel-peopled, but now little inhabited by reason of the ill neighbourhood of the Portugals, who command that Coast. 4 Banirendo, in a manner deserted for the same reason. 5 Alcazaer, to distinguish it from another of this name called Alcazer Guer, taken together with Arzilla and Tangier by Alfonso the fift of Portugal, Anno 1470. Night to which Town the three Kings Sebastian of Portugal, Mahomet and Abdemelech Competitors for this Kingdom, were slain in a day. There was also slain at the same time the great English Rebel Stuckley, who fled out of Ireland to Rome, Anno 1570. Where he was lovingly entertained by the Pope then being, as a good Son of the Church: by whom appointed for the Conquest of Ireland, and for that end furnished with 800 Souldiers paid by the King of Spain; and by his Holiness created Marquiss of Leinster, Earl of Wexford and Cater∣logh, Viscount Murraugh, and Baron of Rosse. Thus furnished, he began his journey toward Ire∣land, Anno 1578. but hearing of these Wars, and desirous to make a party in them, he lost all his honours with his life. 6 Arzilla a Sea-Town, 70 miles distant from the Streits, now possessed by the Portugals. 7 Tanger a great Town, and very ancient, distant from the Streits about 30 miles, be∣longing to the Portugals also. In former times it was called Tingis, a Colony of the Canaanites, and by them built at their first coming thither, when they fled from the sword of Josuab, testisied by the two Pillars erected neer this City, which before we spoke of: and from that name caused all this part of Mauritania to be called Tingitania. Made afterwards a Colonie by the Emperour Claudius, who named it Traducta Julia; but the old name prevailed, and outlived the new. Neer to this Town it is said that Hercules overcame Antaus, a monstrous Giant of 64 Cubits high, as his Legend telleth us. And not far off was an high Mountain called Abyla, opposite to which in the coast of Spain was another called Calpe, on which the said Hercules placed his so famous Pillars. 8 Sexta, or Senta, si∣tuate on or neer that mountain unfortunately memorable for giving the title of an Earl to Julian, who first brought the Saracens into Spain, beautified in those following times with many Temples, Colledges, and I earned men: taken by the Portugals with the help of the English, Anno 1415. and now in the possession of the King of Spain. The only Town of all the Estates of Portugal, which in the late revolt of that Kingdom doth remain unto him. 9 Julia Constantia, so called, and made a Roman Colonie, by Augustus Casar. 10 Laxus, a Roman Colonie of the plantation of Claudius, in old times said to have been the Court or Palace of the Giant Antaus. Not far from whence (that Antaeus might not dwell alone) the old Geographers have placed the habitation of Gerion, as proper a Gentleman as himself, in a small Iland of the Streits called Gerionis Insula, and by some Erythia.

7. Eastward of Habat is the Province of ERRIF, extended from the mouth of the Streits, where it joyneth to Habat, as far as to the River Nochor (supposed to be the Meluchath of the An∣tient Writers) by which parted from Garet: A mountainous and cold Country in respect of the rest of Barbarie, full of Woods and Forests; but plentiful enough of Vines, Figs, and Olives; and not without some herds of Goats, though otherwise not well stored with Cattell. In length 140 miles, in breadth 40 onely; inhabited by a race of valiant men, but excessive Drunkards. The Towns hereof not many, though full of Villages; The chief of which, 1 Mazagon, neer unto the Streits; a very strong Town, and of great importance, but possessed by the Portugals; in vain besieged by Abdalla the first, with an Army of 200000 men, Anno 1562. 2 Mezemme, seated on a mountain. 3 Beni Jerso of like situation, once beautified with a goodly Colledge for the Professors of the Ma∣hometan Law, who here publickly taught it, as in an University; the Inhabitants whereof were in that regard freed from all exactions. Destroyed together with the Library of it, by some wicked Tyrant, Anno 1509. the Books therein being valued at 4000. Ducats, 4 Terga. 5 Tegassa, 5 Gebbe; of which little memorable.

Thus having looked over the particular Provinces of these two Kingdoms, we must next look up∣on them also in the general story, from the time of the Saracenical conquest; First let into this Country by the Treason of Julian, and for a while subject to the great Caliph or Successor of Ma∣homet: afterwards to the King or Caliph of Cairoan, who extended his Empire to the Ocean. But that Kingdom being overthrown by the coming in of the Arabians, these Provinces with the rest were afflicted by them; till the rising of the kingdom of Fez: begun in the person of Idris, of the blood of Mahomet, by Hali, and his daughter Fatima: who persecuted by the opposite faction, fled into Mauritania, where he grew into such reputation, that in short time he got both swords into his

hands, Dying about the 185 year of the Hegira, he left his power unto his son, of the same name with his father; the first founder of Fesse. Opposite whereunto on the other side of the water, one of his sons (but his name I find not) built another City, which in time grew into emulation with it: and raising by that means a faction in the house of Idris, gave opportunity to Joseph the son of Teifin or Telephine of the house of Luntune, then famous for bridling the Arabians, and founding the City of Morocco, to suppress that family: who killing the Princes of that line, and 30000 of their subjects, brake down the wals which parted the two Cities from one another, united them by bridges, and so made them one. Drawn into Spain by the diffention of the Saracens there amongst themselves, he added all which they held in that kingdom unto his dominions: held by his successors, as long as they were able to hold Morocco: the Catalogue of which Princes, called the house or family of the Al∣moravides, with that of the Race of the Almohades, is this which followeth.

The Kings or Miramomolims of Morocco.

• 1 Teifin, or Telephine, the first of the Almo∣ravides, that reigned in Africk.
• 2 Joseph, sirnamed Telephinus, the son of Teifin, founded Morocco, subdued the Kingdom of Fesse, and added the Estate of the Moors in Spain unto his Domi∣nions.
• 3 Hali, the son of Joseph.
• 4 Albo-Halis, the son of Hali, supposed to be the publisher of the Works now ex∣tant in the name of Avicenne, compiled at his command by some of the most learned Arabian Doctors: vanquished and slain by
• 5 Abdelmon, or Abdel-Mumen, the first of the Almohades; of obscure parentage, but raised to so great power by the pra∣ctises of Almohad a jugling Prophet of those times, that he overthrew the king, and obtained the kingdom of the Al∣moravides both in Spain and Africk, An. 1150. to which he also added the Realm of Tunis and Cairoan.
• 6 Joseph II. or Aben-Joseph, the son of Ab∣delmon.
• 7 Jacob, or Aben-Jacob, sirnamed Alman∣sor; a puissant and prudent Prince, of whom much before; son of Joseph II.
• 8 Mahomet, sirnamed Enaser, or the Green, the brother of Almansor: Discomfited by the Christians of Spain at the battel of Sier-Morena, An. 1214. lost his domini∣ons; there being slain in this battel 200000 of the Moors, as some Writers say; who adde, that the Spaniards for two dayes to-gether burnt no other fewel but the Pikes, Lances, and Arrows of their slaughtered Enemies, yet could not consume the one half of them.
• 9 Caid Arrax, Nephew of Mahomet Ena∣ser, by his son Buxaf: slain at the siege of Tremezezir, a Castle of Tremesin, which was held against him.
• 10 Almorcada, a kinsman of Caid Arrax, outed of his estate, and slain by Bu∣debuz, of the same house of the Almo∣hades.
• 11 Budebuz, the last of the house of the Al∣mohades, setled in this Estate by the aid and valour of Jacob Aben Joseph the new King of Fesse: but dealing faithlesly and ungratefully with him, he was warred on by the said Jacob Ben Joseph, vanquished and slain in battel; the soveraignty by that means translated unto those of the Marine family, An. 1270. or thereabouts.

But before I do proceed further with this Marine family, I must again look back upon Mahomet Enaser, whom I conceive (the putation of the time being so agreeable) to be the Admiralius Murmelius mentioned by Matthew Paris, to whom our king John, An. 1214. is said to have sent such a degenerous and unchristian Embassage. Which strange name of Admiralius Murmelius was by that good Writer unhappily stumbled at, instead of Miramomolim (which also is corrupted from Amir Elmumenim, that is to say, Princeps Fidelium) an Attribute which the great kings of the Sa∣racen-Moors did much affect, and retained it long time amongst them. The story this, King John being overlaid by his Barons wars, and the invasions of the French, sent Ambassadors to this great Prince (then ruling over a great part of Spain and Barbary) for aid against them, offering to hold his kingdom of him, and to receive withall the Law of Mahomet. The Moor exceedingly offended at it, told the Ambassadors that he had lately read the book of Pauls Epistles, which he liked so well, that were he now to choose a Religion, he would have imbraced Christianity before any other: But every man (saith he) ought to die in his own Religion; the greatest thing which he disliked in that Apostle, being (as he said) the changing of the Faith in which he was born. This said, he called unto him Robert of London Clark, one of the Ambassadors (a man ill chose for such an Errand, if the tale be true) of whom he demanded the form of the English Government, the situation and wealth of the Country, the manners of the people, the life and person of the king, in which being satisfied, he grew into such a dislike of that King, that ever after he abhorred the mention of him. This is the substance of the story in Matthew Paris: But you must know he was a Monk, to which brood of men King John was held for a mortal Enemy; and therefore this Relation not to passe for Gospel.

But whatsoever opinion King John might have of the power of this King (to whom tis possible enough he might send for aide) certain it is that he was grown so low in his Reputation, after the loss of that great battell in Siera Morena, that not onely the Spanish Moors withdrew their obedi∣ence from him (as a Prince unable to support them) but those of Africk did revolt also from the Crown of Morocco (extreamly weakned by that blow) after his decease. For Comoranca Aben Zein of the house of Abdaluad seized upon Tremesen, in the time of Caid Arrax his Successour; as Bucar Aben Merin of the noble Marine Family (descended from a Christian stock) did the like at Fez. Setled in his estate by the vanquishment of Almorcada the Miramomolim; he left it to Hiaja his son, under the governance and protection of a Brother of his called Jacob Ben Joseph. But the young Prince dying shortly after, left his new Kingdom to his Uncle: who aiding Budebuz (before mentioned) dispossed Almorcada of the Realm of Morocco: and af∣terwards having just cause of quarrell against this Budebuz invaded his Dominions, overcame and slew him; and once again transferred the Imperial seat from Morocco to Fez. In him began the Em∣pire of the Marine Family, who held their Residence in Fez, as the first seat of their power; Mo∣rocco being Governed by an under-King, the rest of the Provinces of that Kingdom Cantonned into se∣veral States; the Sea-coasts in some tract of time being gained by the Portugals. And in his line (but with great confusions) the Royall dignity remained till the year 1500. and somewhat after. Three only were of note in the course of business, that is to say, 1 Jacob Ben Joseph, the advancer of the Marine Family to the Realm of Morocco; the establisher thereof in that of Fesse; and of great power and influence in the affairs of the Moors in Spain, where he held Algeir and Tariffe, Towns of great importance; slain treacherously by one of his familiar friends, at the siege of Tremesen. 2 Aben Joseph the second, a younger son of this first Joseph(the issue of Bucalo his elder brother be∣ing quite extinct) succeeded after Abortade, the fixt of the Marine Family in the Throne of his Fa∣ther; and had added thereunto the Realm of Tremesen, if not diverted by the revolt of Alboali his eldest son, continually in Arms against him. 3 Alboacen, the son of this Aben Joseph and the eighth of the Marine Family, who after a siege of 30 moneths took the City of Tremesen, & with that the Kingdom. But not so fortunate in his Wars against the Christian Kings of Spain, against whom he led an Army of 400000 Foot, and 70000 Horse, with all other necessaries; but vanquished by the two kings of Castile and Portugal, with far lester forces (their Army consisting but of 25000 foot, and 14000 horse) at the River of Salado not far from Tariff, Anno 1340, Deposed soon after his re∣turn by his son Alboanen, who lost all which his Father and the first of the Aben Josephs had gained in Spain; their Empire after this declining even in Africk it self; the Kingdom of Tremesen, and the greatest part of the new Kingdom of Tunis, withdrawing themselves from their obedience in the East parts of Barbarie; as the Portugals prevailed upon them in the West. The Kingdom of the Marines thus approaching neer its fatal Period, it fortuned about the year 1508 that Mahomet Ben Amet a Native of Dara, in the further Numidia or Bilodulgerid, pretending a descent from their Prophet Mahomet, caused himself to be called Xeriff, the name by which the kindred and Successors of that Impostor use to call themselves; and being a poor Hermit only (with which Mountebanks and the high opinion of their Sanctity, this People have from time to time been extreamly fool∣ed) plotted to make his sons the chief Princes of Mauritania. To this end he sent them in Pilgrimage to Meccha, whence they returned with such an opinion of Sanctity, that Mahomet King of Fesse made Amet the elder of them Governor of the famous Colledge of Amadurach; the second called Mahomet, Tutor to his Children; the youngest named Abdel staying at home with his Father. In those dayes the Portugals grievously infested the Provinces of the Realm of Morocco; to repress whose insolencies Mahomet and Amet obtained Commission; though much opposed therein by the Kings brother, who told him how unsafe it was to trust to an armed hypocrisie; assuring him that if they once came unto any power (which under color of Religion they might quick∣ly raise) it would not be easie to suppress them. But this good counsel was rejected, and the war went forwards. Furnished with an Army, they discomfit Lopes Barriga, Commander of the Portugal forces under King Emanuel; compell that King to abandon all his footing there; they subdue Duccala, Sus, and Hea, three Provinces of the Realm of Morocco; enter that City poison the tributary King, and salute Amet King thereof by the name of the Xeriffe of Morocco, investing Mahomet the other brother in the kingdom of Sus. In the career of their successes died the king of Fesse; and Amet his successor, an improvident young Prince, confirms his Quondam-Tutors in their new Estates, condition∣ed they should hold of him as the Lord in chief, and pay him the accustomed tributes.

The Xeriffes of Morocco.

• A. C. 1 Amet, denied both tribute and su∣periority to the King of Fez, whom he overthrew in a set field; and was after vanquished and dis∣possessed of his Kingdom, (upon some quarrell breaking out) by his brother Mahomet.
• 1554. 2 Mahomet King of Sus, having got A. C. the Kingdom of Morocco, united Fesse unto it also by the vanquish∣ment of Amet the King thereof; slain after all his Victories by the Turks of his Guard.
• 1557. 3 Abdalla, the son of Mahomet.
• 1572. 4 Abdalla II. Sonne of the former had twelve Brothers, of which he

• slew ten. Hamet being spared by reason of his supposed simplicity, and Abdelmelech escaping to the Turks.
• 5 Mahomet II. Sonne of Abdalla the second expelled by Abdelme∣lech and the Turks, fled to Sebasti∣an King of Portugal, who together with the two Competitors were slain in one day at the battel of Al∣cazar Guer, Anno 1578.
• 1578. 6 Hamet II. the Brother of Abdalla the ad. who added parts of Libya, and Numidia, to the Realm of Morocco, not absolutely subdued before.
• 1603. 7 Muley Sheck the eldest son of Hamet, opposed in his Succcession by Boferes and Sidan his two youn∣ger brethren; in which War he dy∣ed; as did also Boferes his Brother. From whom Abdalla, II. son of Muley Sheck had regained Mo∣rocco.
• 1607. 8 Sidan the third son of Hamet, im∣mediately on the death of his Fa∣ther caused himself to be proclaim∣ed King of Fez, (where he was with his father when he died) and having won Morocco from Abdalla the son of Muley Sheck, be∣came master of that kingdom also. Stripped afterwards of Fesse and Morocco both by the opposite factions; distressed by Hamet Ben Abdela a Religious Hermit, who hoped to get all for himself; and aided by Side Hean one of like hypocrisie, who seemed to aim but at a Limb of that great Estate; by whose assistance he was once more possessed of Morocco. These tumults on the Land being pacified in long tract of time, and the Country brought to some degree of peace and quietness. (though never absolutely reduced under his command, as in former times) a Rabble of Pirats nest themselves in Salla. a Port-town of the Realm of Fesse: creating thence great mischief to him both by sea and land; and not to him only, but to all the Merchants of other Countries, whose busines led them to∣wards th••se Seas. Unable to suppress them for want of shipping, he craved aid of King Charles of England: by whose assistance he became Master of the Port, destroyed the Pyrates, and sent Three hundred Christian Captives for a Present to his Sacred Majesty, An. 1632. Nor staid he here; but aim∣ing at the general good of Trade, and Mankind, he sent a Letter to His Majesty to lend him the like aid against those of Algiers, who did as much in••est the Mediterranean, as the Pirats of Salla did the Ocean. The tenor of which Letters, as savouring of more piety then could be possibly expected from a Ma∣hometan, and much conducing to the honour of his Sacred Majesty, I have here subjoyned.

The Letter of the King of Morocco, to the King of England.

WHen these our Letters shall be so happy as to come to your Majesties sight, I wish the Spirit of the righteous God may so direct your mind, that you may joyfully im∣brace the Message I send, presenting to you the means of exalting the Majesty of God, and your own Reward amongst men. The Regal power allotted to us, makes us common Servants to our Creator; then, of those People whom we govern: So that observing the duties we owe to God, we deliver blessings to the World; in providing for the publike good of our States, we magnifie the honour of God, like the Celestial Bodies, which though they have much veneration, yet serve only to the benefit of the World. It is the Excellencie of our Office, to be Instruments whereby happiness is delivered unto the Nations. Pardon me Sir! this is not to instruct, (for I know I speak to one of a more cleer and quick sight then my-self) but I speak this, because God hath pleased to grant me a happy Victory over some part of those Rebellious Pirats that have so long molested the peaceful Trade of Europe, and hath presented further occasion to root out the generation of those who have been so pernicious to the good of our Nations: I mean; since it hath pleased God to be so auspicious to our be∣ginnings in the Conquest of Salla, that we might joyn and proceed in hope of like success in the war against Tunis, Algier, and other places (Dens and Receptacles for the inhumane villanies of those who abhor Rule and Government.) Herein whilest we interrupt the cor∣ruption of malignant Spirits of the World, we shall glorifie the great God, and perform a Duty that will shine as glorious as the Sun and Moon, which all the Earth may see and re∣verence: A work that shall ascend as sweet as the perfume of the most precious Odours in the nostrils of the Lord; A work gratefull and happy to men; A work whose memory shall be reverenced so long as there shall be any that delight to hear the Actions of Heroick and magnanimous Spirits; that shall last as long as there be any remaining amongst men that love and honour the piety and vertue of Noble minds. This Action I here willingly pre∣sent to You, whose piety and vertues equal the greatness of your power: that we who are Ser∣vants to the Great and mighty GOD, may hand in hand triumph in the glory which this

Action presents unto us. Now because the Ilands which you govern, have been ever fa∣mous for the unconquered strength of their Shipping, I have sent this my trusty Servant and Ambassador to know whether in your Princely wisdome you shall think fit to assist me with such Forces by Sea, as shall be answerable to those I provide by Land: which if you please to grant, I doubt not but the Lord of Hosts will protect and assist those that fight in so glorious a Cause. Nor ought you to think this strange, that I who much reverence the Peace and accord of Nations, should exhort to a VVar. Your great Prophet CHRIST JESUS was the Lion of the Tribe of JUDAH, as well as the Lord and Giver of Peace: which may signifie unto you, that he which is a lover and maintainer of Peace, must always appear with the terror of his Sword, and wading through Seas of blood, must ar∣rive to Tranquillity. This made JAMES your Father of glorious memory, so happily renowned amongst all Nations. It was the noble fame of your Princely vertues, which re∣sounds to the utmost corners of the Earth, that perswaded me to invite you to partake of that Blessing, wherein I boast my self most happy. I wish God may heap the riches of his bles∣sings on you, increase your happiness with your dayes, and hereafter perpetuate the greatness of your Name in all Ages.

Such was the Letter of that King; whose motion in all probability might have took effect, had not the Troubles which not long after brake out in Scotland, put off the design. And therefore laying by the thoughts of his future purposes, let us take a view of the Revenues and Forces of this mighty Em∣pire, before the late distractions made it less considerable. And first-for the Revenues of it, the Xeriffs are the absolute Lords of the whole Estate, and of his Subjects goods and bodies. The tenth and first∣fruits of all sorts of Fruits, Corn and Cattel, he demands of course, though many times contented in the name of the first-fruits with one in twenty. The fifth part of a Ducat he receiveth for every Acre of Land throughout his Dominions; the other four parts for every Fire, and as much for every Head whether male or female, which is above fifteen years of age. In Merchandise he receiveth of every Native two in the hundred, of an Alien ten; and hath a large Impost also upon every Mill. When any of his greater Officers or Judges die, he is sole Heir of all their Goods; and yet advanceth great sums by the sale of those Offices. And in the levying of such Taxes as are extraordinary, he useth to demand more then he means to take; that the People finding him content to abate somwhat of his Due, may think themselves to be fairly dealt with.

As for their Forces, it is evident in matter of Fact, that Abdulla the first, at the siege of Mazagon, a Town held by the Portugals, An. 1562. had no less then 200000 men; and that Abdel-Melech at the battel of Alcazar Guez, against king Sebastian, had 40000 Horse and 80000 Foot, besides Vo∣luntaries, and wild Arabians; it being supposed that he might have raised 30000 Horse more (not∣withstanding the strong party which was made against him) had he thought it necessary. It is said also that Abdalla kept in constant pay 60000 Horse, of which 15000 were quartered in the Realm of Sus, 25000 in Morocco, and the other in 20000 in the kingdom of Fesse: out of which he called 5000 of the best and ablest for the guard of his person, well mounted and as richly furnished. Besides these he hath bodies of Horse in continual readiness, maintained according to the manner of the Turks Timariots: and by Pensions given amongst the Chiefs of the Arabians, who live like Outlaws in the mountains, and up and down in the skirts of of his Country, is furnished at his need with sup∣plies from them. Well stored with Ammunition also, there being 46 Quintals of Gun••powder laid up monethly, in his famous Arsenal at Morocco: and yet not able to stay long (not above 3 months) upon any action, in regard that all his Souldiers live on his daily allowance; which maketh them, when his Provisions are consumed, to dissolve and scatter.

THE ISLES OF BARBARY.

THe ISLES of BARBARY, which make up the fifth and last part thereof, are situate neer the African shores of the Mediterranean, assigned by Ptolomy to the Province of Africa Propria. In number sixteen: 1 Hydras. 2 Calathe, 3 Dracontias, now called Chelbi. 4 Aegymnus, by Strabo called Aeginarus, and now Guietta. 5 Larunesia, now Mollium. 6 Lapedusa, now Lampedosa. 7 Mesyrus, 8 Pontia, 9 Gaia; all of little note. 10 Insula Glauconis, with a City of the same name in it, now called Goza, and subject to the Knights of Malta. 11 Aethusa, by some called Aegusa, and consequently mistaken for Aegates, which lieth neer Sicily. Of more note are the five that follow, viz.

1. COSYRA, now called Pantalaria, equally distant from Africk and the Isle of Sicil, 60 miles from each. In length about thirty miles, and in breadth not above ten. Mountainous for the most part, and full of a black kind of Stone: the soyl not very proper for Corn, and void of Rivers; but plentiful of Figs, Melons, and Cotton-wool; well stored with Kine and Oxen, but without Horses. The People poor; by Religion Christians, and subject to the King of Spain: very good Swimmers of both sexes, and in their speech and habit coming neer the Moors. It hath a Town in it of the same name with the Island, situate on the Sea-side in the Northern part of it, defended with a very strong Castle.

2. CERCINA, now with little difference called Carchana, situate neer the coast of Africk, at the entrance (as it were) of the lesser Syrtis: In length 25 miles, in breadth half as much, but in some places not above five. Exceeding fruitfull in old times, able to furnish (as they did) the wants of Caesar and his Army, when he warred in Africk; Magno frumenti numero Cercinae inven∣to, naves onerarias, quarum ibi satis magna copia, complet, atque in castra ad Caesarem mittit, are the words of the History. It hath a Town of the same name; Of no great note in way of story, but for an handsom piece of wit here shewed by Annibal. Who flying from Carthage, met here some Merchants of that City, who had there some shipping in the Haven, and standing in some doubt le••t by their discovery of his flight he might be pursued, pretended a Sacrifice to Hercules, the Tyrian Deity, to which he invited all the Sailers, and borrowed all their Sails to set up a tent for their en∣tertainment; which having got into his hands, and leaving them asleep, he made on for Asia, secure enough not to be pursued untill out of danger.

3. LOTOPHAGITIS, now called Zerby, and by some Gerbe, is situate in the bottom of the Bay of Tripolis, divided from the main Land by a narrow Ford. The Iland full of Bogs and Marishes, without other water, and in the midst of it somewhat hilly; indifferently fruitfull, yield∣ing, Dates, Olives, Barley, Mill, and the like commodities; inhabited by 30000 men, dwelling in low Cottages, and but simply apparelled. It had in it anciently two Cities, 1 Meninx, which some∣times gave name unto the Iland, called Meninx by some elder Writers. 2 Gerrapolis, both now destroyed: instead whereof there is now one of more note then the rest, called by the same name with the Iland, and fortified with a very strong Castle. Subject unto the Turks, but governed by a poor King of its own. Both Fort and Iland taken by the Christian Fleet, in the year 1559. for the King of Spain, to whom Caravanus the King thereof did submit himself, conditioning to pay the yeerly Tribute of 6000. Crowns, one Camel, four Ostriches, four Sparrow Hawks, and four Falcons. But the Christians were scarce warm in their new possession, when besieged in the Castle by Pial Bassa, to whom after some extremities they were fain to yield: there perishing in this unfor∣tunate Action, by sword, famine, and sickness, 15000 Christians.

4. GAVLOS, or GAVDVS, by the Inhabitants called Gaudica, is distant about five miles from the Isle of Malta; to the Knights whereof it doth belong, given to them by the bounty of Charles the fift. The Iland 30 miles in compass, well watered and very fruitfull. So great an Enemy to Serpents and all venemous Creatures, that they neither breed here, nor will live here brought from other places. The People Christians, but they speak the same Language with the neighbouring Sa∣racens. The chief Town is of the same name with the Iland, beautified with a Capacious Haven, ly∣ing betwixt the West and South, and strongly fortified. Cruelly pillaged by the Turks in the year 1551. who carried hence 3000 Souls into endless thraldom.

5. MALTA, the chief of the African Ilands, lieth betwixt Tripolis in Barbary, and the Isle of Sicil: distant from this last about 60 miles, and from the other 180. In circuit about sixty miles, in length 20, and in breadth 12. situate in the beginning of the fourth Clime, and eighth Paral∣lell; so that the longest day in Summer is but 14 hours.

Anciently it was called Melite, and by that name occurreth not only in Ptolomy and other Wri∣ters, but also in the Book of the Acts, in the story of St. Pauls Ship-wrack, this being the place where he and all his company were cast on land: in memory whereof was built a little Chappell in the place of his Landing. So called most probably 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, from the abundance of honey which it yielded in former times: Cicero charging it on Verres, that he came home loaded with 400 measures of honey, and store of Melitensian Rayments: I am non quaero unde 400 amphoras mellis habueris, unde tantum Melitensium Vestium, saith that famous Orator. The joyning of which two together, declare that he had robbed the same place for both; this Island being a neer neighbour of Sicil, which Verres governed then as Praetor. Nor is it strange that an Island of the coast of Africk, and using for the most part the Phocinian or Punick Language, should borrow its Appellation from the Greek: many of that Nation coming hither from the Isle of Sicil, and inhabiting here; and the whole Island sometimes subject to the power of the Sicilian Greeks, though for the most part under the command of the State of Carthage.

It is situate wholly on a Rock, being not above three foot deep in earth; by consequence, of no great fertility, the want of which is supplied with the plenties of Sicil. Yet have they here no small store of Pomegranats, Citrons, Oranges, Melons, and other excellent fruits, both for taste and colour. They have also great abundance of Cotten Wool (Gossypium the Latinists call it) which they sowe as we do our Corn; the growth and ordering of this Wool, hath been shewn already, when we were in Syria. For the commoditie of this Wool, and the cloth made of it, the Romans had this I∣land in great esteem; thinking themselves happy when they gained it from the Carthaginians.

The natural Inhabitants of it are said to be churlish and uncivil; of the African Language and complexion; but followers of the Church of Rome, the Religion whereof these Knights are sworn to defend: The Women fair, but hating company, and going covered. The whole number of both Sexes, supposed to be 20000. possessed of 90 Villages, and four Cities. Places of note, 1 Malta, so called by the name of the Iland, in the middle of which it is situate; built on an hill, but counted of no great importance, the strength and safety of the Iland lying in defence of the Shores and Ha∣vens. 2 St. Hermes a strong Castle at the point of a long Languet or tongue of Rock, thrusting out betwixt the two best Havens, both which it notably defendeth. Took by the Turks, Anno 1565, but at no cheaper rate then 20000 shot of Cannon, and the loss of 10000 of their men. 3 Valette si∣tuate

on the same Languet, not far from the Castle of S. Hermes, (or rather lying close unto it) ex∣tended the whole breadth of the said Languet from the one Sea to the other: and so commanding both the Havens. Built since the departure of the Turks, impregnably Fortified, and called thus by the name of Valets, the great Master who so gallantly repulsed their fury. In this Town the great Master hath his Palace, and the Knights their several Alberges or Seminaries, all very fair and handsome buildings. 4 Burgo, a lirtle Town or City on another Languet, lying in the Eastern Ha∣ven, at the extremity of which Promontory in a Demy Iland stands the strong Castle of 5 S. Angelo, built on a Rock, opposite to Valette, on the other side of the Haven; and found impregnable by the Turks, who in vain besieged it. 6 Isola a small Citie and better deserving the name of a Town, si∣tuate in another Promontory, on the South of the other; defended on the Westside by a strong Platform, at the point of the Foreland, and on the Eastside by the impregnable Castle of S. Michael, in vain assaulted by the Turks, who on their ill success at the Siege hereof gave over the enterprize, and sailed home.

The People of this Iland originally were a Tyrian or Phoenician Colony, but intermixt in tract of time with some Greek Plantations, coming hither out of Sicil, as before was said: For the most part dependant on the Fortunes of Carthage, afterwards of Rome, till subdued by the Saracens; By the Spaniards taken from the Moors, and by Charles the fift given to the Knights of the Rhodes, not long before expelled thence by Solyman the Magnificent, Anno 1522. These Knights are in number 1000; of whom, 500 are always to be resident in the Iland. The other 500 are dispersed through Christendom, at their several Seminaries, in France, Spain, Italy and Germany; and at any summons, are to make their personal appearance. These Seminaries (Alberges they call them) are in number seven, viz. one of France in general, one of Auvergn, one of Provence, one of Castile, one of A∣ragon, one of Italy, and one of Germany; over every one of which they have a Grand Prior, who in the Countrey where he liveth, is of great reputation. An eight Seminary they had in England, till the suppression of it by Henry the 8. yet they have some one or other, to whom they give the title of Grand Prior of England. Concerning the original and riches of these Knights, we have spoken when we were in Palestine; now a word or two only of their places, and the election of their great Master. None are admitted into the Order, but such as can bring a testimony of their Gentry for six descents; and when the Ceremonies of their Admission (which are many) are performed, they swear to defend the Church of Rome, to obey their Superiours, to live upon the Revenues of their Order only, and withall to live chastly. Of these there be 16 of great authority (Counsellours of State we may fitly call them) called the Great Crosses; out of whom, the officers of their Order, as the Marshal, the Admiral, the Chancellour, &c. are chosen: and who, together with the Master, punish such as are convict of any crime, first by degrading him, 2 by strangling him, and 3 by throw∣ing him into the Sea. Now when the Great Master is dead, they suffer no Vessell to go out of this Iland, till another be elected; lest the Pope should intrude on their election; which is performed in this manner. The several Seminaries nominate two Knights, and two also are nominated for the English: these 16 from amongst themselves choose eight; these eight choose a Knight, a Priest, and a Frier-servant; and they three, out of the 16 Great Crosses, elect the great Master. The great Master being thus chosen, is stiled (though but a Frier) The most illustrious, and most reverend Prince, the Lord Frier N. N. Great Master of the Hospital of S. John of Jerusalem, Prince of Malta, Gaules, and Goza. Far different I assure you, from that of the first Masters of this Order, who called themselves only Servants to the poor Servitors of the Hospital of Jerusalem; or that of the Master of the Templers, who was only intituled The humble Minister of the poor Knights of the Temple.

This Iland is conceived to yield to the great Master the yeerly rent of 10000 Ducats, the greatest part whereof ariseth out of Cotton-wool; besides which, he hath towards the maintaining of his E∣state, the tenth part of the prizes which are won from the Turks; and certain thousands of Crowns yearly out of the treasure of the Order, which is great and rich; and one of the best Commanderies in every Nation. And for the scowring of the Seas, and securing their Harbours, they have many good Gallies, each of them able to contain 500 Souldiers, and to carry 16 piece of Ordinance; with which they make excursions many times to the coasts of Greece.

And so much for BARBARY.

MOVNT ATLAS.

IN our way from Barbarie to Libya Interior, we must pass over Mount Atlas, a ridge of hills, of exceeding great heighth, and of no small length. So high that the top or Summit of it is above the clouds, at least so high that the eye of man is not able to discern the top of it. Extat in hoc Marimons cui nomen Atlas (saith Herodotus) Ita sublimis ut ad illius verticem oculi mortalium pervenire non possint. Yet not∣withstanding, it is always covered with snow in the heats of Summer. Difficult of as∣cent by reason of the sharp and craggy precipices which occur in many places of it; the rest where plainer, and more even, of such wondrous steepness, that the precipices of the Rocks seem the safer way. Full of thick woods, and yielding to the Countries on the North side of it, the greatest part of the Rivers, which refresh and moysten them: and where it bordereth on the proper or Roman A∣frica, of such self-fertility, that it affordeth excellent fruits of its natural growth, not planted, graffed, or inoculated by the hand of man. The beginning of it is on the shores of the Western Seas, which from hence have the name of the Atlantick Ocean; in the 26 Degree, and 30 Minutes of Northern Latitude; and passing on directly Eastward, draw neer unto the borders of Egypt, part of Marmarica, or the Roman Libya only interposing. It is now called Anchisa, and Montes Clari; And took the name of Atlas from Atlas a King of Mauritania, who dwelt at the bottom of this Mountain; fained by the Poets to be turned into this hill by Perseus, and the head of Medusa. Of the daughters of this King, their golden fruit, and the famous Gardens of the Hespirides, we have spoke already; though some remove the place of their habitation more into the West (then by us disposed of) and others into certain Ilands of the Western Ocean, which we shall meet withall hereafter. He was said to have been a man of such wondrous height, that the Heavens rested on his shoulders; of which, when weary, he d••scharged his burden on the shoulders of Hercules; the ground of the fiction either taken from the height of the Mountain, the top whereof seemeth to touch the skie; or from his extraordinary knowledge in Astronomy (as the times then were) whereby he came to be acquainted with the motions of the Stars and Planets. In which knowledge he instructed Her∣cules, when he came unto him. But for the more Authentick description of it, take it thus from Virgil.

—Jamque volans apicem & latera ardua cernit Atlantis duri, Coelum qui vertice fulcit. Atlantis, cinctum assiduè cui nubibus atris Piniferum caput, & vento pulsatur & imbri. Nix humeros infusa tegit, tum flamina mento Praecipitant senis; & glacie riget horrida barba.

Which may be Englished in these words.

Then flying▪ he the top and sides descries Of Atlas, whose proud head support's the skies. Atlas, whose Pinie head with Clouds inclosed Is to the storms of winde and rain exposed. Now hide's the Snow his Arms, now tumbleth down Vpon his Chin; his Beard with ice ore grown.

OF LIBYA INTERIOR.

LIBYA INTERIOR is bounded on the North with Mount Atlas, by which parted from Bar∣bary and Cyrenaica; on the East with Libya Marmarica, interposed betwixt it and Egypt, and part of Aethiopia Superior, or the Habassine Empire; on the South with Aethiopia Inferior, and the Land of the Negro's; and on the West with the main Atlantick Ocean.

The reason of the name we have seen before, given to this Country in regard of its contiguous∣ness and resemblance to the other Libya; or else because descended from the children of Lehabim, by which that Country was first planted. For of King Libs, or Queen Libya (the daughter of E∣paphus, and Cassiopaea) and other the like fictions of the Greeks, I shall take no notice. Distinguished from the other, by the addition of Interior, as lying more within the main land of Africa, the other being partly a Maritine Country.

Of the nature of the soyle and people we shall speak anon, when we come to take a view of its se∣veral parts. Look we now on it as it stood in the time of the Romans: when, though not so well travelled or discovered as in these last times: yet have we more particulars of it, as to the names and situation of the Rivers, Mountains, and chief Towns, then any of our later Writers have presented to us. The Rivers of most note, 1 Salathus, 2 Chusarus, 3 Ophiodus, 4 Noius, 5 Massa, 6 So∣bus, 7 Daradus, 8 Stachiris, and 9 Masitholus; all of them paying tribute to the Western or Atlan∣tick Ocean. Mountains of most note, 1 Mandrus, out of which floweth the River Salathus, 2 Sa∣gapola, which gives being to the River Sobus. 3 Ryssadius, from whence Stachiris. 4 the Mountain called Deorum Currus (of which more anon) whence Massitholus, and Mount Capas, out of which Daradas, have their first Originals. Then there are, 5 Mount Vsurgala, and 6 Mount Girgiris, from

the first of which the River Bagradas, and from the last that of Cyniphus, do derive their waters; and passing thorow the breaches of Atlas (of which these Mountains seem to be some dismembred l••mbs) cross the whole breadth of the Roman Africk, to make themselves a way to the Mediterranean. Besides these, more within the Land, we finde the famous Rivers of Gir, and Niger: of which the first maketh the two great Lakes of Nuba, and Cheloindas; the second, those as great, or greater called Nigritis, and the Lake of Libya; which makes me wonder by the way, that in a Country so well watered as this seems to be, our Modern Writers should complain of such want of water, as if there were neither Spring nor River, nor Pond, nor Lake, nor any thing to moysten and refresh the earth, but the dews of Heaven, or some pits of salt and brackish water, not worth the tasting. Pto∣lomy must either be mistaken, which I hardly think; or our late Travellers not so punctual in their observations, which I rather credit: or else the Rivers which were here in the time of my Author, In his arenarum vastitatibus disperduntur, must be dried up and swallowed in these sandy Desarts, as Maginus telleth us; or finally there hath hapned some later conflagration then that of Phaeton, to which the want of water may be better attributed, then it was to his. Of which thus the Poet,

Hinc facta est Libye, raptis humoribus aestu Arida.—Which Geo. Sandys thus rendreth. A Sandie Desart Lybia then became, Her full veins emptied by the thirstie flame.

Places of note and name in those elder times, 1 Salathes, on the River so named, 2 Bagaxi, 3 Jar∣zitha, and 4 Babiba, are honoured with the name of Cities. 5 Garama, 6 Gira, and Nigira, the Metropoles of their several Nations. Then there were two Havens of some good esteem, the one called Magnus Portus, the other Portus Perphosius; besides 43 other Towns and Cities (twelve of these on the banks of the River Niger:) whose names and situation do occur in Ptolomy; which shews the Country not to be so unhabitable and void of people, as was pretended by some other (but less diligent) Writers.

Nations of most note in it in the former times, were the Getuli, on the back of Mauritania, a reso∣lute and unconquered People, Genus insuperabile bello, as we finde in Virgil: 2 the Garamantes, dwel∣ling South of Cyrenaica▪ and giving name to a large and spacious territory, called Vallis Garamanti∣ca; supposed to be the most remote Nation towards the South, as the Indians were towards the East, whence we have ultra Garamantas & Judos, in another Poet: 3 the Pyrrhaei, an Aethiopick Nation, on the South of the River Gir: 4 the Nigritae, originally Aethiopians also, inhabi∣ting on the North of the River Niger; 5 the Odranguli, of the same original extraction, possessing the Country between the Mountains Capha, and Thala; 6 the Perorsori, dwelling neer the hills cal∣led Deorum Currus; 7 the Meinaci, at the foot of Mount Thala; 8 the Nabae on the West of Vallis Garamantica. 9 the Derbici, dwelling on the west of the hill Aranga. And 10 the Psylli, placed by Ptolomie amongst the Inhabitants of Cyrene, but so neer the borders of this Country, and so far from the civilities of those Nations which conversed either with Rome or Carthage, that they may more properly be thought to belong to this. Of a nature so venemous, that they could poyson a Snake. Insomuch, that when their wives were delivered, they would throw their children amongst a bed of Serpents, supposing that childe to be born of an adulterate bed, the very smell of whose body would not drive away a whole brood of the like poysonous vermine. Others there were of less note, which that Author calleth Minores Gentes; many in number, of small fame, and therefore not material to be here inserted; those of most note, the Africerones (whom some Authors call the Gampsaphantes) honoured with the Attribute of Gens Magna, the greatest as it seems of those lesser Nations. None of them of much note in the way of story, except they were these Libyans which are so famoused in Herodotus for an expedition they made against the South winde. For when this wind blowing abroad the hills and desarts of sand, had dried up those many rills and waters they had among them, they to revenge this injury, by common consent armed themselves, and went to fight against him. But they took not the South winde unprepared. For he mustered up his forces, incountred them with such a brave volley of sand, that he overwhelmed and slew them all. A better friend was the North wind to the Citizens of Rhegium, in Italy, and better was he rewarded for it; for having scattered a mighty fleet, which Dionysius prepared against them, he was by the common-councell, made free of their City. That part of Caesars war which was managed here, we shall hereafter meet with on ano∣ther occasion.

Thus having took a view of the state of this Country, as it stood of old; we will next look upon it in its present condition; as comprehending the whole Provinces of 1 Biledulgerid, or Numidia. 2 Libya Deserta, or Sarra; and 3. a great part of that Country which is now called Terra Nigri∣tarum. But because the greatest part of this last Country is to come under another Accompt, we will here only take the two first into consideration.

1. NVMIDIA.

1. NVMIDIA, is bounded on the East with Egypt, on the West with the Atlantick Ocean; on the North with Mount Atlas which parteth it from Barbarie, and Cyrene; on the South with Libya Deserta.

It was thus first called by John Leo, an African Writer, to whose description of all Africk we are much beholding; because of that resemblance which the People of it have to the old Numidians, which is after the custom of the Nomades, living without houses, under their Wagons, and Carts, as Lucan testifieth of them, thus

Nulla domus, plaustris habitant, migrare per arva Mos, atque errantes circumvectare Penates.

They dwell in wains, not houses; and do stray Through fields, and with them lead their gods each way.

And worthily may they owe their names to them, from whom they borrow so much of their na∣ture: for the people to this day spend their lives in hunting, and stay but three or four dayes in a place, as long as the grass will serve the Camels. This is the cause why this Countrey is so ill peopled, the Towns so small in themselves, and so remote from others. An example hereof is Teffet a great Ci∣ty in their esteem, which yet containeth but 400 housholds, and hath no neighbours within 300 miles of it.

The Country aboundeth with Dates, whence it is called Dactylorum regio, and in the Arabick Bi∣ledulgerid, which signifieth also a Date-region. These Dates are (to speak properly) the fruit of the Palm Trees, usually growing in hot Countries, of which some are male, some female; the first bring∣ing forth only flowers; the other fruit: and yet the male so beneficial to the increase of the Dates, that unless a flowred bough of the male be ingrafted into the female, the Dates never prove good, in case they bear any Dates at all, as before was noted. This fruit is the chief diet of the people: but this sweet meat hath sowre sawce; for it commonly rotteth their teeth betimes. As for the stones of these Dates, they feed their Goats with them, whereby they grow fat, and yield store of milk. The Aire hereof, of so sound a nature, that if a man be troubled with the French disease, he shall there, without any course of Physick, finde a present remedy.

The natural Inhabitants of this Country, are said to be base and vile people, theeves, murderers, treacherous, and ignorant of all things; feeding most commonly on Dates, Barley, and Carrion; accounting Bread a Diet for their Festival Dayes. But the Arabians who are intermingled with them, in most part of the Country, affirmed to be (comparatively with the Natives) ingenuous, liberal, and civil. The Garments of these Numidians, of the coursest cloth, so short that they co∣ver not half the body: the richer sort, distinguished by a Jacket of blew Cotton with wide sleeves. Their Steeds are Camels, which they ride on without stirrop, or so much as a saddle; a leather, thrust thorow on hole made in the nose of the Camel, serves them for a bridle; and to save the charge of Spurs they make use of a goad. Their Religion, Mahometism, to which perverted (Christianity having once had some footing here) in the year 710. the Azanaghi and other people of those parts then subdued by the Saracens: who held them for a Nation of so little reckoning, that no man of accompt amongst them would descend so low, as to be their Prince, but left them to be ruled as in former times, by the Chiefs or Heads of their several Clans!

The chief River which is left, hath the name of Dara, and possibly enough may be the Daradus of Ptolomy: the rest which are mentioned in that Author, rising out of Mount Atlas, and falling headily this way, finding these barren wildernesses to afford them the readiest Channels, are trained along by the allurements of the Sands, and are either swallowed up in great Lakes; or being too liberal to the thirsty sands in their way to the Sea, die at the last for thirst in the midst of the Desarts.

The Principal of their Provinces (if capable of a distinction into better and worse.) 1 DARA; more cultivated then the rest, because of the River running thorow it, whence it hath its name: 250 miles in length, indifferently fruitful, where the River doth overflow and water it; and of so diffe∣rent a nature from all the rest, that here the Country people have some scattered Villages, the better sort their several Castles. 2 PESCARA, so called from the chief Town of it, exceedingly in∣fested with Scorpions; the sting whereof is present death. 3 FIGHIG, so called from the chief Town also, inhabited by an industrious and witty People (in respect of the rest) some of which betake themselves to Merchandise; some to the studie of their Law, which they studie at Fesse, and grow rich upon it. 4 TEGORARIN, a large Region, and well inhabited, better then any except Dara; as having in it 50 Castles or Gentlemens houses, and 100 Villages. The people wealthy in regard of the gread trade which they drive with the Negroes; and pretty good husbands in manu∣ring their land on which they are forced to lay much soil; and will therefore let some of it Rent-free to strangers, reserving only the dung of themselves and their cattell. 5 BILEDVLGERID, speci∣ally so called, abundantly fruitful in Dates, whence it had the name, but destitute of Corn by reason of the extream dryness of the soyle; and yet hath in it many Towns of good note among them. Of less note, 6 Tesset, 7 Segelmesse, 8 Zeb, 9 Tebelbeti, and 10 Fessen, so called from the chiefest of their Towns and Villages.

Towns of most note both now and in former times, besides those spoken of before, 1 Timugedit, in the Province of Dara, the birth-place of Mahomet Ben Amet and his three sons, the founders of the Xeriffian Empire. 2 Tafilete, in the said Province, to which place Mahomet the second of these sons and first King of Morocco of that Family, confined his eldest brother Amet, having took him prisoner, Anno 1544. 3. Teffet, a great Town of 400 houses, but so poorly neighboured that there is no other inhabited place within 300 miles of it; but of that before. 4 Techort, the inhabi∣tants whereof are very courteous to strangers, whom they entertain at free-cost; and choose rather to marry their daughters to them then to any of the Natives. 5 Eboacah, the most Eastern Town in

all this Country, distant about 100 miles from the borders of Egypt. 7 Debris, one of the chief Ci∣ties of the Garamantes, of great renown in former times for Wells or Fountain of the Sun, the wa∣ters whereof being lukewarm at the Sun-rising, cooled more and more till noon, was then very cold, and so continued untill midnight; afterwards by degrees growing hotter and hotter, as if it had a natural Antipathy with the Sun, hottest when that was furthest off; and cold when neerest. 8 Masucha, seated on a Rock, garrisoned by Jugurth for a place of refuge, but taken by Marius, in the prose∣cution of that War. 8 Capsa, the chief City of all this tract, said to be built by Hercules; but que∣stionless of very great strength, anguibus arenisque vallata, made inaccessible (saith the Historian) by the thick Sands and multitudes of Serpents which were harboured in them; but easily forced by Marius in his Wars with Jugurth, and utterly destroyed by Caesar in his war against Juba.

It seems by this, that those people neighbouring Mount Atlas were much at the disposal of the Kings of Mauritania in the times foregoing; and so they have been also in these latter times! For though neglected by the Romans, who thought it an high point of wisdom not to extend their Em∣pire beyond that Mountain; yet the Saracens had not long possessed themselves of those parts of Barbary, which was in the year 698; but within twelve yeers (Anno 710.) they subdued this Coun∣try, and planted their Religion in it, though not themselves. Nor was Amet, the first Xeriffe of Morocco warm in that estate, when he thought it best for him to secure himself in it by the conquest of this: to whose successors, the chiefes of the Tribes hereof render some acknowledgements.

2. LIBYA DESEETA.

2. LIBYA DESERTA, is bounded on the north with Numidia, or Biledulgerid, to which contiguous; on the East with Nubia a Kingdom and Province of the Land of Negroes; on the South with the land of Negroes wholly, and on the West with Gualata, another Province of these Negroes interposed betwixt it and the Atlantick.

The reason of the name of Libya we have had before. To which Deserta was added upon very good reasons, as well to difference it from the other Libya, a Province of Egypt, as to express the barren and sandy condition of it: in which respect by the Arabians called Sarra, signifying in their language a rude and inhabitable Desart, as this Country is. So truly such, that men may travell in it eight days together without finding water, or seeing any tree, and no grass at all. The water which they have is drawn out of pits, exceeding brackish, and many times those pits so covered with the Sands that men die for thirst: the Merchants therefore carrying their water with them on the backs of Camels; which if it fail, they kill their Camels, and drink a water which they wring out of their guts. And yet as dangerous and uncomfortable as these Desarts be, they are very much travel∣led by the Merchants of Fesse and Tremesen, trading to Agades and Tombatum, in the land of Negroes.

The People differ not much from the Numidians in shape or qualities; but if a worse of quality, it must be the Lybian. They did once worship a God called Psaphon, who when he lived, taught divers Birds which he caught, and then set at liberty, to say these words, viz. Psaphon is a great god: which the simple people hearing, and admiring at it, afforded him Divine honours. Converted at last to the Christian Faith, they remained a while in the profession of the Gospel: exterminated by the Saracens about the year 710. who having added Numidia or Biledulgerid to their former con∣quests, planted their Superstitions in this Country also.

This Country is divided (as others into Provinces) into five great Desarts, to which those of less note are to be referred.

1. ZANHAGA, beginning at the borders of Gualata (interposed betwixt it and the Atlantick Ocean) and extending Eastward to the Salt-pits of Tegaza; having on the South Gualata and Tom∣butum in the land of Negroes, so destitute of water, that there is one pit only at the end of each hundred mile, brakish and unwholsom; and in the Desarts of Azaoad and Araoan which are parts of this, but one in an 150 or 200 miles riding.

2. ZVENZIGA, extended from the Salt-pits of Tegaza Eastward, to the Desart of Targa; bounded on the North with Segelmesse and Tebelbeti, Numidian Provinces; and on the South with the Desarts of Ghir and Guber. So void of water, (especially in that part thereof which is called Gogden) that in nine dayes travell there is not so much as one drop to be seen, but what they carry on their Camels.

3. TARGA, extended Eastward to the Desart of Ighidi; and reaching from Tegorarin in the North, to the Desart of Agader in the South: the best conditioned part of all this Countrey, well watered, of a temperate A••re, and a soyl reasonably fruitfull. In length from North to the South 300 miles; and liberally stored with Manna, which they gather into little vessels, and carry to Aga∣dez to sell. Mingled in water or with pottage it is very cooling, and drank of in their Feasts, as a speciall dainty.

4. LEMPTA, extendeth from the Deserts of Ighidi, unto that of Bordea.

5. BORDEA, which reacheth to the borders of Nubia. Of these two there is little to be said in several, but that this last was discovered lately by one Hamar, a guide to a Caravan of Merchants; who blinded with the sands wandred out of his way, and causing sand to be given him at every twen∣ty miles end, found by the smell at last that they begun to draw nigh some inhabited Place, and told them of it 40 miles before they came to it.

Cities of note we hope for none, where we finde no water. Of such as go for Cities here, the most considerable, 1 Tegaza, rich in veins of Salt, resembling Marble, which the Inhabitants, being 20 days distant from any habitation, and consequently many times in danger to die for famine, ex∣change for Victuals with the Merchants of Tombutum, who come hither for it: Much troubled with the South winds, which doth so drive the sands upon them, that it causeth many of them to loose their sight. 2. Huaden, or Hoden, a known resting place, and a great refreshment to the Mer∣chant in the midst of these Desarts. 3 Guargata on the brink of a Lake, fed by a River of hot water; affirmed to be a Town of elegant building, and inhabited by a wealthy People, 4 Toberaum, of little note, but that it serveth for a Stage or baiting place to the wearie Traveller. Of which kinde there are said to be others at the extremities or ends of each several Desarts; the Havens of such men as sail in these sandy Seas; but not else observable.

Nor is there much, if any thing, observable of them in the way of story, but that not looked after by any of the great Conquerours, either Greeks or Romans, much of the Country was possessed by Arabian Colonies (men fit enough to plant in such barbarous Nations) at such time as the Saracens planted their Religion here. The Government of the Country since, as it was before, by the Chiefs of their several Clans, or Families, who as they know no Law themselves, so do the People shew as much ignorance of it in their lives and actions: differing but little from brute Beasts, more then shape and speech.

And so much for LIBYA INTERIOR.

OF TERRA NIGRITARVM.

TERRA NIGRIT ARVM, or THE LAND OF NEGROES, is bounded on the East with Aethiopia Superior, on the West with the Atlantick Ocean, on the North with Libya Deserta, and on the South with the Aethiopick Ocean, and part of Aethiopia Inferior. So called from the Nigritae, the chief of the Nations here inhabiting in the time of Ptolomy: and they so named from the River Niger, of which more anon.

The Country very hot, by reason of ifs situation under the Torrid Zone: yet very well inhabited, full of people, and in some places alwayes green; well watered, and exceeding fruitful, specially in those parts which lie within the compass of the overflowings of the River Niger, and on the further side of the River Sanaga; abundantly well stored both with Corn, Cattel, and Garden-ware for the use of their Kitchins; well Wooded, and those Woods well furnished with Elephants and other Beasts, both wild and tame. Their greatest want (but such a want as may be born with) is the want of Fruit-trees, few of which they have; and those they have, bear one kind of fruit only, which is like the Chesnut, but somwhat bitterer. Rain here doth neither hurt nor help; their greatest welfare consisting in the overflowings of Niger, as that of Egypt in the inundations of Nile. In some parts liberally enriched with Mines both or Gold and Silver, very fine and pure: so that had not the Por∣tugals affected the honour of discovering New-Worlds as much as Wealth, they might have made as rich a Factory here, as at the Indies.

The inhabitants, till the coming of the Portugals thither, were for the most part so rude and bar∣barous, that they seem to want that use of Reason which is peculiar unto man; of little wit, and de∣stitute of all Arts and sciences; prone to luxury, and for the greatest part Idolaters, though not with∣out some small admixture of Mahumetans. When the Portugals first sailed into these Coasts, they hereof took the Ships for great Birds with white wings; and after, upon better acquaintance, they could not be brought to believe, but that the Eyes which were casually painted on the beaks of the ships, were the eyes by which they saw how to direct themselves in their course. Guns seemed to them, for their hideous noise, to be the works of the Devil; and for Bag-pipes, they took them to be living creatures; neither when they had been permitted to feel them, would they be perswaded but that they were the work of Gods own hands. The very Nobles (if so noble a name may with∣out offence be given to such blockish people) are so dull and stupid, that they are ignorant of all things which belong to civil society; and yet so reverent of their King, that when they are in his pre∣sence, they never look him in the face, but sit flat on their buttock, with their elbows on their knees, and their hands on their faces. They use to anoint their hair with the fat of Fishes, which makes them stink more wretchedly then they would do otherwise. Of complexion they are for the most part Cole-black, whence the name of Negroes; but on the South-side of the River Senaga, they are only Tawny: the Blacks so much in love with their own complexion, that they use to paint the Devil white; which I find thus versified.

The Land of Negroes is not far from thence, Neerer extended to th' Atlantick Main; Wherein the black Prince keeps his residence, Attended by his jetty coloured Train: Who in their native beauty most delight, And in contempt do paint the Devil white.

They have tried all Religions, but agree in none. Idolaters at the first, as others the Descendants of Cham: Afterwards it is said that they received the Rites and Religion of the Jews, (but the time and occasion of it I do no where find) in which they continued very long: But that being worn out at the last, Christianity prevailed in some Kingdoms of it. In the year 973. Mahometism began to get ground amongst them, by the diligence and zeal of some of the Preachers of that Law: the first who were reduced that way being those of Melli; after which Tombuto, Oden, Gualata, were infected with the same poyson also. In the end, all the rest of this Country followed their example, except the Kingdom of Borneo, some part of Nubia, and the Coasts of the Atlantick Ocean, which continue in their antient Gentilism: Christianity being confined to a corner of Nubia (if still there remaining) and some few Garrisons belonging to the Crown of Portugal. And as they are of different Reli∣gions, so are they also of several Languages: those of Gualata, Guinea, Tombutum, Melli, and Gugonti, speaking the Language called Sungai; the Guberoi, Canontes, Chaesenae, and Gangrates &c. that called Guber; Gualata, a language of its own; and those of Nubia, one resembling the Ara∣bick, Chaldaean, and Egyptian.

Mountains of most note in it, in the former times, were those of 1. Arvaltes, and 2. Arangus, and 3. that called Deorum currus; this last supposed to be the same which is now called Punta de Lopes Gonsales; but that more probably which they now call Cabo de Sierra Leona, a large Promontory,

thrusting it self into the Sea; discerned afar off by the Saylor and the Country people, as well by reason of his height, reaching to the clouds, as the continual lightnings and thunders which do issue thence.

Rivers of most note, besides Nile, which watereth it on the East, 1 Senaga, or Canaga, which riseth out of the Lake of Guoga, supposed to be the same which Ptolomy calleth Lacum Chelonidem; and if so, then must this be the River Gir, of which he saith, that having fallen into that Lake, and there swallowed up, it thence produced another River, whose name he telleth not, little inferiour unto Nilus for the length of its course, the variety of strange Creatures which are bred therein, or the distinction which it maketh in the face of this Country: the people on the one side of it, being Black, on the other Tawnie; the soyl on the one side very barren, on the other fruitfull. In the end having run his race, he falleth into the Atlantick by two great Out-lets. 2 Niger, a River better known to Ptolomy by name then nature; now found to have its rise from a great Lake within two degrees of the Equinoctiall, whence running northwards for a time, he hideth himself under ground for the space of 60 miles together: when rising up again, and making a great Lake called the Lake of Borneo, he bendeth his course directly Westward, and taking in many less Channels, he teareth the earth into many Islands, and at last falleth into the Sea. Of as long course, and the same wondrous nature, as the River Nilus. For from the fifteenth day of June, it overfloweth all the adjacent fields, the space of 40 days together, and in so many more, recollecteth his waters, into their proper Chan∣nels; the whole Country being indebted to these inundations, for its fertility, which otherwise could be but small, since the dryness of the soyl can afford no exhalations, whereby clouds may be gene∣rated, and the earth refreshed with moystures, or revived with dewes.

Chief Cities of this Country in the time of Ptolomy, 1 Nigira, the Metropolis of the Country, 2. Panagra, 3 Malachath, 4 Anygath, 5 Thumondacana, 6 Suluce: and others to the number of 17 in all; situate all along the course of the River Niger: Of all which we have nothing now remaining but the situation and the names, which that Author giveth us. So that the memory of all the Ancient Towns and People being quite defaced, we must look upon it now as it standeth divided at this time into several Kingdoms, 25 at the least in all (some say many more) the chief of which are these that follow.

1. ORA ANTEROSA, A large tract of ground on the Western Ocean, extended from Cape Blance to the River Carthage, sandy and barren, but reasonably well peopled. The Inhabi∣tants hereof called Azanaghi, were accompted formerly very rude and barbarous; much civilized since the Portugals and other Christian Nations began to trade there; of middle stature, complexioned between black and ash colour; great lyers, very treacherous, poor and parsimonious, and very pati∣ent in extreams both of heat, and hunger. The chief Towns, 1 Porto di Dio (we may call it Gods Port) and 2 Porto del Riscatto, two frequented Havens, thus named occasionally by the Portugueze, at their first coming thither. 3 Arquin, a strong Fortress of the Portugals, situate on or neer the Promontory now called Cape Blance, and giving name unto some Ilands, five or six in number, ly∣ing neer unto it, called the Isles of Arquin, inhabited by a barbarous People, named the Azanhays; but of no great note. These coasts discovered first by the Portugals, An. 1452. under the conduct of Prince Henry, son of John the first, or by his incouragement and directions.

2. GVALATA, distant from the Ocean 100 miles, (the Province of Ora Anterosa being inter∣posed) is but a small Country, though a Kingdom, containing in it but three Burrough Towns, with some Territorie of ground and petty Hamlets belonging to them. Fruitfull only in Dates, Mill, and Pulse; but of these two last no great abundance. The Inhabitants Cole-black, hospitable towards strangers, to their power, but poor and miserable; without Laws, setled form of Government, Gentry and Judges.

3. AGADEZ bordering on Targa, one of the five Desarts of Libya; the People of it general∣ly given to grazing, their houses made of green boughs, which upon every change of Pasture they carry with them. So that we are to look for few Towns among them, but these moveable Villages. One of good note it hath, called Agadez, by the name of the Country, inhabited for the most part by Merchants Strangers, who drive a great Trade betwixt this and Tremesen. The Town well wal∣led, the houses of a better building then the Country promiseth; the People civiller, and more fair conditioned then the rest of the Negroes, seated commodioustly on a River which falleth into the Senaga, and by that means hath correspondence with the Ocean also. The King hereof, a Tributary to the King of Tombuto, payeth him 15000 Crowns of Annual tribute.

4. CANO, a large Province on this side of the River Canaga, full of woods, mountainous, and in some parts desart; but plentifull enough of Corn, Rice, Citrons, and Pomgranats, with good store of Cotton wool. Well-watered besides that great River with some lesser Streams. Sufficiently populous, and stored with good Towns and Villages, the habitations of the Shepherds and Husband∣men; as the chief Town called Cano, is of wealthy Merchants. This the Seat-Royal of their King, a Tributary also unto him of Tombuto; environed with a wall, built of a Chalk stone, as most part of the houses are.

5. CASENA, on the East of Cano, but less fruitfull far, the Country over-grown with vast woods, and the soyl untractable; affording only Mill, and Barley, but of that good plenty. The People as black as any Coal, with great noses, and most prominent lips. Their hou∣ses very poor and mean, and their Towns accordingly; none of them numbring more then 300 Families.

6. SANAGA, lying on the other side of that River, from which thus named, extendeth to the Atlantick Ocean, as far as to the Promontory which by Ptolomy named Arsinarium, is now called Cape Vert, or Caput Viride. The Country full of rich Pastures, goodly Trees, and most sorts of Fruits; plentifull enough of Mill and Pulse, but ill provided of other Corn, and no Grapes at all. Well watered both with Lakes and Rivers. No tame beasts about their fields, but Goats, Cows and Oxen; of Lyons, Leopards, Wolves and Elephants, too great a plenty. The people extreme black, much given to lying, treacherous, very full of talk, excessively venereous, and extremely jealous. A King they have, but such a one as holdeth but by courtesie only, having no certain Rents or Revennes, but what given By his Nobles.

7. GAMBRA or GAMBEA, a small Kingdom on the River so named, but bordering in some places on the Atlantick. In those parts very pleasant, the Trees always flourishing, the air very hot; in other parts of the same nature with Sanaga, but that this affords good store of Rice, which the other doth not.

8. TOMBVTVM, on the further side of the River Sanaga: exceeding plentiful of Corn, Cattel, Milk, and Butter. Destitute of Salt, but what they buy of sorrein Merchants at excessive rates; and small store of horses. Well watered by a branch also of the River Niger, and many wells of purpose made to receive such waters, as by artificial Dikes and Channels are derived from both. The People courteous, rich, and pleasant, spending whole dayes and nights in singing and dancing. Their food, Flesh, Butter, Milk, and Fish, which they mingle together, and make it neither toothsom nor wholsom. The chief Towns, 1 Tombuto, which gives name to this Kingdom, situate about twelve miles from a branch of the Niger, and founded by the Saracens or Arabians in the 610. year of their Hegira. The houses all of mud and thatch, except one fair Church, and the Kings palace, both of lime and stone. Inhabited by wealthy Merchants, who manage a great trade betwixt this and Fesse. 2 Gago, the residence of the King; large, without wals, the buildings very poor and mean, ex∣cept such as belong unto the King or the chief Nobility. The Merchants rich, and their wares sump∣tuous and precious, but excessive dear. The Town about 400 miles distant from Tombuto, situate in a fruitful Country for Rice, Fruits, and Flesh, and well replenished with fresh water. 3 Cabra, a large Town, but unwalled, and of no better building then the other two.

9. MELLI, lying on the East of Tombutum, is a spacious and fruitful Province, situate all along on a branch of the River Niger, in breadth 300 miles, and abundantly fertile, especially in Corn, Cat∣tel, and Cotton Wooll: the people generally very wealthy; of greater wit, civility and industry then the rest of the Negroes. The chief Town of it is called Melli, unwalled, but large, as containing in it 6000 families furnished with many Temples, Priest and Readers of the Mahometan Law, which those of this Country did first unhappily admit of. This the Seat-royal of their Kings, who are very courteous unto strangers; but Homagers and Tributaries to the King of Tombutum.

10. GHENEOA, situate betwixt Gualata, Tombutum, and Melli, but so that it bordereth in one place on the Ocean also; is a wealthy Country: but hath neither Town or Castle in it, except that wherein the King resideth, who is a Vassal also to the king of Tombutum. That town the resi∣dence also of their Priests, Doctors, and Merchants: of which the Priests and Doctors are apparalled in white, but all the rest in black, or blew Cotton. The people have great traffick with the Merchants of Barbary; and though made very rich by the overflowings of Niger, and the wealth of the Country, they have great store of Gold uncoined; yet in buying and selling at home, they use iron-mony.

11. GVBER lieth on the East of the former Province; of the same length, and naturally well senced with lofty mountains. Exceeding populous, and thick set with Villages, in which dwell their Husbandmen and Shepherds, rich in their numerous herds of all sorts of Cattel, as also great quantities of Rice and Pulse: the people very industrious, and good Artificers. Their principal Town is called Guber also, a town of 6000 families, the usual residence of their King; full of wealthy Merchants, and rich in Manufactures.

12. GIALOFI lieth betwixt the two great Rivers of Sanaga and Gambia. The people whereof are of such admirable dexterity, that they can leap upon an horse when he is in his fnll gallop, stand in the saddle when he runneth fastest; turn themselves about upon his back, and suddenly sit down. Of their Country I find little, of their Story nothing, but that Bemoin one of their kings, being over∣laid with Civil wars, in the year 1489. went for aid to the king of Portugal, and gave great hopes of his Conversion to the Christian faith; But being shamefully murdered by Pedro de Vas the Portugal General, the hopes of Christianity in these parts fell together with him.

13. GVINEA, is a Sea-coast Country, extended from Sierra Leona (so called from the Lyon like roaring of the Waves beating on that Promontory) in the tenth degree of Longitude, to the borders of Benin in the 30. But the Portugals comprehend under this name the whole Sea coast of Africk from Cape Blanco and the Country of Ora Anterosa, to Angola and Congo inclusively, in the Lower Aethiopia. But take it in the proper sense, as before limited, and we shall find it to be rich in Gold, Ivory, Rice, Barley, Cotton-wooll, and a sort of Pepper which the Portugals call Pimienta del Rabo, the Natives Melegneta, and we Guinie-pepper: of double the efficacie of the Pepper which come from India; and therefore forbidden to be sold by the Kings of Portugal, for fear their Indian trade should be discontinued. Well stored with Sheep and Poultry and of Dates good plenty; All other Fruits which they want or care for, are brought thither from Gualata. Birds in abundance, and

Of Elephants and Apes too many. A Tree they have, by them called Mignolo, the Bark whereof being cut doth afford a most excellent liquour, more pleasant, strong, and nourishing, then the choice∣est Wines; which they drink of in their great Feasts, even to drunkenness. The people of both Sexes very rude and barbarous, aswel in their habit, as their manners; yet amongst many barbarous customs they have one most commendable, which is the breeding of their Maidens: When marriage∣able, they place in an house severed from the rest of their Cities like a Cloyster or Monastery: where for a yeers space they are trained up by some old man of best estimation. At the years end they are brought out well apparalled with Musick and Dances; where the young men please themselves in the choice of their wives. For whom having bargained with their Parents, they satisfie the old man for his care and pains in their Education. They keep one day of rest weekly, but therein differ from all Nations in the world besides, that they keep their Sabbath upon the Tuesday. Distracted into as many Kingdoms as great Tribes or Families: the Kings thereof subordinate unto one another, as they lie more within the Land, till they end all in a subjection to the King of Mandinga. Places of most note, 1. Songus the principal of Mandinga, about 100 Leagues Eastward from the Cape of Palmes. 2 Budomel, the chief Town of the Kingdom so called. 3 Uxoo, in the Center of all the Country. 4 Mina, a strong hold of the Portugals, situate neer the Cape called Cabo de Trois pentas the three pointed Cape; named sometimes also S. George de Mina, by the name of the Cappa∣docian Martyr, and the Mines of Gold which they hoped to finde there; By which, and by the Fort of Arquin, which they have upon Cape Blanco in the North part of this Land of the Negros, they com∣mand all the Countries which they call by the name of Guinea. This Town not built untill the year 1485. in the beginning of the reign of John the 2d. though the discovery of these coasts had been made before An. 1452. under the conduct of Prince Henry Duke of Viseo, Son of John the first. By whose incouragement the Portugueze did first imploy themselves in forreign Discoveries, and be∣came enamoured of the Seas.

14. BENIN, beth directly East of Guinea, by the Portugals reckoned for a Province or King∣dom of it: the King whereof is said to have 600 Wives, with all which twice a yeer he goeth out in Pomp. The Gentlemen (if I abuse not the name) have most of them 80 Wives, some more; he that is poorest, ten, or twelve, and the more the merrier. The people thereof do cut and rase their skin with three lines drawn to the Navel; esteeming it necessary to salvation. They use all, both men and women, to go naked till they are Married; and then robe clothed only from the wast to the knees: so that had our Sir Thomas Moor lived in these parts, he had in some measure had his desire. For he among other strange plots in his Utopian Common-wealth, telleth us, how there it is the custom, for some reverend old Sire to bring in naked, the young man; and some hoary old Ma∣tron, to present naked, the young woman; between whom a Marriage is propounded. For, faith he, in buying a horse, the chapman not only vieweth his naked carkase, but taketh off all his trappings and saddle, lest under them some blame might be hidden: and why then in choosing of a wise, should we take one, of whom we see no more then the face (unius Palmae spatium) and perhaps scarce that. The learned and ingenuous Author of the New Atlantis, though he dislike of Marriages made upon such uncertainties, yet he would have this discovery made by some friends of the Parties, not by them themselves: it being as he saith very inconvenient, that after such a plain and familiar sight of each others person, there should be a refusal upon either side. But these new Projects I refer to your modest censures.

15. GVANGARA lieth on the North of Benin, a wealthy and well peopled Country; but their Towns and Villages very mean, except that called by the same name with the Country, where the King resideth, which is somewhat better then the rest, well traded, and full of rich Merchants. The King hereof of so great Revenues, that he keepeth seven thousand Archers, and five hundred Horse in continuall pay; but Homager and Tributarie to the King of Bor∣num.

16. BORNVM, a large and opulent Country on the West of Guangara, is there extended to the length of 500 miles. Distinguished equally in a manner into hills, and valleys: the hills in∣habited by Neat-herds, and Sheepherds, breeding great flocks and herds of Cattel, with Mill, and many other fruits to us unknown; the Vales replenished with many Market-Towns, and as full of Corn. The People are of no Religion, but live like beasts, without propriety so much as in their wives or children: nor are they differenced by names, as in other places, but by some mark upon their bodies. Which though it seem strange to us of this present Age, yet was it thus in part, with out Saxon Ancestors. Whence have we else the names of White, Brown, Black, Gray, Green, and Tawny; or those of Long, Short, Low, Curle, Crispe, and others, but from such Originals? not to say any thing of the names of Trades, and Occupations, so familiar with us. The name of their chief City is Borneo, where the King resideth. A potent Prince, who keepeth in continual pay three thou∣sand horse, and great numbers of Foot, and yet is said to have no other Revenue then what he getteth by strong hand from his Enemies. Which if it be true, those Kings must needs be good Warriours, and have great successes also in their undertakings: it being also said of these Kings of Borneo, that all the Furniture of their Horses, all the Dishes, Cups, and Platters which they eat or drink in, yea the very Chaines for his Dogs were of finest Gold.

17. Gaoga lieth betwixt Borneo, and the Desarts of Nubia: the Country almost square, each side thereof extended 500 miles. The People ignorant, rude, uncivil, but specially those which dwell in the mountains: their houses built most of boughs and leaves, which once dry, easily take fire; but the best is, they are soon repaired: their greatest wealth is in their Cattel, which they keep most ten∣derly. About the year 1420. they were brought into subjection by a Negro-Slave, who having slain his Master, by the help of his wealth grew strong enough to incroach on his neighbours; and selling such Captives as he took, for horses of Egypt, became King of Gaoga, and in fine very gracious with the Mamaluck Sultans. His Suceessors have since so enlarged their Territories, that they are second unto none but the Kings of Tombutum.

18. NVBIA hath on the West Gaoga, bounded on the North with Egypt, extended Eastward unto Nilus, by which parted from Aethiopia Superior, or the Habassine Empire. So called from the Nubae, an antient and potent people of this Tract, spoken of by Ptolomie: the great Lake, anciently called Nubea Palus, being hence denominated. A distinct people from those of the same name, dwelling on the shores of the Red-Sea, neer unto Sinus Avalites, who from the shortnes of their stature passed in accompt for Pigmies; 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, saith Hesychius an old Grammarian: these being a strong and potent Nation, and well skilled in wars. Insomuch as Cyriacus once a King hereof, under∣standing of some pressures laid upon the Christians of Egypt, is said to have raised 100000 Horse for their aid and succor; but by the perswasions of the Patriarch of Alexandria, went back unsought with. For at that time the Country was wholly Christian, and had been so from the very dayes of the Apostles; but are now fallen off again to their former Idolatries, or become Mahometans, for want of Ministers to instruct them. It is recorded by Alvarez, the writer of the Aethiopick History, that at his being in the Court of the Abassine Emperor, there came Ambassadors out of Nubia to intreat a supply of Pastors to instruct their Nation, and repair Christianity amongst them; but were un∣christianly rejected.

Here is a Poison in this Country of which the tenth part of a grain will dispatch a man in a quarter of an hour, and is sold for ten Ducars an ounce; the Customs for which unto the King is as much as the price unto the Merchant. But for this one ill Commodity they have many good; that is to say, Corn, Sugar, Civet, Sanders, Ivory, all in great abundance; some store of Gold, and other Mettals. The Country naturally sandy, but well refreshed with Lakes and Rivers, which do much inrich it; insomuch as the people generally are very wealthy, aad manage a great trade with the Merchants of Caire and Egypt. Their chief City is called Dangala, large and well frequented; said to contain no fewer then 10000 families; but their houses built of nothing but thatch and mortar. In other parts, especially towards the river Nilus, they have many Villages; few or none of them worth the naming.

There are many other Kingdoms in this Land of Negroes, besides those in Guinea, but of lesser note; as 19. BITO, 20. TEMIANO, 21. ZEGZEG, 22. ZANFARA, 23. GOTHAN, 24. MEDRA, 25. DAVM. Of which there is nothing to be spoken, but of their poverty or riches, blessings or curses common to them with the rest of these Nations; and therefore I purposely omit them.

This Country, or a great part of it, was anciently accounted part of Libya Interior; inhabited besides the Nubae and Nigritae spoken of before, by the Nabathrae dwelling about the hill Arvates, the Aronca neer the hill Arangus, the Agargina, Xylinces, and Alchalinces, Aethiopick Nations. Not much considerable in the business of former times; nor much discovered (not very perfectly at this day) till the year 973 at what time certain Mahometan Preachers, out of a superstitious zeal to propagate their Sect, first opened the way into these Countries: the People then living like bruit beasts, without King, Law, or any form of Government; scarce knowing how to sow their lands; clad in the skins of as very beasts as themselves, and challenging no propriety in wives or children. First conquered by Joseph King of Morocco, of the race of the Almohades; and after that by the five Nations of Libya Deserta, who divided them into fifteen parts, every one of those five Nations possessing three of them. One of the Kings of these Libyant, named Soni Heli, being slain by Abuaci Ischia General of his forces, and the rest terrified with that blow, An. 1526. the Negroes once again recovered their long lost liberty, and instituted divers Kings of their own. Amongst them, Izchia was most deservedly made King of Tombutum, who managed his affairs so well, that he conquered the Kings of Guber, Agadez, Cano, Melli, Zanfora, Zegzeg, Ghenaeoa, Gambea, and Casena; which he made his Tributaries. So that his successors are now the greatest of those five Kings, who have the supreme power over all the rest. The other four, 1. the King of Mandinga, lording it over the Realms of Benin, Giolofi, and the Kings of Guinea: 2. the King of Borneo, the onely one that is de∣scended of the Libyan race, in greatness of command next to him of Tombuto; 3. the King of Gua∣lata, whose Kingdom is confined within that one Province, but therein absolute and supreme; and 4. the King of Gaoga, Paramount over all the rest.

But because the greatest power is in the hands of the King of Tombuto, who possibly enough may in short time bring all the rest under his command, we will take a more particular view of his estate; affirmed to be the richest Prince in these parts of Africk, and to have many Plates and Scepters of gold, some of which weigh 1300 pound weight. When any of his Subjects do appear before him, they kneel on both their knees, and bowing their heads unto the ground, cast sand over their shoulders and upon their heads, going forwards still upon their knees. His Court he keeps in a royal manner, continually guarded with 3000 Horse, but with many more Foot, all

armed with Bowes and empoisoned Arrows. To the Jewes a very bitter Enemy, whom he ad∣mitteth not to trade in his kingdoms, and consiscateth the goods of all such of his Subjects as hold traffick with them. Zealous of the Mahometan Law, and liberal in stipends to the Doctors and Professors of it. Of greater power then any other beyond Atlas, but the Habassine Emperor. And though Amet the Xeriffe of Morocco, in the year 1589. had some hand upon him, and con∣quered a great part of this kingdom, even as far as Gago, extending his Empire six moneths journey by Camels beyond Morocco; yet it held not long: this King again recovering what was taken from him; and being since that time in as eminent power, as ever in any times before.

And so much for TERRA NIGRITARVM.

OF AETHIOPIA SVPERIOR.

AETHIOPIA SVPERIOR, is bounded on the East with the Red-Sea, and the Sinus Barbaricus; on the West with Libya Interior, the Realm of Nubia, in the Land of the Negroes, and part of the Kingdom of Congo in the other Aethiopia; on the North with Egypt, and Libya Marmarica; and on the South with the Mountains of the Moon, by which parted from the main body of Aethiopia Inferior.

It was first called Aetheria, and afterwards Atlantia, as Plinie telleth us. In the end, the Grecians gave it the name of Aethiopia, from the Greek words 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, signifying to burn, and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 a Counte∣nance; because the violent heats of the Sun had so scorched the Countenances of the Inhabitants. The additions of Sub Aegypto, Superior, and Interior, serve only to distinguish it from the other Aethiopia, which lieth further off from Egypt, on the outside of this. It is called also Regnum A∣byssinorum, from the Abaseni, or Abyssini, a people of Arabia Felix, who passing over the Red-Sea (not above seven miles broad in the narrowest place) came and setled here. And in the Scri∣pture it is stiled by the name of Ludim, from Lud the son of Mizraim, who first planted it, as hath been proved by many strong and concluding Arguments in our general Preface.

It is situate on both sides of the Equinoctial, extending from the South Parallel of seven De∣grees, where it meeteth with some part of the other Aethiopia; to the Northern end of the Isle of Meroe, situate under the fist Parallel on the North of that Circle. And though by this Accompt it fall short of the dimensions assigned by some, who extend it from one Tropick unto the other; yet is it of a very great length, no less then 1500 miles; the breadth about half as much, the whole cir∣cumference amounting to 4300 miles. Yet so, that all this vast tract of ground, is not to be under∣stood of that part of the Country which is under the command of the Abassine Emperour, common∣ly but mistakingly called Prestor John: but of the whole Country of Aethiopia, as before limited and extended; containing besides his Estate, the Kingdoms of Adel and Adea, and the Provinces of Quiloa and Melindi; which two last are now reckoned of as parts of Aethiopia Inferior: The Isle of Meroe in the North is possessed by Mahometans, the most bitter enemies of this King: all on the West of Nilus, betwixt it and the South-east of Nubia, inhabited by the Anzichi, an Idolatrous and man-eating Nation, subject to a great Prince of their own: and all the Coasts of the Red-Sea, as well within the Streits of Babel Mandel as without, except the Port of Erocco only, enjoyed by Arabians and Moors, who do acknowledge no subjection unto his commands; but are under the Kings of Adel and Adea before mentioned.

But taking it in the largest signification and extent hereof (according unto which we must here de∣scribe it) it comprehendeth the three Countries called antiently Aethiopia Sub Aegypto, Troglo∣ditica, and Regio Cinnamomifera. Of these the two last are by some reckoned but as parts of the first: though certainly the Troglodites were a different Nation from the Aethiopians. For past all doubt the Troglodites were Originally an Arabian people, so called quia 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 subeunt, from their living in Caves and dens: in which respect their part of this Country had the name of Arabia Tro∣gloditica, in Dioscorides, and some others of the Ancient Writers. Of these it is affirmed by Pompo∣nius Mela, that they were not the Masters of any wealth, and that their speech was rather a gnash∣ing of the teeth, then any articulate and intelligible Pronunciation. Nullarum opum Domini sunt Trogloditae, strident magis quam loquuntur. As for their houses, they were (saith he) no better then Caves, and their food then Serpents. With whom concurreth Plinie also for their dwelling in Caves, and consequently for the reason of the name, saying positively, Trogloditae speluncas exca∣vant. Called for the same reason in the holy Scripture, 2 Chron. 12. 3. by the name of Succhaei; the word Succoth (whence that name derived) not only signifying in the Hebrew Tents, or Tabernacles, but Caves, and Dens; and so translated Psal. 10. v. 9. and Job 38. v. 40. As for that part hereof which was called Regio Cinnamomifera, taking up the Southern parts in the time of Ptolomy, it took that name from the abundance of Cinnamon, which was then growing by it, now not a tree of it to be found in all this Country; as the Portugals, who have looked narrowly for it, have affirmed unto us. Shipped at Mosylon, a noted Emporie, placed by Ptolomy in the ninth degree of Northern Lati∣tude; it was thence transported into Egypt and other Countries; as is said by Plinie, Portus Mosy∣litus quo Cinnamomum devehitur: the Spice in some Authors being called Mosulum, by the name of the Town. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Of Cinnamon the best is that which is called Mosulon, because brought from the City of that name in Aethiopia, saith Simeon Sethi in his Tract de Facultatibus Ciborum. As for this Cinnem••n (I note this only by the way) it is the inner bark of a Tree, as big as an Olive, with Leaves like Bay leaves: the drying of which maketh it roll together, and every three years is renewed, and stripped off again. Some think it came first from the Sinae or the Country which the Romans called Sinarum Regio, the Moderns China; and that it was so called, quasi Sinae Amomum, the Amomum of the Sinae; Amomum being the name of a sweet perfume growing in Assyria and Armenia. But then it should be written Sina∣momum

and not Cinnamomum: yet to give the greater credit to the former opinion, they of Ormus call it Bar•• Chinae, or the wood of China. But of this enough.

To go on therefore unto Aethiopia it self. The people of it in old times were said to have been great Astrologers; the first ordainers also of sacred Ceremonies, and in both to be Tutors to the Egyptians. They were also noted to be very good Archers, and to draw the longest and strongest Bowes of any Nation: the Persian Bow (though those the greatest of all Asia) being only three Cubits long; but these of Aethiopia, four. Utuntur etiam Aethiopes quatuor cubitorum arcubus, as we read in Strabo; the like is said also by Herodotus and Diodorus. Their Arrows small, but strong; for the most part poisoned; Aethiopum geminata venenis Vulnera, as we find in Claudian; and for that inhumanity very much condemned. But not to spend our time too much upon these particulars, Pliny reciteth two strange things of this Country: 1. That the Air and ground are so patching hot, that the people not only dare not go out of doors without shooes, but that they rost their meat also by setting it in the Sun. 2. That there is a Lake, whose waters are thrice a day, and thrice a night, exceeding salt and unpleasing; but at all other times most sweet and delicate to the palate.

This Country being as big as Germany, France, and Italy laid together, is but meanly populous; the distemperature of the Climate, and the dry barrenness of the ground, not admitting a multitude. For this cause Africk is by Strabo compared to a Leopards skin, the distance of whose spots sheweth the dispersedness of the towns, and habitations in those torrid countries. A Country scarce in Wheat, but sufficiently plentiful in Rice, Barley, Beans, Pease, and the like; they have abundance of Sugars, Minerals of all sorts, and infinite herds of Oxen, Sheep, Goats Finally, there is no Country under heaven fitter for increase of Plants and Living creatures, if industry were not deficient. But in regard of this defect, they are destitute of many necessary things, which otherwise the natural commodities of the Country would supply them with: For they have here great store of Flax, but make no Cloth; plenty of Vines, yet make no wine, except it be to serve the palaces of the King and the Patriarch. Abundance of Sugar canes, and Mines of Iron; but know not how to make use of either unto any advantage. Rivers and Brooks in many places, but will not take the pains to dig Channels or trenches to derive their waters to the rest of the land which want them: those Rivers almost choak∣ed with Fish, their Woods crammed with Venison, which they trouble not themselves to catch.

By this we may conjecture somwhat of the people also; Lazie and given unto their ease, ill∣clothed, and not much better housed; extremely inclined to Barbarism, destitute of all learning, not to be credited unless they swear by the life of their Emperours; they hate a Smith equally with the Devil: their colour is generally olive-tawny, excepting only their King himself, who is always of a white complexion, (a wonderful prerogative, if true.) This blackness of their bodies, by the Poet attributed to the burning of the world by Phaeton.

Sanguine tum credunt, in corpora summa vocato, Aethiopum populos nigrum traxisse colorem.

Which may be thus Englished:

Their blood (it's thought) drawn from the outward part, The Aethiopians grew so black and swart.

But the true cause hereof, whatsoever it be, may perhaps be looked upon hereafter, when we come to America.

The Christian faith was first made known in this Country by the Eunuch of Queen Can∣dace, who was baptized by Philip the Evangelist, and one of the Seven; more generally im∣braced by the pains and preaching of S. Matthew the Apostle hereof; but not totally propagated over all this Empire till the reign of Abraham, An. 470. who in his life entituled himself the Defender and Propagator of the Religion of CHRIST, and after his death was generally honoured as a Saint. Suppressed in part by the coming in of the Abasenes and other Arabians, it was again revived and more universally received then in former times, in the reign of David king of the Axumite Aethi∣opians: who in a war against Dunmus king of the Humerites in Arabia Felix, solemnly vowed to the God of the Christians to become one of his Followers, if he got the victory: And so according∣ly he did, sending his Ambassadors to the Emperor Justinian for some Bishops and other learned men to instruct his people. The particulars of those Opinions wherewith they have since corrupted the purity of the true Religion, I find thus registred. 1. They use to circumcise their Children, both males and females. 2. They baptize the males 40, and the females 80 dayes after their circumcision. 3. After the receit of the Sacrament, they are not to spit till Sun-set. 4. They profess but one nature, and one will in CHRIST. 5. They accept only the three first General Councels. 6. Their Priests live by the labour of their hands, for they allow them nothing, and permit them not to beg. 7. They baptize themselves every Epiphany day in Lakes and ponds, because that day they suppose Christ to have been baptized by John in Jordan. 8. They eat not of those Beasts which in the old Law are reckoned for unclean. 9. They keep the Saturday or Jewish Sabbath equally solemn with the Lords Day. 10. They administer the Eucharist to Infants presently after Baptism. 11. They teach, that the Reasonable soul of man is derived from their parents by Seminal propagation. 12. That Infants dying unbaptized, are sanctified in the womb by vertue of the Eucharist received by the Mother after her Conception. And finally, they shew a Book of eight volames, writ, as they say, by the Apostles assem∣bled

at Hierusalem for that purpose; the Contents whereof they observe most solemnly. These are the most material points in which they differ from the Tenaries of the Catholique Church; And there are other points in which they differ only from the Church of Rome, as viz. 1. Administring in both kinds; 2. Without either Elevation or Reservation; 3. Rejecting massie Images, and 4. Extreme Unction; 5. Allowing the first marriages to their Priests and Bishops; and 6. in renouncing all relation to the Pope of Rome, who to the business of these Churches is a very stranger, and so hath been from the very first foundation of them. For it appeares by the Canons of the Nicene Council, extant in the Arabick, and translated into Latine by Pisanus, that the Patriarch (or Abuna, as they call him) of these Abassine Churches, was in those times subordinate to the Alexandrian, confirmed in that Supremacie by the Fathers which were there assembled; and con∣stantly ever since approved and practised by these Churches; in the Liturgies whereof, the name of the Alexandrian is remembred before their own. To this Patriarch, by an antient priviledge belong∣eth the seventh place in the Sessions of all General Councils; the Archbishop of Seleucia (or Babylon) only interposing betwixt him and the Patriarch of Hierusalem. Elected by the Abassine Monks of St. Antonies Order remaining in Hierusalem, and confirmed by the Patriarch of Alexandria, (of which Order, and of whose jurisdiction he must alwayes be) he is sent into this Country to take his charge: where in some points of Civil nature he hath equal priviledge with the Emperour himself; and in Spiritual, hath the sole power of excommunicating an obstinate Sinner. All other Eccle∣siastical Dignities, from the Bishoprick to the lowest Benefice, are conferred by the Emperour onely.

The principal Mountains of it in the former times, had the names of 1 Prionotus, 2 Isius, 3 Mo∣nodactylus, 4 Gaurus, and 5 Mons Satyrorum; all of them in that part which was called Troglo∣ditica; 6 Garbala, 7 Elephas, and 8 Maste in the Isle of Meroe: the rest of the Country flat and level, or the hils not eminent. Rivers of most note, 1 Astapus (now Abanni) arising out of a great Lake called Coloe, now the Lake of Barcena. 2 Astaboras, now Tacassi; both falling into the River Nilus. 3. Nilus, of which before when we were in Egypt; whose spring unprofitably sought for in the elder times, is now said to be out of the Lake Zembre in the other Aethiopia, eleven Degrees be∣yond the Aequator: whence passing through spacious Desarts, large Lakes, and many great King∣doms, he at last entreth into this. Here in some places strugling amongst broken Rocks, and less free passages, he falleth with such a wonderful noise into the Vallies beneath, that a Colony planted by the Persians neer one of these Cataracts, (so they call those huge fals of his) were so dulled and deafned with the noise, that they were fain to abandon their habitations. Nor doth it only dull and deafen the neighbouring people, but the very hils do seem to tremble at the noise it maketh. Of which thus the Poet,

Cuncta tremunt undis, & multo murmure montis, Spumeus invictis albescit fluctibus amnis.

Which may be Englished in these words;

The noise the Mountains shakes, who roar for spite To see th' unvanquish'd Waves cloth'd all in white.

Of these Cataracts there are two most noted: the one called Catarractes Major, in the borders of this Country towards Egypt, but South of both the Cities of Philae and Pselcis, Aethiopian cities; the other called Catarractes Minor, not far from Elephantis a City of Egypt, neighbouring to Syens, the last City of that Country towards this. So turbulent is this River amongst the Hils. And yet as terrible as these fals are supposed to be, one may divers times see the Country people in a little Boat not able to contain above two persons, to venture down them without fear; appearing after they have been long tossed in the waters a great distance off, as if they had been shot out of an Engine. Nor is he of such quiet passage in the open Countries, but that the Inhabitants of this Kingdom are fain to cut many Ditches, Sluces, and By-channels to receive his waters; which if not curbed and les∣ned by such wayes as these, might by some sudden overflowing much endanger Egypt: in respect whereof the Sultans of Egypt have paid for long time to the Abassine Emperors an annual tribute. Which when the Great Turk, supposing it a needless charge, had once denied; this people, by the command of their Emperor, did open their Sluces, and break down the Dams; whereby the water fell so violently and so fast into Egypt, that the Turk was not only glad to continue the tribute, but to give them great sums of mony to make up their works. But others say, that this acknowledgment was paid by the Egyptian Kings, not so much for keeping up the waters from drowning Egypt, as for fear the Habassine Emperors should divert the Stream, and so deprive that Country of the benefit of it. But I incline rather to the former. Here are also said to be some Lakes of that poisonous nature, that whosoever drinketh of them, doth either immediately fall mad, or else is troubled for long time with continual drowsiness. Of which thus Ovid,

Aethiopesque Lacus, quos si quis faucibus hausit, Aut furit, aut patitur mirum gravitate soporem.

Which may be paraphrased in these words:

Who doth not know the Aethiopian Lake? Of which whoever drinks, his thirst to slake, Either grows mad, or doth his soul oppress With an unheard of heavy drowsiness.

To look upon the State as it stood in the former times, we finde in it besides the Lakes and Ri∣vers before mentioned, three capacious Bayes, that is to say, Sinus Adulicus, 2 Sinus Avalites, and 3 Sinus Barbaricus; the two last neighboured by the now Countries of Aden and Quiloa. Havens of note, and Rodes for shipping, there were five in all, viz 1 Bathus, or the deep Haven, 2 Dios∣corum Portus, or the Haven of Castor and Pollux, 3 Theon Soterum, or the Haven of the Saviour∣Gods, 4 Portus Evangeliorum, Gospel Port, or the Port of good News. And 5 Serapionis, the Port of Serapion, with a Promontory of the same name neer adjoyning to it. For other Promontories, which in so long a tract of Sea must needs be many; the principal were, 1 Basium, 2 Mnemium, 3 Dimetris, 4 Aspis, 5 Ara Amoris, 6 Colobon, 7 the Promontory of Saturn, 8 Mosylon, with a noted Empory of the same name, 9 Aromata, neer another well frequented Empory of the same name also; and 10 that of Noticornu. Then for the Towns of greatest Trading, besides those last mentioned, we have, 1 Avalites, 2 Malao, 3 Mundi, 4 Cube, and 5 Acane, in the Bay of Ava∣lites, 6 Opone in the Bay of Barbaria, 7 Essina, on the South of the Aequinoctial. Then for their Cities, we have amongst many others, the names of 1 Epitherias, by Ptolomy called Ptolemais Fera∣rum, 2 Adulis, and 3 Avalites, giving names unto their several Bays, 4 Rapta, the Metropolis of that part of this Country which was called Barbaria, lying along the shores of the Sinus Barbari∣cus; which as it taketh name from the River Raptus, upon which it is situate; so they do both agree in communicating it to the Promontory called Raptum. 5 Meroe, the chief City of the Isle so called. 6 Sabath in the Bay of Adutis, which possibly might be some Colony of the Sabaeans in Arabia Fe∣lix. 7 Coloe, by Plinie called Tolen, not far from the great Luke so named, 8 Cambusis by Ptolo∣mie called Cambysi Aerarium, from some treasures laid up here by Cambyses the Persian, in his inva∣sion of this Country. 9 Auxumi the chief City of the Auxumites, a most potent people of these parts; and the Seat Royal of the old Aethiopian Kings. 10 Napata, as Ptolomy; but by most others called Tanape, of old the residence of the Aethiopian Emperours, sacked and ruined by Petronius, president of Egypt. For when Candace (the Predecessour, I believe, of her whose Eunuch was baptized by Philip) had ransacked and wasted Egypt with fire and sword; Petronius, Lieutenant to Augustus, drave them home, harried the whole Country, put this City to the spoyle; and to pre∣vent the like inrodes, fortified the Frontires of his Province. Philae, upon the borders of Egypt, garrisoned by the Romans till the time of Dioclesian, and by him abandoned. Of some of these, and others not here mentioned, we may have opportunity to speak more hereafter, in the survey of some of these particular Provinces, into which this Country stands divided at this present time.

And for the Provinces comprehended at this time within the bounds and limits of this Aethiopia, as before laid down, they are said to make up 70 Kingdoms, most of them subject to the Abassine Emperor, the principal of which are, 1 Guagere, 2 Tigremaon, 3 Angote, 4 Amgata, 5 Damut, 6 Goijami, 7 Bagamedrum, 8 Barnagassum, 8 Adel, 9 Adea, 10 Dancali, 11 Dobas, 12 Fatigar, 13 Xoa, 14 Barus. Concerning which I must premise, that I finde the Relations of them to be very imperfect, many times disagreeing, sometimes false: So that I must profess my self to be less satis∣fied in the description of this Country then in any of the rest which have gone before. Such as it is, I here present it to the Reader.

1. GVAGERE.

GVAGERE containeth only the Island of Meroe, an Iland of much note and fame amongst the Ancients; made by the confluences of Nilus and Astaborus, the two chief Rivers of this Coun∣try. The length hereof 350 miles, the breadth 125. abundantly plentifull of Gold, Silver, Brass, Iron, Ivory, Precious stones, and an excellent kinde of Mineral Salt. Well stored with most sorts of beasts both tame and wilde; and of the last sort with Lyons, Leopards, Rhinocerots, Elephants, and Dragons.

The People are of the same nature and complexion with the rest; Mahometans by Religion, and the professed Enemies of the Abassine Emperour, against whom they do not only defend themselves by the advantages and benefit of their situation; but confederating with the Turks and Arabians, fall many times with great forces into his Dominions. It is said by Plinie of the Inhabitants of this Iland, that twice a year, viz. When the Sun is in the 16th. degree of Taurus, and the 14th. of Leo, they have the Sun so perpendicular above their heads, that he casts no shadow. More anciently me∣morable for their long lives, then their great exploits, attaining ordinarily to 120 years of Age, and therefore called Macrobii by the old Greek Writers. The women said to be of such great brests in the former times, that they did suckle their children over their shoulders (as some women are now said to do neer the Cape of good Hope) the dug being bigger then the childe. Of which thus Juvenal.

In Meroe crasso, majorem Infante mamillam.

In Meroe the Mothers pap Is bigger then the childe in lap.

The Principal Cities hereof, 1 Meroe, which gave that name unto the Iland, but took the same

from Meroe, a sister of Cambyses King of Persia, or as Eusebius saith, from Merida, the mother of Chenephris, a King of Egypt. Josephus telleth us, that in former times it had been called by the name of Saba; on authority of whose mistake it hath been made the Regal City of that Queen of Sheba (the Queen of Egypt and Aethiopia as Joseph calleth her) who came to Solomon. An opinion so received amongst these Ilanders, that the name of Meroe being laid by, they have restored the name of Saba to this City, as of greater eminence. The City said by some to contain about 5000 houses, great and sumptuous, the streets thereof to be large and spacious with Galleries on each side before the doors of their houses, where men walk safe from all extremities of heat or rain. Beauti∣fied with four chief Gates, (besides others of inferiour note) built of Alabaster and Jasper, wrought with Antique works: the doors belonging to those Gates, of Cedar, curiously wrought; the wayes which lead unto them, for the space of two Leagues beset with Palms, Orange-trees, Cedars, Cy∣presses, and others no less usefull both for shade and fruit. In the place where the four streets going from these Gates, do cross each other, a goodly Arch erected upon stately Pillars, fairly wrought and gilded; with the Statue of S. Matthew, made of brass, but gilded, on the top thereof. Such it is said to be by some. Others think there is no such City; it may not be so beautiful, as those some have made it. The other Towns of note and name in it, in former times, 2 Sacolche, 3 Darorum Vicus, 4 Eser; of which we have little but the names.

This Iland was once a peculiar Kingdom; he being chosen for their King who excelled the rest in strength, person, or in stock of Cattel; but those Kings so subject to their Priests, that by a Messen∣ger or Herald they were sentenced by them unto death, and others advanced unto the throne; And thus it stood till one of the more provident Kings, forcing the Temple with his armed Souldiers, slew all these Priests; and freed himself and his Successours from so great a slavery. Afterwards made a Province of the Kingdom of Aethiopia; honoured for the most part with the Seat of those Kings, and memorable in those times for the Table of the Sun; which was a place neer the City of Meroe, always furnished with variety of rosted meats, set there by night at the charge and command of the King (much taken as it seemeth with this costly vanity) and eaten in the day time by all that would. cal∣led therefore the Table of the Sun, because ascribed unto his bounty by the ignorant People. In the declining of this Kingdom, occasioned by the inundation of the Saracens and other Arabians, this Iland was seized on by that People, and hath been ever since kept by them, together with the rest of the Country lying betwixt it and Egypt, in which are contained as some write, the Kingdom of Da∣mote, Sua, and Jasculum, antiently belonging to this Empire, now dismembred from it: not much observable but for being a thorowfare to great troops of Pilgrims, which every Lent pass by them out of the Abassine Dominions to the Sepulebre, and other like places in and neer Jerusalem.

2. TIGREMAON.

TIGREMAON, hath on the north Guagere, and the River Marabo, by which last parted from Barnagasse; on the South the Realm of Angote; on the West, Nilus. On the East it is said to extend to the Red-Sea, but the Sea parts thereof possessed by the Turks, and the adjoyning Coasts by the Moors and Arabians; the inland parts promiscuously inhabited, especially more towards the Sea, by Christians and Ethnicks. Divided into many inferiour Regions, the principal whereof 1. Sa∣baiu, 2 Torrates, 3 Balgada, so called perhaps from the chief Towns of them, and 4 Tigrai, the most large and ample of all these subordinate Provinces, as containing in it 17 great tracts under so many Lieutenants which rule all affairs both of Peace and War. The People black of colour, deform∣ed of shape, in condition miserable, of conditions wicked. Some Rivers they have, but dried up in Summer; yet so that with a little digging they finde water in them. Their chief City Caxumo, or Cassumo, supposed to be the same which Ptolomie calleth Auxume, Stephanus Axomites, Procopius Auzomide: by all of them esteemed the Metropolitan City of Ethiopia, and the Seat Royal of their Kings. In witness whereof are many ancient buildings yet remaining, some Pillars which resemble the Aegyptian Obelisks, admirable for their height and workmanship: 60 foot high, and full of Cha∣racters or Letters in graven on them, which now none can read. The Aethiopian Auxumites, the most potent Nation of this Countrey, had their name from hence: more probably conceived to be the Regal Seat of Candace, (mentioned in the Acts) then any other of the Kingdom; and still affirmed to be honoured with the Court of their Emperours. Others I know have fixed his Court in Beimalechi, but I know not in what part to finde it: some in a Royal Palace neer that Lake of Zem∣bre, built in the year 1570, by some Europaean Architects sent hither by Francis Duke of Florence: and many will allow him no fixed Seat at all, but tell us that he moveth with his Tents in a Royall Pro∣gress from one place to another, which wandring Court, or moving City, is said to be no less then ten miles in compass, when the Pavilions which belong to it are disposed of into rank and order.

This Kingdom is governed by a Prince of its own, but one who is an Homager and Tributary to the Abassine Emperour, to whom he payeth yeerly 200 horses of the best Arabian breed, infinite quantities of silkes, great store of Cotton-Wool, and abundance of Gold; but the determinate pro∣portion, I have nowhere met with.

3. ANGOTE.

ANGOTE is bounded on the North with Tigremon, on the West with Nilus, on the South with the Kingdom of Amara, on the East with Dancali and Xoa. Indifferently compounded of hils and vallies, both extremely fertile, productive of the choicest fruits, and great herds of Cattel. The people eat but once in 24 houres, and for the most part make that meal in the night; their dyet raw Venison, or smoaked Beef: the mony most in use amongst them, Salt, Pepper, and Iron. Which cu∣stom of using Salt, pepper, and the like instead of mony, was in former times amongst most people the onely bartery or way of exchange. So in Homer, Glancus golden Armour was valued at an hun∣dred Kine, and Diomedes Armour at ten only. Afterward in Justice commutative, it was deemed convenient to have some common Judge, or valuation of the equality or inequality of goods: the invention of which the Jews attribute to Cain, the Grecians to Hermodice the wife of Midas, the Romans to Janus. It is called Nummus, or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because it was ordained by law: Pecunia, either because in elder times the chief of their wealth consisted in cattel, as now among the Irish; or from a Cow (Pecus) which was stamped on it: and Moneta, à monendo, as Suidas faith; because when the Romans stood in need of money, Iuno monebat, Iuno admonished them that they should use justice, and there should be no want of money. To this Goddesse, Dea Pecunia, the Ro∣mans erected a Temple, and worshipped it in the figure of a Woman holding a pair of Scales in one hand, and a Cornucopia in the other: by the Poet called Regina Pecunia, and not unfitly, the great∣ness of her power considered.

But to return again to Angote: I find not much spoken of the Country in the way of story; nor meet I with the names of any of their Towns or Cities; unless that 1 Angote it self, as also 2 Abu∣gana, 3 Giannamora, two of the principal provinces of it, may possibly be so called from their prin∣cipal Towns, as perhaps they are.

4. AMARA.

AMARA hath on the North Angote, on the South Damut, on the West it stretcheth towards the Nile, and on the East bounded with the Realm of Xoa. The Country very plain and cham∣paign, little swelled with hils, sufficiently fruitful, and well stored with all forts of Cattel. The chief City of it called Amara by the name of the Province, situate in the midst of the Empire; and though not much distant from the Aequator, if not plainly under it, yet blessed with such a temperate air, such a fruitful soyl, such ravishing pleasures of all sorts, that some have taken (but mistaken) it for the place of Paradise: So strangely Heaven, Earth, Nature, and Humane industry have joyned their helps together to enrich and beautifie it.

But that which is the greatest Ornament of this Province, and indeed of the whole Empire of AE∣thiopia, is the Mountain Amara, situate in a large and delightful Plain: the bottom of the Hill in cir∣cuit 90 miles, and a dayes journey high; the Rock so smooth and even (but lesser and lesser towards the top) that no wall can be more evenly polished: the way up to it is cut out within the Rock, through which are divers holes forced to let in the light; so easie of ascent, that one may ride up with great pleasure, and in the midst of the Ascent a spacious Hall, as it were to rest in: the top it self is a large plain 20 leagues in circuit, compassed with an high wall, to the end that neither man nor beast fall down upon any chance; beautified towards the South with a rising hill, out of which issu∣eth a sweet Spring, which watering the several palaces and gardens of it, uniteth it self into a Lake for the use of Cattel: the Plain enriched with all sorts both of fruit and grain; adorned with two mag∣nificent Monasteries, in each of which are founded 1500 Knights of the Order of S. Anthony, a Re∣ligious Militia; and honoured with 34 Palaces, in which the younger sons of the Emperour are con∣tinually inclosed, to avoid sedition: they enjoy there whatsoever is fit for delight or Princely edu∣cation; and from hence some one of them, who is most hopeful, or best liked, is again brought out, if the Emperor die sonless, to be made successor. This mountain hath but one ascent up, as before was said, which is impregnably fortified; and was destinate to this use Anno 470, or thereabouts, by the Emperor Abraham Philip, advised hereunto, as he gave out, by an heavenly vision. In one of these Palaces is a famous Library, wherein are said to be many books, which with us are either in part or totally lost; as the Oracles of Enoch, with the mysteries which escaped the flood, being by him en∣graven on pillars; the whole works of Livy, and others. Which being heretofore translated by the Saracens into the Arabick tongue (when having plundered all the most famous Libraries of the East and West, they burnt the Originals, out of a plot to make that language as renowned and as generally studied as the Greek or Latine) are said by some good fortune to be here preserved.

5. DAMVT.

DAMVT hath on the North Amara, on the West Bagamedrum, on the South Goiamy, and on the East the great Lake of Barcena, and some part of Zanguebar, one of the Provinces of Aethiopia Exterior. The Country plentifully furnished with Gold, Ginger, Grapes, Fruits, and Living creatures of all sorts. For none more famed then for their Slaves, sold in great numbers into Arabia, Egypt, Persia, India; and much esteemed by them who buy them, for their abilities in was,

dexterity in business, but specially for their fidelity in all things which they undertake. For this cause placed in Offices of great trust and power by many of the Eastern Princes, who using a tyrannical Form of Government, and not daring to trust the sword into the hands of their Subjects, or to advance them unto places of Court or Counsell, do for the most part arm these Slaves, and trust them also with the conduct of their chief Affairs. A trust, in which they never falsified or failed in a true discharge, but when presuming of their power, and those Advantages which so great a trust and power had presented to them, they got into their hands the King∣dom of Bengala, and kept it many yeers in a succession of the Abassine Slaves, wherewith they still made up their numbers, till outed not long since by the Great Mongal.

The Oxen of this Country are said to be neer as great as Elephants, their horns so large that they serve as Tankards to carry, and as Barrels to keep either wine or water. Here is also said to be a kinde of Unicorn, very fierce and wilde, fashioned like an horse, but no bigger then an Ass; but we must think these Unicorns to be but Rhinocerots, or else we shall very much mistake the truth of the matter. And for the People (to go them both over once again) they are for the most part Gentiles; some Christians intermixt amongst them, who have sundry Monasteries.

To this Kingdom belongeth the Principality of Couche, said to have more Gold in it then all Peru; a Mountain all of Gold, if the Friers say true. The People Gentiles, but the Prince not long since gained to the Christian ••aith, into which he was baptized by the Abbot or chief Governour of the Monasteries on the hill Amara: Gradeus the Emperour being his Godfather, by whom named Andrew. And here they have an hill of great height, and very difficult ascent, from the top whereof they use to cast headlong such of the Nobility, as by the Emperours sentence are con∣demned to die. What Towns they have either in that Kingdom or this Principality, I am not able to resolve, unless, 1 Damut, and 2 Couche may be two, and the two most eminent, as giving name to those estates.

6. GOIAMY.

GOIAMY, hath on the North Damut, on the West Bagamedrum, on the South and East some Provinces of the other Aethiopia. The Country in the North parts full of Desarts and Rockie Mountains, in the residue plentifully furnished with all things necessary. Great store of Gold they finde, but drossie; the people not knowing how to refine and purifie it; or loth here (as in other places of this Empire) to take pains that way; for fear of drawing in the Turks and Arabians to partake of the booty.

It containeth in it many Rivers or rather Torrents, which come tumbling down the hills with a mighty violence, and a terrible fall, making a noise not much inferiour to a clap of thunder: and amongst other Lakes, two of special note, which for their greatness seem to be Seas; in which, as some report, Mermaids, and Tritons or Men-fishes use to shew themselves; and out of which it is thought by others that the Fountains of Nilus do arise; and both true alike. But past all doubt the Abassines themselves are of this opinion; and therefore in the stile of the Negaz (so they call their Emperour) he is termed King of Goiamy, with this addition, In which are found the Foun∣tains of Nilus. Deceived alike in their opinion touching this particular, the Springs or Fountains of that River being further South: though possibly having lost himself in these vast Lakes, and issuing hence into a more contracted Channell, he may be said to have a second birth from hence, though not the first. And these I take to be the Lakes, which were discovered by the Romans in the time of Nero. Who following the design of some other great Potentates, Sesostris, Cambyses, A∣lexander and Philadelphus, in discovering the true Original of this famous River, imployed two Cen∣turions in that service; who aided in it by the then King of the Aethiopians, are said to have come at last unto certain great Marishes (most probably the lower and sedgie parts of these Lakes now mentioned) of whose extent the Inhabitants themselves were ignorant; nor possible to be discover∣ed any further, the weeds having so overgrown the water, that there was no further passage to be made by boat, and less by wading.

Betwixt this Country and Damut, which we last passed thorow, is said to be a Province of Ama∣zons, warlike and fierce, and very expert at the Bow; whose Queen knoweth no man, and by the rest honoured as a Goddess. These, they say, were first instituted by the Queen of Saba: as true, as that which some have added of the Phoenix visible in this Country, of Griffons, and of Fowls so big that they make a shadow like a Cloud. Which strange reports I have here added, to supply the de∣fect of Towns and Cities of which I meet not with so much as the naked names; as undiscovered pla∣ces in our Maps and Charts, are filled up with Monsters.

7. BAGAMEDRVM.

BAGAMEDRVM, or SAGAMEDRVM (for I finde both names) lieth on the West of Goiamy, betwixt the Northern parts thereof, and the River Nilus: and keeping all along the course of that River, as far as Guagere or Meroe, encountreth with the Southern point of Barna∣gasso. Some do extend it also beyond that Iland, but making the whole length thereof but 600 miles,

do confate themselves. The greatest Province of this Empire it may probably be, cateris hujus AE∣thiopiae amplissimum, as they say it is; but if extended the whole length of it, it must be 1500 miles, not 600 only.

The Country plentifull in Mines of the purest Silver, which they cannot draw thence but by fire, which makes it run like long rods or Ropes of Mettall. And yet as large, and wealthy as they say it is, I am more to seek for Towns and rich Cities in it, then in the Desarts of Libya, or the sands of Arabia. Merchants and Travellers for the most part go no further then the Sea coasts of the Country, of which they give us more exact and full informations, knowing but little of the Inlands; and of the Natives such as have travelled abroad into other Kingdoms, rude and ignorant men, know little more of their own Empire, then the place they lived in. Or probably their best Cities not contain∣ing above 2000 houses, few of them so many, and those patched up of thatch, dirt, and hurdles (un∣less some of the Nobility or wealtheir Merchants are provided better) they may have no great reason to speak much of them; or to acquaint us with the names of such sorry places, as are indeed not worth the naming. Which I conceive to be the true condition of most or all the Inland Towns in this large Estate.

8. BARNAGASSO.

BARNAGNES or BARNAGASSƲM, hath on the West Guagere, or the Isle of Meroe; on the Southwest as some say, a point of Bogamedrum; on the South Dangali, and Adel; on the East, the Red Sea, or Bay of Arabia; on the North it stretcheth towards Egypt, the Kingdoms of Jasculum and Sua, possessed by the Mahometans, being interposed.

The Country very sertile, full of Towns and Villages, and exceedingly well stored with pleasant Riverets, besides the neighbourhood of the Red Sea on the one side, Nile and Abanhi on the other. Remarkable for a Mountain in the Western part of it, which being spacious in the beginning grow∣eth strait by little and little, and then enlargeth it self again to a League in circuit. On the top there∣of a Royal Palace, a Church, a Monastery, and two very large Cisterns, with a piece of ground able to entertain and keep 500 men. To be ascended one way only, and that but to a certain mark; to which being come, they are drawn up with Cords and Baskets to the top of all; not to be took by force, by reason of the impossibility of ascent; nor by long siege, or any extremity of Family, in regard it yields provision enough to maintain itself. Accounted therefore the chief Hold of all this Province against Turks and Moors.

It containeth besides Barnagasso it self, the two Provinces of Canfila, and Dafila; though rather subject to the Governour or Vice-Roy of it, then parts and members of the same. Towns of most moment in the whole, I Beroa, or Barua, conceived by some to be the Colony of Ptolomy, the Resi∣dence of the Vice Roy, situate on a pleasant and fish full River. 2 Zameta, honoured sometimes also with the Vice Royes presence; but rather as a retiring place in times of leisure, then a Town of strength. 3 Suachen situate in an Hand of the Red Sea, or Bay of Arabia, one of the richest Cities of the Eastern parts and beautified with a goodly and capacious Haven, secured by nature from all storms, or smooth tides, sure Anchorage, and able to receive 300 great ships of burden. Situate in a little Iland, the whole circumference whereof it taketh up, insomuch that vessels of all sorts, both within the Haven and without, do usually unlade themselves at the doors of the Merchants, to which the Ship beaks serve for bridges. A wealthy and well traded Town both by Sea and Land, to which from the more in land parts of the Abassine Empire the Mountains open a safe passage for the carriage and re carriage of their commodities. Taken by the Turks long since with all the rest of the Coun∣try lying betwixt it and Egypt, and made the seat of a Turkish Beglerbeg or Bassa, whom in imi∣tation of the Romans, they call the Beglerbeg of Abassia; as if by the possession of this small part of that Empire, they would entitle the Grand Signeur unto all the rest. The Town conceived by some to be that which Ptolomy calleth Ostium Sabasticum, or rather Sabaiticum, as called by Strabo. Others will have it to be the Ptolomais Ferarum, or the Epitherias, as Plinie calleth it of the Ancient Writers. And some again will have it to be the Succhae of Plinie, by whom reckoned among the Ci∣ties of the Troglodites (who are called Succhaei in the Scriptures, as before was noted) in whose part of the Country it is seated, and to which name it hath some resemblance. 4 Bisam, not far from Erocco, remarkable for a Monastery situate on the top of an high Rock environed with dreadful Pre∣cipices upon every side; in which live 3000 Monks, eating by three and three together, in a common Refectorie. this being the chief of six others in this Province of Barnagasso, the furthest not above 30 miles distant. For maintainance of whom, and a great number of poor Children which they dai∣ly feed, besides the Tythes of all the Mountain in which it standeth (fruitful and rich, and at least 30 miles in compass) they have many good Farms at the foot of the said Mountain, and an hundred small Villages appertaining to them, out of which they raise yeerly great provision of Corn, and above 2000 head of Catteil; their Revenues out of Tigremaon being reckoned in. A Revenne able to maintain them and their Hospitality in regard their Novices or young Monks are sent abroad to earn their living, or to manure their Lands, and attend the husbandrie of the house: the elder one∣ly being found at the charge of the Monastery, though all alike bound to the performance of Religi∣ous Offices. 5 Erocco another noted Port on the Red Sea or Bay of Arabia, to which a passage open∣eth thorow the Streits of the Mountains, as it doth to Suachen; conceived to be the Adulis of Pto∣lomy,

the Aduliton of Pliny: Now in possession of the Turks, or at their command, 6 Santar, 7 Giabel, 8 Laccari, and 9 Abarach; these four last in the Province of Dafila.

This Country at the present, and for long time past, is subject both to the Great Neguz, or the Frestegian of Aethiopia, and the Grand-Signeur of the Turks; naturally subject to the one, and tri∣butary to the other. Governed by a King of their own, whom they call Barnagassus, by the name of his Province, a Vassal and Homager to the Aethiopian; to whom he payeth the yearly tribute of 150, of the best breed of Horses, besides some quantities of Silk, and some other commodities: but so ill neighboured by the Turks, that he is fain to pay also to the Beglerbeg or Bassa a resident at Suachen, 1000 Ounces of Gold yearly for a composition For the Turks having by the conquest of Egypt made themselves masters of those Countries towards Aethiopia, which formerly were allied to, or confede∣rate with the Mamaluck Sultans; within short time (viz. An. 1558.) possessed themselves also of the town of Suachen and the parts adjoyning; made it the residence of one of their Beglerbegs or Bassa's, and gave him the title of Beglerbeg of Abassia, as before was said: Forgot by the industrious Collector of the Turkish History, in his enumeration of the Beglerbegs or Bassas of Africk. To this they added not long after all the rest of the Sea coasts, and the Port of Erocco; and not content there∣with, after some short breathing made a further inrode; in which they did so waste the Country, that in the end they compelled the Barnagassian (not being aided by the Neguz) to this Composition.

9. DANGALI, & 10. DOBAS.

SOuth and South east of Barnagasso, lie the two Kingdoms of DANGALI and DOBAS; that of Dangali bordering on the Red Sea, the other more within the Land: both of them held by the Mahometans or Arabian Moors; both in continual enmity with the Abassine Emperors; and both of like nature in regard of the soil and people.

DANGALI hath on the North Barnagasso, on the South some part of the Kingdom of Adel; on the East the Red-Sea or Gulf of Arabia, on the West Dobas before mentioned. It taketh upsome part of the Arabick Bay within the Streits of Babel-Mandel; and without those Streits, the great∣est part of that spacious Bay which anciently was called Sinus Avaliticus, as far as to the Promontory then called Mosylon, (neighboured by a noted Emporie of the same) now the Cape of Docono; neer unto which the Sea makes a little Gulf, and suddenly streitneth it self again, so as the Channel cannot be above ten or twelve leagues broad; And in this Channel are five or six Ilands which hinder the passage; so as Sailers must have good experience, to avoid the Rocks which lie neer those Ilands.

Chief Towns hereof, 1 Bebul, or Babel, which gives name to the Streits of Babel Mandel; a nar∣now Frith, opening out of the Bay of Arabia into the Aethiopian Ocean. 2 Vella, a well-frequented Port, conceived to be the same which Strabo calleth Antiphila; not found by that name in Ptolomy. 3 Zagnani, and 4 Zama, in a Province of this Kingdom called Lacca. 5 Docano, neer the Cape so called, and therefore probably the Mosylon of the antient Writers. 6 Dangali, not far from the Sea-side, which gives name to the Kingdom. Nothing else memorable of this Kingdom, but that there are in it two great Lakes, wherein live Crocodiles, as in Nilus.

On the South-west of Dangali lieth the Realm of DOBAS, extended on the West to the bor∣ders of Angote. The Country large, containing twelve, or as some say, 24 several Presectures: Of so good Pasturage, that the Kine hereof are of greater size then in other places, and those for number not easily matched in all this Empire. The people such professed Enemies of the Christian faith, that they suffer not any man to marry, till he hath killed twelve Christians. Some reckon them for Tri∣butaries to the Prete, or Negus; but it is only when they list: so far from being Contributioners towards the support of his estate, that they take from him what they can. The chief of their towns, 1 Doba, which gives name to the whole kingdom. 2 Bally, upon the same River, but more neer the head, on which Dobas standeth.

11. ADEL.

ADEL is bounded on the North with some parts of Dangali and the Red Sea; on the South with Adea; on the East with the Red-Sea, and the Indian or Arabian Ocean; on the West with Fatigar; extended on the Sea coast from the Cape of Docono, to the Cape of Guardasu, conceived most probably to be the Ardmata of Ptolomy, a noted Promontory in his time.

The Country plentiful of Flesh, Hony, Wax, Corn, Gold and Ivory; great flocks of Sheep, and many of those Sheep of such burdensom Fleeces, that their tails weigh 25 pounds; some Kine they have, which have horns like a Stag; others but one horn only, and that in the forehead, about a foot and an half long, but bending backwards. The People inhabiting on the Sea coasts, are of Arabian parentage, and of the Mahometan religion; those towards the Inland Countries, of the old Aethi∣opick race, and wholly Gentiles.

Chief towns hereof, 1 Zeila, a noted Port town, situate in or neer the place where Ptolomy pla∣ceth Avalites; stored with variety of merchandise, and yielding some representation of Antiquity in the building thereof, being lime and stone, materials not much used amongst them in these later times. Of great both beauty and esteem, till the year 1516. when sacked and burnt by the Portugals;

before that time the most noted Emporie of all Aethiopia for the Indian trade. 2 Barbora, seated on the same Sea-coast, well frequented by Merchants, and possibly may be the Mundi or Malao of Ptolomy; neighboured by a lofty Promontory, which they call Mount Fellez. 3 Mette, another of the Sea-towns neer the Cape of Guardafuni, supposed to be the Acane of the Antient writers. 4 Assam, 5 Selir, and 6 Bidar, on the Sea-coasts also. 7 Arar, the principal of the Kingdom, more within the Land and about 38 Leagues from Zeila.

This Country formerly a member of the Aethiopian Empire, is of late grown to so great strength and reputation, that the Kings hereof have freed themselves from all signs of subjection to that Crown, and think themselves the mightier Princes of the two. Advanced to this repute and power by Gradogna, or Guadameth, who reigned here in the year 1540. by whom Clandius the Neguz was so overlaid, and his Country so destroyed by continual incursions, that he was forced to abandon his Frontiers, retire himself into the heart of his Estates, and crave aid of the Portugals. And though by their assistance and the help of their shot, he was twice victorious; yet in the third battel he was vanquished, and in the fourth An 1559 slain upon the place. This King accounted for a Saint by the Moors and Saracens, in regard of his continual wars against the Christians, did so esta∣blish the affairs of his little Kingdom, and left it so well setled unto his successors, that the Abassine Emperor hath ever since left it out of his Titles; though many other of those small Kingdoms are reck∣oned in the Imperial stile, in which he hath as little power as he hath in this. It is said also, that in the battel wherein Claudius was slain, and his Army routed, consisting of 60000 Foot and 500 Horse of his own Subjects, besides the Portugals: the King of Adel got into his possession the greatest masse of Coin and treasure that was ever seen. A victory obtained as well by policie as force; the Abassines being seldom fought with, or their Country wasted and depopulated by the Kings of Adel, till by the strict observance of their Lenten Fast, they were grown so weak, that they were not able to discharge their domestick businesses, and therefore most unable to resist a prevailing Enemy.

12. ADEA.

ADEA or ABEX, as some call it, hath on the North the Kingdom of Adel, on the South and West some parts of the Abassine Empire, on the East the Sea. Extended from the Cape of Guardafu, where it joyneth with Adel, along the greatest part of the Bay, called of old Sinus Bar∣baricus; of the reason of which name hereafter.

The Country plentifully fertile, shaded with Woods and spacious Forrests, and those Woods liberally furnished both with Fruits and Cattel; the Champagn-Country not less fruitful in Wheat, Barley, and other necessaries, besides a great store of Horses. The people of an Olive-colour, in some places more inclined to black: Not clothed but from the girdle downward; nor very well armed in time of war, but with poisoned Arrows; Mahometans in Religion, Arabians by original extra∣ction, whose language they retain with some little difference in pronunciation.

Places of most observation in it, 1. Adea. which gives name to the whole Kingdom, because the old residence of the Kings. 2 Carfur upon the Sea-coast sometimes called Opone, then a noted Em∣porie, and situate neer the Promontory called Zingis extrema. 3. Azun, and 4 Zazelle, supposed to be the Essina and Tonica of the Antient writers. 5 Magadazo, a petit Kingdom of it self: a wealthy and well traded Town, situate in a fruitful and delightful soul, and neighboured by a safe and capa∣cious Haven; much traded by the Portugals, who bring from Ada in Arabia Felix, and Cambaia in India, their Spices, Silks, and other Indian commodities, which here they batter and exchange for Honey, Wax, Gold, and Abassine Slaves, which last they value as the chiefest merchandise which this Country yieldeth. First built by some Arabian Moors, who flying from the King of Laza their mortal enemy, under the conduct of seven brethren, came into these parts, where they founded this City, and that of Brava in the Province of Barus, of which more hereafter.

The Inhabitants are originally of Arabia, as before was said; who many hundred years ago be∣came Lords of all the Sea-coasts of both Aethiopias, as far as to the Cape dos Corrientes, which is somwhat to the South of the Tropick of Capricorn. The Kings hereof in former times, Vassals to the Abassine Emperor, to whom they paid an yearly tribute; this Kingdom still remaining amongst his titles: but since the taking of Magadazo, made so obnoxious to the power and command of the Portugals, that the Estate of the Abassine in it is but meerly titular.

13. FATIGAR, & 14. XOA.

FATIGAR hath on the East Adel, and some part of Adea: on the West the little Realm of Xoa; on the South Barus, another Province of this Empire. The Country Champagne, sufficently fruit ful of Corn and Cattel, not meanly furnished with pleasant and delicious fruits. Most memorable for a Lake of twelve miles compass, on the top of a Mountain, well stored with Fish; from whence and from the rest of the Mountain issue many Rivers, which much enrich the vallies and fields ad∣joyning. The chief Town hereof, (if any one be better then other) I conceive to be Fatigar, giving this name unto the Kingdom, or so called from it.

Westward of Fatigar, lieth the little Realm of XOA bordering West on Amara, Southward up∣on Damut; furnished with great store of Corn and Cattel, but not much beautified with Towns of any consideration. Nothing observable in the History or Description of it, but that together with

Fatigar and others of the mid-land Provinces, it hath continued constant in obedience to the Abassine Emperours; notwithstanding all those misadventures, which have hapned to that Em∣pire in these later dayes.

15. BARVS.

ON the South East of Adea lieth the Province of BARVS, extended Eastward to some part of Sinus Barbaricus; and touching at the Western point upon that of Fatigar. The soyl and People much of the same condition with the rest of Aethiopia. Mahometans upon the Shores, but Christians for the generality in the mid-land parts. Those Christians subject (as the rest) to the A∣bassine Emperour; but he hath neither place of strength, or consideration in all the Country; those of most note, viz. 1 Brava, once a Free Town, and governed after the manner of a Common-wealth by twelve Aldermen or Common Counsellors, descended from the seven Arabian Brethren by whom first built; the founders of Magadora also, as before was said. But now, together with 2 Pate, and 3 Gogia, all upon the Sea, made subject to the Portugals; by whom taken under the Conduct of Tristran de Cugna.

Besides these, there are many other Kingdoms mustered in the Stile Imperial, (the swelling vanity whereof we shall see anon) but of so little observation in the course of business, and so obscure in the esteem of such as have spoken of them, that it is enough to tell you where to finde their names: and having found their names, to bid you not to seek for more, there being nothing else in them which is worth the knowing.

As for the body aggregated of these several Members, it was first planted, as is noted and proved elswhere, by Ludim the son of Mizraim and the Nephew of Cham: from whence this Nation in the Scripture have the name of Ludim. A nation not much taken notice of in the first Ages of time, but by an Errour of Josephus: who giving too much credit to some Talmudical Tales, or willing to ad∣vance the reputation of the Jews to the highest pitch, telleth us a story how the Aethiopians invaded and endangered Egypt, how they were beaten back by Moses; the City of Meroe besieged and taken by him, or rather delivered to his hands by Tharbis the daughter of the King who had fallen in love with him, and on the betraying of the City was married to him. All this not only questio∣ned but rejected by discerning men as a Jewish Fable that hath no ground to stand upon in true An∣tiquity. With little better fortune, and as little truth do the Aethiopians tell the story of their own Original. By whom we are informed that Chus the son of Cham first reigned in this Aethiopia, to whom succeeded his son Regma, and next after Dedan: that from the death of Dedan till the reign of Aruch (the certain time whereof they tell not) the People lived in Caves and holes digged un∣der the ground, as did the Troglodites an ancient Nation of this Country in the times long after: that Arac first built the City of Aruma, and by that pattern taught them the use of Towns and Ci∣ties. But the main part of the Legend is the story of Maqueda a Queen hereof, and the fourth from Aruch, whom they will have to be the Queen of Sheba, famous in both Testaments, for the Royal Visit which she bestowed upon Solomon. Of whom they tell us, that being got with childe by Solo∣mon when she was in his Court, she was delivered of a Son, whom she caused to be called Melech, or Melilech, and at the age of 20 years to be sent to his Father. By whom instructed in the Law, and circumcised, and called by the name of David, he was returned into his Country, with Azarias the son of Zadok the Priest, who had stollen the two Tables of the Law and carried them with him into Aethiopia; where the old Queen resigned the Empire to her son. His Successors afterwards called David, till Indion (as they call him) the Eunuch of Queen Candace returning home baptized the young Prince by the name of Philip. This is the substance of the Legend, as related by them in their own Chronicles (but we know that they are no Gospel.) That Chus planted in Arabia, hath been shewn already, as also what absurdities must needs arise from supposing the Land of Chus to be this Aethiopia. Therefore most probable it is that this Countrey was first peopled by the children of Ludim, as before was said. To whom the Abassenes coming out of Arabia Felix, might be after added: and in some tract of time be of such great power, as to put their name upon the Countrey. For that the Abassenes were originally an Arabian People, appeareth by Stephanus one of the old Chorographers, who out of Vranius (An ancienter Author then himself) hath told us this, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Another Stephanus, and he a very learned Grammarian and Lexicographer, hath as he thinks decided the controversie, by making Sheba the son of Chus the Progenitor of the Arabians; and Sheba the son of Regma the Father of the Aethiopians; and for this cause hath fit∣ted us with this pretty Criticism, that Sheba when it is written with 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Samech must be rendred AE∣thiopia; and Arabia when writ with 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Shin. But this by no means will be found to agree the con∣troversie: it being evidently clear that both Sheba the son of Chus, and Sheba the son of Regma were originally setled in Arabia, as there hath been shewn; though I deny not but that some of the Posterity of Chus in those elder time, (before the coming over of the Abasine nations) might either out of too much populosity or desire of change, cross over the Arabian Gulf and take up such parts of this Countrey as the Ludims had not fully peopled, with whom conjunct at last, both in name and go∣vernment. And as for Maynedu (supposing that to be her name) she was doubtless Queen of the Sabaeans in Arabia Felix; not of the Aethiopians, in the waste of Africk. For besides the longsom∣ness of the way, too much for a Woman and a Queen to travel, it is very probable that the Son of Solomon by this Lady would never have suffered Egypt to have layen in quiet, whilest Sesac the King

thereof made war upon Rehoboam, the Son of Solomon also, and so by consequence his half Brother: But to leave these uncertain Fables, the first action of moment which we meet with in unquestioned Story, touching these Aethiopians, is that which hapned betwixt them and Cambyses the Persian Monarch; who having by force of Arms united Egypt to Persia, conceived it to be worth his labour to unite Ethiopia unto Aegypt also: Upon this Resolution he sent Ambassadors to that King, to search into the passages of his Country, and discover his strengths; and by them sent a Tun of wine, some Bracelets, a Purple habit, and a Box of sweet ointments to present him with. Which Presents be∣ing tendred to him, he looked upon the Unguents and the Purple Robe as too slight and effeminate: the Bracelets he conceived to be bonds or fetters, and openly laught at them, as too weak to hold in a Prisoner: but with the Wine he was very well pleased, and sorrowed that his Country yielded no such liquour. But understanding well enough what this visit aimed at, he gave the Ambassadors at their parting (amongst other gifts) an Aethiopian Bow of great length and strength, requiring them to tell their Master, that untill every Persian could bend that Bow (the Aethiopian Bows being a foot longer then the Persian, as before was noted) it would be no safe warring upon his Domini∣ons; and that he had good cause to thank the Gods for giving the Aethiopians so contented mindes, as not to think of conquering their Neighbours kingdoms. Lying far off, and parted from Egypt by vast mountains, we finde then not looked after by the Macedonians. Nor had the Romans medled with them, had they not been provoked by Candace, the Queen hereof, during the Empire of Au∣gustus: who having made a War on Egypt, was by Petronius, Governour of that Province, brought to such conformity, that she was fain to sue for peace, and to purchase it with the loss of some part of her Country. To keep them quiet for the future, Philae an Aethiopian City, but on the borders of Egypt, is made a Garrison by the Romans, and the seat of their Deputy for these parts: held by them till the Empire of Dicclesian, and by him abandoned, because the charge of keeping it did ex∣ceed the profit. After this, growing into power and reputation, the Aethopian Kings were recko∣ned of as friends to the Roman Empire; in so much as Justinian sent unto Helistheus, as Justin his Successour did unto Archetas, the then Kings of this Country, to crave their brotherly assistance against the Persians.

Of their Conversion to the Faith in the reign of a second Candace (unless as Plinie thinketh, Can∣dace was the general name of all their Queens) we have spoke already. To which the Aethiopians adde, that after the baptizing of their first Philip (the son of that Candace) by the hands of the Eunuch, the Emperours succeeding had the name of Philip. Till the religious life of John, a Co∣temporary of the Emperour Constans, honoured as a Saint after his decease, made them take his name. Some building upon this Tradition, have to the name of John prefixed that of Presbyter, be∣cause (as they affirm) he executeth as well the Sacerdotall as the Regall Office; Rex idem hominum Divumque Sacerdos; the very Anius of the Poet: And this so commonly received, that he is vul∣garly called by the name of Prester John, and his estate the Empire of Prester John; with no truth at all. Others more probably conceive, that this vulgar name of Prester-John, is but a corruption or mistake for Praetegian or Precious John; and that the word Prete (by which his Subjects call him) importeth no less. And yet I more incline to those, who finding that the word Prestegan signifieth an Apostle, in the Persian tongue, and Prestigani, an Apostlical man: do thereupon infer•• that the title of Padescha Prestigiani, an Apostolick King, was given unto him for the Orthodoxie of his belief, which not being understood by some, instead of Preste-gian, they have made Priest John, in Latine Presbyter Johannes; as by a like mistake, one Pregent (or Pragian as the French pronounce it) commander of some Gallies under Lewis the 12. was by the English of those times called Prior John. Prestegian then, not Priest-John, is his proper adjunct; contractedly, but commonly called the Prete by the Modern French who usually leave out s before a consonant. Their Empire greater heretofore, then it is at the present, shrewdly impaired of late times by the Turks and Arabians: of which the first have taken from him all his Countries from the Isle of Meroe unto Egypt; with all the Sea-coasts of Barnagasso; the later as much encroaching on them on the rest of the Maritine parts of his Dominions. But from none have they suffred more then the Kings of Adel, who have divers times laid waste their Country, discomfited some of them in the open Field, and in the year 1558. slain their King in bat∣tell. Not cured of those wounds to this very day. For Adam, who succeeded Claudius that was slain in battell, was so far from being able to revenge the death of his Predecessour, that being sus∣pected to incline to Mahometanism, he was defeated by the under king of Barnagasso. Since which time they have so languished by intestine dissentions, that though Alexander the third (if there were ever such a King, which I finde much doubted) is said to have setled his affa••rs by the aide of the Portugals; and that some strange successes have been since reported of a later Emperour; yet the truth is, that the estate hereof hath been so imbroiled in civil Wars, and so many of their Empe∣rours successively murdered, that the power and reputation of it is exceedingly weakened, and the Countrey made a prey to impuissant Enemies. For in the year, Anno 1603. the Emperour Melech Gogad, succeeding in the throne by the deposition and imprisonment of his Predecessour (under colour of Bastardie) was not long after slain by one Zezelezeus, and James or Jacob advanced unto the Empire: James not long after vanquished and slain by one Sazinosius; and he so terribly dis∣quieted with Treasons and Conspiracies, that in the year 1607 he was fain to sue for aide to the King of Spain, and tender a submission of the Abossine Churches to the Pope of Rome. But the spirit of Rebellion being conjured up, could not so easily be laid down (though there followed a

long calm between) but that it brake out again within few yeers past (that is to say, about the year 1648) more violently then it did before: a powerfull Rebell starting up, who dispossessed the Prete of almost all his Kingdoms, and reduced the issue of the war unto one Town only, in which he had besieged his person. And in all probability he had got that too, and with that the Empire had not a French man then living in the Country, found means to put himself into it; who training the people of the place to the use of Arms (according to the way of Europe) made a fally out upon the Enemy, routed him, and so raised the siege, and by that means preserved the Emperour and the Empire from most certain ruine.

Yet notwithstanding these disasters, these later Emperors have still preserved their majesty amongst their Subjects, whom they hold in servitude enough, though they keep not such a distance as in former Ages, when the Prete was honoured as a God, and used to shew himself but thrice in a year, viz. on Christmas, Easter, and Holirood day: by which retiredness it was thought that he made his presence more acceptable; some holding nothing to be more derogatory from the Majesty of a King, then to make himself too common an object for the eye of the vulgar. The like kind of state was once kept by those Kings of France of the first Merovignian line; who withdrawing themselves from all pub∣like affairs; used only to shew themselves (as we have already said) on May-day. A greater retired∣ness then this, was that which Valleda Queen of the Tencteri (a people of the Rhene) is reported by Tacitus to have used; for when the rest of the Germans then in arms, sent Ambassadors to her to in∣form her of their victory against the Romans, they were prohibited either to speak to her or to see her; Arcebantur aspectu, quo venerationis plus inesset. Such a keeping of state, the politick Prince Tiberius used, when the German legions mutined; for he daigned not himself to see them pacified, but sent his son; the reason was, quia majestati major è longinquo reverentia And no doubt the same keep∣ing of distance swayed much with him, when he forsook Rome, and kept Court privately at Caprea: though I deny not, but a propension to follow his unnatural pleasures the more securely, together with his deformities on his face, had also their powers upon his resolutior.

The title of this great and mighty Emperour, (but neither so great or mighty in power as in title) runneth thus: N. N. Supreme of his Kingdoms, and the Beloved of GOD, the Pillar of Faith, sprung from the stock of Judah, the son of David, the son of Solomon, the son of the Column of Sion, the son of the seed of Jacob, the son of the hand of Mary, the son of Nahu after the flesh, the son of S. Peter and Paul after the spirit; Emperour of the higher and lesser Aethiopia, and of the most mighty Kingdoms, Domi∣nions, and Countries of Xoa, Goa, Caffares, Fatigar, Angotae, Balignazo, Adea, Vangne, Goyami, where are the fountains of Nile, Amara, Banguamedron, Ambea, Vangucum, Tigremaon, Sabaim, the birth∣place of the Queen of Saba, Bernagassum; and Lord of all the Regions unto the confines of Egypt.

It seemeth by this title, that these Aethiopian Emperours, however the truth of story goeth, con∣ceive themselves to be sprung from Salomon, & Maqueda (or Nizaule as Ioseph nameth her) the Queen of the South. For better confirmation whereof, it is by some reported, that the Arms of this Kingdom are the same with those of the Tribe of Iudae, which are a Lyon rampant in a field Or: and that the Motto of them is to this effect, viz. The Lyon of the Tribe of Judah shall overcome. But Bara, an expert Herauld, giveth this Prince no such Coat-armour; his Arms, according to him, being Luna, a cross portate Mars, charged with a crucifix Sol, between two scourges of the second. And yet not altogether to discredit the old Tradition, so generally received amongst them, it may be probable enough, that when the Abassens came into Aethiopia, some of the Sabaeans their next neigh∣bours came along for company, and amongst them some of the Royal race of the Queen of Sheba; with some of which, by reason of their great Nobility, some of the Abassine Emperours might think fit to match. Nor is it any matter of impossibility, but that Solomon (considering his course of life) might get a son upon the body of that Queen, from whom the Aethiopian Princes might be thus descended.

As for the Government of these Emperors, it is absolutely Regal, or to say better, perfectly Despo∣tical: the people being treated by them more like slaves then subjects; taking away Sign••uries, and giving them unto whom he pleaseth, the deprived party not daring to express the least discontent. By them so reverenced, that it was antiently a custom, if the King were blind, or lame, or maimed, for the Subject to inflict on his own body the like impression: still had in so much honour by the greatest Subject, that at his bare name they bow their bodies, and touch the ground with one of their fingers; and reverence his Pavilion as they pass by, though he be not in it. He on the other side seldom ap∣peareth to his Subjects but with his Crown upon his head, and a Silver Crucifix in his hand; his face then covered with a peece of Watchet-Taffata, which he lifteth up and putteth down, according as he is minded to grace the party with whom he talketh.

As for his Forces and Revenues, some of our late Observations speak nothing but wonders. Some say his Empire reacheth from the Red Sea to the Atlantick Occan, and from one Tropick to the other: Some, that he is of so great Riches, that he is able to purchase a moyetie of all the world, if it were to be sol; others, that he is able to raise for any present service a million of men; And he himself is said to have offered to the Portugals one million of money, and another of men, if they would im∣ploy it in a war against the Infidels. But notwithstanding these great brags, I cannot think this Em∣perour to be such a Miracle as some of these Reports have made of him: For they that speak most knowingly of his Revenues, affirm that the ordinary expences of his Court and Army being discharged, he coffereth up but three millions of Crowns per annum, which is no great matter; and upon extra∣ordinary emergencies of war and trouble, will be easily wasted, or brought into a narrower compass.

And yet to make up this Revenue, besides the Crown Lands or Demain Imperial. he laieth some Tax or other upon every house, receiveth the tenth of all that is digged out of their Mines, and levieth on the great Lords the Revenue of any one of their Towns, which he pleaseth to choose, so it be not that in which the Lords themselves inhabit.

This, though it be no great Intrado, considering the large extent of his Dominions, and form of his Government, yet it is greater in proportion then his Forces are. For notwithstanding the report of Alvarez, and his own great brag of raising a million of men for present service; it is well known that he was never able to advance half that number in his greatest necessity; and amongst those whom he can raise, there are but few who can deserve the name of Souldiers: for the people being poor and beggerly, and brought up in a servile and base condition, are naturally destitute of that courage and alacrity of spirit which should be in men professing Arms, or fit for noble undertakings; and are besides, on certain jealousies of State, so di••used from war, that they know not how to use their weapons when there is occasion. So that for my part I consider him as a weak and impuissant Prince, of no authority or influence out of his Dominions; nor able to defend himself from the continual incursions of his neighbours (some of them mean and petit Princes) which lie neerest to him. Land-locked on every side from traffick and commerce with the Seas, incroached upon Northward by the Turks; confronted on the West by the King of Borneo, who possesseth not a tenth part of the Land of Negroes; on the East continually bearded and baffled by the King of Adel, sometimes a Vassal of his own; and on the South with the Gallae a barbarous Nation of the other Aethiopia, who lay all waste before them wheresoever they come; and finally in these later times by his own Subjects also. Injuries not to be indured, had he power to help it.

But the chief Stay of this Estate, is an Order of Knighthood entituled by the name of S. Antony, to which every Father that is of the Degree of a Gentleman is to destinate one of his sons, if he have above two, but not the eldest. And out of these they cull about 12000 Horse, which are to be the standing Guard of the Emperours person: their Oath is, To defend the Frontiers of the Empire, to preserve Religion, and to make head against the Enemies of the Faith. The Abbats of this Order (for it is partly Religious, partly Military) live in the Mountain of Amara; where they have two Mona∣steries, as well for the training up of these Knights in the time of their youth, as their retirement when grown old and discharged from service.

And so much for Aethiopia Superior.

Of AETHIOPIA INFERIOR.

AETHIOPIA INFERIOR is bounded on the East with the Red-Sea (that name extend∣ing from the bottom of the Gulf of Arabia to the Southern Ocean) on the West with the Aethiopick Ocean; on the North with Terra Nigritarum, and the higher Aethiopia; and on the South, where it endeth in a point or Conus, with the Main Ocean parting it from the Southern undiscovered Continent.

It was called Aethiopia for the reason before delivered. Inferior was added for distinctions sake, because somwhat of a lower situation then the other is. By Ptolomy called Aethiopia Interior, because lying more within the Land, and remote from knowledge then the neerer did: and by late Writers for the contrary reason called Aethiopia Exterior, because situate without and beyond the other.

It comprehendeth all Ptolomies Aethiopia Interior, part of his Aethiopia Sub Aegypto, and all those Lands to him unknown. which he giveth us under the name of Terra Incognita. The Countrey so little discovered in those elder times, that we finde mention onely of some eminent Mountains, as 1. Canchis. 2. Lon. 3. Zipha. 4. Barditis. 5. Moschi, one onely Region known by name, called Agisimba, and of that nothing but the name, and that it was a Province of a large extent. The peo∣ple not distinguished here, as in other places, by their Tribes and Families; but only by their kinde of diet; some of them being called Anthropophagi, from their eating of men, and others Ichthyo∣phagi from their living on fish. Of these the first inhabiteth on the Eastern shores, near the Bay of Bar∣baria; the principal of whom had the name of Rapsii: the last on the shores of the Western Ocean, near Magnus Sinus, or the Great Bay; called also from their Western situation, by the name of Hesperii. Nothing else told us of these parts by the Ancient Writers, but that the Lakes or Fens of Nilus were occasioned by the great abundance of snow which fell from the Mountains of the Moon: and that in many parts hereof, there were Rhinocerots, Tygers, Elephants, but these last all white.

Such was the face of this Countrey in those elder days. The Character of it at the present, generally and in brief is thus given by Aubanus, viz. That it is mountainous in the West, sandy in the midst, and desart towards the East. But for the several qualities of the soyl and people, being of very different tempers; we shall give the better description of them in their several inclosures, then as presented thus in common. In the mean time to take a view of the Hills and Rivers of most reckoning in it; the principall of their Mountains are I those called Cantaberes. in the Province of Angola; 2 Lunae Montes, formerly accounted for the boundary of both Aethiopias, now found to belong unto this alone. A chain of Hills, but known by no particular name, lying under the Tropick of Capricorn, full of sharp Rocks, of an incredible height, and inhabited by a barbarous and savage People; the valleys underneath of so great a depth, that they seem to emulate the Mountains.

In this Country is the Lake of Zembre, so much renowned for giving birth to the greatest Rivers of the world; though it self but 50 miles in compass. For out of the abundance hereof flow the famous Rivers, 1 Nilus, which passing thorow some part of this Country, and traversing the whole length of the Abassian and Egyytian Empires, endeth its long course in the Mediterranean. 2. Zaire the greatest of all Africk, but unknown to the Antients, which running Eastward tho∣••ow the Kingdoms of Manicongo, and taking in the lesser streams of 1 Vamba, 2 Barbela, 3 Coanza, 4 Lelunda, makes many Islands in his way, and at the last by a mouth of 28 miles wideness disgorge∣eth his full stomack in the Western Ocean. 3 Cuama, which making his passage towards the East and much increased by the addition of six great Rivers, after a long course of 700 miles (in all which it is navigable) loseth it self in the Indian or Aethiopick Ocean: and 4 Fluvius Spiritus Sancti, or the River of the Holy Ghost, which shaping a course opposite unto that of Nilus, endeth it in con∣clusion in the Southern Seas. It is divided most properly into these four parts, that is to say, 1 Zan∣quebar. 2 Monomotapa, 3 Cafraria, 4 Manicongo. Some also add the Country of Aian, subdivided into the two Kingdoms of Adel and Adea. But these we have ascribed with better reason to the other Aethiopia, within the bounds whereof they are wholly situate.

1. ZANGVEBAR.

ZANGVEBAR, or ZANZIBAR is bounded on the East with the Red-Sea, or the Indian Ocean; on the West with the Kingdoms of Manicongo, and part of the other Aethiopia: on the North with the higher Aethiopia only; on the South with Monomotapa. The reason of the name I finde not.

It containeth in it the great Province of Agisimba, placed by the old Writers in Aethiopia Inte∣rior & so much of the other as lieth on the South of the River Raptus, now called Quilimanci, by which parted from the Kingdoms of Adel and Adea. The Country on both sides of that River known in old times by the name of Barbarians, giveth to a large adjoyning Bay the name of Sinus Barbaricus; and was much famed in those elder times for the best sort of Myrrhe: the Myrrha Trogloditica, & Myrrha Barbara, or Barbarica, being used for the same, by some of the Antients, because the Troglodites and the people of this Barbaria, joyned on one another. Here was also in those elder times a good race of Ginger; of which faith Dioscorides, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that it is the Bark of a Tree brought out of Barbara. Where by the way the Scholiasts upon that Author, and Plinie in the 12 Book have been much mistaken; whereof the first takes this Barbara or Barbaria for some part of the Indies; the other thinketh that the Myrrhe of these parts had the name of Barbara, from the dr••ssiness and coursness of it, as if so called only because unrefined. The principal Town hereof called Rapta, by the name of the River; seated not far from the Sea, and by reason of the great Trade of it, esteemed the Metropolis of Barbaria in the time of Ptolomy. A noted Promontory of the same name was not fat from hence.

To come again to Zanzibar, as it is now called; The Country is affirmed to be low and fenny, and very much overflown with unruly Rivers; and withall so full of Woods and Forrests, that for want of passage for the wind, the Air is generally (as in all Fenny Countries of the like obstruction) exceeding pestilent. The people of complexion black, and of curled hair: Mahometans on the Sea∣coasts; in the Inland parts Idolaters, extremely given to Witchcraft and Divinations. Naked above the waste, and beneath covered only with the skins of Beasts, or some such mingled-colour stuffe as the Scottish Plad. The Moors which dwell on the Sea-coasts, use to adventure on the Seas in little Vessels, sowed together with leathern thongs, and calked with gumme; having no other fails in them then the Leaves of Palm-trees. Boats of as slight a making, as those used antiently by the Britans, whereof thus the Poet:

Primùm cana silix, madefact•• vimine parvam Texitur in puppim; caesoque induta juvence Vectoris patiens, tumidum superenatat Amnem.

Which I find thus rendred to my hand:

The moystned Osier of the hoary Willow Is woven first into a little Boat; Then cloth'd in Bullocks hides, upon the Billow Of a proud River lightly doth it float.

It containeth in it to the number of 15 Provinces, that is to say, 1 Melinde, 2 Mombaza, 3 Quiloa, 4 Mosambique, 5 Sofasa, all along the Coasts; 6 Moenhemage, 7 Corova, 8 Calen, 9 Anzuga, 10 Monzalo, 11 Badin, 12 Mombra, 13 Mombizo, 14 Embroe, and 15 Macaos, more within the Land. Of the nine last, not being perfectly discovered, and therefore likely to yield no∣thing of note and credit, we shall now be silent. But the first six lying upon the Shores or neer it, and consequently better known to Merchants, Travellers, and the like Adventurers, shall be surveyed in order as they lie before us.

1.MELINDE is the name of a little Kingdom on the South of the Realm of Adea, in the Higher Aethiopia, from which parted by the River Raptus, now called Quilimanci: so named from Melinde, the chief City of it; well walled and seated in a fruitful and delightful soyl; abun∣dantly productive of Rice, Mill, Flesh, Limons, Citrons, and most sorts of fruits; but not well fur∣nished with Corn, the greatest part whereof is brought out of Cambaia a Province of India. The houses built of lime and stone, after the manner of Europe. The Inhabitants on the Sea coasts of A∣rabian breed, and of that Religion; those of the Inlands, which are of the original Natives, for the most part Heathens. Most of them of an Olive colour, but inclining to white; the Women generally of as white complexions as in other places; but they have some black people also: And all of them more civil in their Habit, course of life, and entertainment in their houses, then the rest of this Coun∣try. Great friends unto the Portugals, and befriended by them, ever since the kind entertainment which they gave unto Vasques de Gama, whom they furnished with Pilots to direct him in his way to India, when first discovered by that People.

2. MOMBAZA is the name of another of these petit Kingdoms, of the same nature for the temper of the soil and people that Melinde is. So called from Mombaza the chief City of it, situate from Melinde about 70 miles, in a little Iland of 12 miles compass; but of good influence on some part of the Continent also. The Isle and City said to have some resemblance unto the Rhodes. The Town about a league in circuit, environed with a wall, and fortified with a Castle; the Streets there∣of very narrow, but well built, most of the houses being brick, and the Mosques capacious. The King hereof a Mahometan, as are most of his Subjects, and a bitter enemy of the Christians. For which cause, and upon some discourtesies received from them, the Town was taken by Vasques de Gama, An. 1500. but abandoned again by reason of the unhealthy Air, not well agreeing with the constitu∣tion of the Portugals. Afterwards having taken in Alibeg and five Turkish Gallies, the better to en∣able themselves against the Portugals; the Town was taken and ruinated by Thomas de Cotigno, sent thither An. 1589. by the Portugal Vice-Roy residing in Goa; there being taken at that time (besides the spoil of the City) all the Turkish Gallies, and in them 23 greater, and as many lesser Peeces of Ordinance: such of the Turks and Citizens as escaped the slaughter, and had the opportunity of coming to them, yielded themselves into their power, to avoid the fury of the Imbians, a man-eating people, who had before besieged the City; and gathering up such gleanings as were left by the Portu∣gals, devoured the King, and as many of the principal Citizens as they could get into their hands. 2 Ampaza, the second Town of note, was taken by the Portugals about two years after.

3. QVILOA lieth on the South of Mombaza. The Country rich and pleasant, the Inhabitants for the most part of Arabian Ancestry; of complexion neer unto a white, their women comely, sumptuou in attire, and of civil carriage; neat in their houses, which are generally well built and richly furnished. Touching the ordering of this Sex (of whose honour they are very tender) the people of this Quiloa are said to have a strange custom amongst them, more to be mentioned for the rarity then the decency of it; which is the sowing up of the private passages of nature in their female children, leaving only a small vent for their urine: Thus sowed, they keep them carefully at

home, till they come to be married: And she that is by her Husband found to want this sign of her perpetual Virginity, is with all kinde of ignominie sent back to her Parents, and by them as disgrace∣fully received.

It took this name from Quiloa the chief Town thereof, situate in a little Iland, but neer the shore, from which parted by a narrow Fryth, opposite to the mouth of the River Coava, by some called Quiloa. First built in the 400 year of the Hegira, by Ali, the son of Suttan Hischen, who not agree∣ing very well with his other Brethren, because their Mothers were Persians, and his an Abssine, sought new Adventures in these parts, and bought this Iland. His Successors grown rich and power∣ful by the trade of Sofala, extended their Dominions far within the Land: and so adorned Quiloa, the chief Town of their Kingdom, that for sumptuous and magnificent buildings, there were few like it in those parts. Proud of their many good successes they provoked the Portugals, by whom un∣der the conduct of Vasques de Gama, An. 1500. the City it self was taken, the King made a Tribu∣tary, and with his leave some Fortresses erected by them in convenient places. Secure and wanton by this means, they pick a quarrel with Abraham then the King of this Country, whom in the year 1505. they deposed from his Kingdom, and placed another in his Throne, under colour of not paying the conditioned Tribute. For which the Arabians rose in Arms, displaced their new King, demolish∣ed their Fortifications, and sent them to learn better moderation in their prosperous Fortunes, An. 1509. The business coming after to a composition, the Quiloan convenanted for the yeerly Tribute of 1500 Marks of Gold paid unto the Portugals, to live in peace, and quietly enjoy his own without further trouble.

4. MOSAMBIQVE lieth on the South of Quiloa, so called of Mosambique the chief City of it, situate in a little Iland, the principal of three, opposite all of them to the mouth of the River Moghincats, and bordering on the Promontory of old called Prassum, spoken of by Pto∣lomy, and by him made the furthest known place of all this Coast. In the Iland there are said to be sheep whose tails are 25. pound weight, as in other places of these Countries, and some parts of Syria; Hens, black in feathers, flesh, and bone; and if sodden make the water as black as ink, but yet sweeter in taste then any other. Of Pork good store, the more because the people are for the most part of the Law of Mahomet, by which all hog-meat is forbidden. The in land parts more barren, but very populous: so ignorant and rude when the Portugals first came among them, that for a Shirt, a Razor, and a little Bell, they sold fifteen Kine, and then fell out among themselves who should have the Bell. The Town conveniently seated on a large and ••pacious Haven, and fortified with a very strong Castle, in the hands of the Portugals: who in their going to the Indies, and re∣turning back, use to call in here and fit themselves with all things necessary to pursue their voyage. A Town of so great wealth and trading, that the Captain of the Castle in the time of his Government (which continueth only for three years) is said to lay up 300000 Ducats for his Lawfull gains of the Gold that cometh from Sofala. A gain so great, that at the end of his three years, he is to serve for three years more at some place or other of the East Indies, at his own charge, without any allowance from the King or State of Portugal; and then permitted to return to his native Country. Such of that Nation as are suffred to inhabit here, are enjoyed to be married, to the end the Iland should be well∣peopled, and as well maintained; which otherwise perhaps might have few else in it, but the Garri∣son Souldiers, and the Factors of particular Merchants.

5. SOFALA lieth on the South of Mosambique, from which parted by the River Cuama, the greatest River of those parts; and thence extended to the mountains which they call Manica, by which separated from Monomotapa. So called from Sofala, the chief City of it, situate in a little I∣land (as the former are) but with great influence on the Land adjoyning. Both Town and Iland subject unto the power of the Portugals who have a Fort, the better to secure the Factory by them here erected; one of the richest in the world; the People bringing hither great quantity of Gold (of which they have most plentifull Mines) which they exchange with them for their cloth, and other commodities. It is supposed that the Gold brought into this Town amounteth to two Millions yeer∣ly. The supposition so agreeable to all other circumstances, that little question need be made of the truth thereof. Insomuch as this Country for its abundance of Gold and Ivory, is by some thought to be that land of Ophir, to which Solomon sent; and of this opinion Ortelius in his Thesaurus was the first Author; but in my minde, upon no probable conjectures, and against very strong presumpti∣on. For first Ophir the son of Joctan of whom mention is made in the 10. of Gen. vers. 29. and from whom the land of Ophir, in all likelyhood took its name; is in the next verse said to have planted in the East: whereas this Sofala is situate South-west from Chaldea; in which the confusion of Tongues, and dispersing of the People, began. And secondly, it is impossible for the Navie of Solomon which lay at Ezion Geber, in the Bay of Arabia, to have spent three years in coming hither, and re∣turning: which we finde to have been the usual times of finishing the voyage to Ophir, 1 Kings ch. 10. Ophir then is some part of India; but whether it were the Iland of Sumatra, or that of Zeilan, or one of the Molucco's, or the land of Malaza, called by the Ancient Aurea Chersonesus, I dare not determine; confidering what worthy men maintain these several opinions.

6. MOENHEMAGE, or MONOEMVG, the only inland Province of any note, hath on the East Mombaza, and Quiloa; on the West the famous River Nilus; on the North some part of the Dominions of the Abassine Emperours; on the South Mosambique. The Conntry very plenti∣full of Mines of Gold, yet the People use it not for money but barter it in exchange with the Por∣tugal Merchants for Silks & Taffatas, with which they use to cloath themselves from the Girdle down∣wards.

In stead of money, they make use of Red Counters, much resembling Glass. Governed by a King of their own, who holds confederacie with the Kings of Mombaza and Quiloa, for the better ordering of their Trade. To whom are also subject a wild and cruel people called Agag▪ inhabiting on Lake Zembre and the banks of the Nilus; dispersed about the fields in their homely cottages, black. Cannibals, and of an horrible aspect; more horrible then otherwise they would be, by drawing lines upon their cheeks with an iron-instrument, and forcing their eye lids to turn backwards. By the assistance of this people the King of Moenhemage hath hitherto preserved his Estate against the King of Monomotapa: and they themselves by some of their own Leaders did so distress the King of Congo, that they forced him to retire to a small Iland, where he hardly scaped a violent and untimely death, most of his people being starved. Of which more hereafter.

Touching the rest of these Provinces, we can say but little, and that little of no great note or cer∣tainty; but that they differ for the most part from one another both in speech and behaviour; each Village under a several King, and each in continual quarrel with its next neighbours, whom if they overcome, they eat. At leasure times they live by hunting, and the flesh of Elephants. And amongst these, but more upon the Borders of the Abassine Empire, I place the Gallae, a Nationless nation, as it were, without house or dwelling, without Law or Government; as barbarous and horrid as the Agags (whom some call Jagge or Giacqui) are affirmed to be; who watching their advantages, and joyned together in some Arts of doing mischief, have made of late such desolations in the Countries of the Prestor-John.

2. MONOMOTAPA.

MONOMOTAPA, BENOMOTANA, or BENOMOTAXA (for by all these names it is called) is bounded on the North with the River Cuama, by which and the Mountain of Magnice, it is parted from Zanzibar; on the West and South by the River of the Holy-Ghost, by which separated from Cafraria; and on the East by the main Ocean. So that it is almost an Iland; said to contain in compass 750 Spanish leagues, or 3250 Italian miles.

The Air hereof is said to be very temperate, and the Country very good and pleasant, yet full of Forrests. Well watered, besides the two great Rivers before mentioned with the Streams of 1 Pa∣nami, 2 Luanga, 3 Arruga, 4 Mangeano, and certain others, which carry gold with them in their sands. By means whereof, it 〈◊〉〈◊〉 not only abundance of Corn, but great store of Pasturage, on which they breed infinite Herds of Cattel, and other Beasts very large and great: such store of Elephants, that they kill 5000 yearly form other reason but to make merchandise of their Teeth: their Gold-Mines great and small reckoned to 3000; some in the hils of Magnice, others in the Provinces of Matuca and Boro: the places where the Mines are, known without further Art in the discovery of them, by the dryness and barrenness of the loil; as if Nature could not hoord up gold in her spacious bosom, but she must needs be barren of all good works.

The People are of mean stature, and black complexions; but strong and active, couragious, and of such footmanship, that they out run horses. Their Apparel Cotton-Cloth, which they make, or buy from some other place: their Diet Flesh Fish Rice, Mill, and an Oil called Susiman. Their Reli∣gion Paganism for the most part; yet they worship not Idols, but believe in one God onely, which they call Mozimo: and seem not much averle from the Christian faith, to which one of their Kings was once converted. They punish nothing more severely then Witch-craft, Adultery, and Theft: and in the punishment of Delinquents they use no Prisons, but execute them as soon as apprehended, which is the reason that the Vulgar have no doors to their houses, that being a privilege for the Nobles. They may have as many Wives as they will, but the first the principal, and her Children only to be heirs: the women here very much respected (as a second England) the Emperor himself, if he meeteth any of them in the streets, giving them the way. Not to be married till their Menstrua or Natural purgations testifie their ability for conception; and therefore they solemnize the first Flux thereof with a liberal Feast.

Provinces of most note in it, and adjoining to it, but reckoned as Members of this Empire, are

1. Matuca, rich in Mines of Gold, the Inhabitants whereof are called Botonghi, who though they dwell between the Line and the Tropick, have in the winter such deep snows on the tops of their Mountains, that if they come not speedily down, they are frozen to death.

2. TORRA or BVTVA, extended from the mouth of the River of the Holy Ghost, or di Spirito Santo, to Cabo Corrientes (Caput Currentium in the Latines, wealthy in fat pastures and great herds of Cattel; more in her unexhaustible Mines of Gold. Most memorable for a large, and in those times an impregnable fortress, built formerly by some forrein Prince to secure the Mines; built of square stones, and every stone of marvellous greatness, without any sign of cement or other mortar; the walls hereof 25 spans thick, but the height not answerable; over the Gate certain characters written, which the most learned of the Moors could never read. Perhaps the work of some of the Aethiopian or Abassin•• Emperours, when their power and Empire was at the highest. By the Inhabitants, who conceive it to be a work beyond humane power, it is thought to have been built by Devils: but by those who take Sofala for the Land of Ophir, ascribed to Solomon though situate 510 miles more Westward then Sofala, by their own accompt. The Air here very cold, by reason of the sharp blasts coming from the Pole-Antartick; so much the colder, in that they have no wood or other fewel, but what they make themselves of the dung of their Cattel.

3. BORO, and 4 QVITICVI, both furnished with Gold also in their Mines and Rivers, but not so pure as that of Torra and Matuca; yet such as serve their turn so well as to spoil all industry; the people here being very careless in providing necessaries, which they presume the Moors (I mean the Arabian Moors) will bring them in exchange hereof.

5. INHAMBAN, governed by a King of its own, but Vassal and Tributary to the Emperour of Monomotapa; the King whereof in the year 1560. was Christened by Gonsalvo Silveria a Spanish Jesuite, by the name of Constantine; his Queen baptized by the name of Mary: but I find nothing of the further progress of Christianity. Touching 6 Matana, 7 Melemba, 8 Quinbebe, 9 Berteca, and 10 Bavagul, five other Provinces of this Empire, I can meet with little but their names.

Cities of note here are not many, hardly Towns or Villages; the houses being here so thin, that from the border of Sofala to the Fort of Torra, being 510 miles, as before is said, there is no sign of any building either old or new. The principal of those that be, 1. Tongum in the Province of In∣hamban, and the Seat royal of those Kings; memorable for the baptism of the King and Queen, which was there performed. 2. Simbus, supposed to be so called from the Agisymba of Ptolomic, the chief town of the Province of Torre or Batne, distant from Sofala one and twenty dayes journey, and neighboured by the remains or ruines of the old Fortress before described. 3. Benomotaxa, where the King or Emperour make his usual residence, giving this name to the whole Kingdom, but taking it from the King himself, whom they call Benomotaxa, or Monomotapa, the word in their language signifying a King or Emperour.

The King hereof accounted one of the greatest of Africk, hath under his command, besides the Provinces described, some part of Cafraria. Of great riches in regard of his Mines of Gold, which so abundantly supply all the Royal occasions, that he exacteth no kind of tribute from his Subjects, but some certain dayes service in his Works; and from his Nobles gifts and presents, without which none of them are to come before him. His forces great, the multitudes of men considered; but weak, for want of skill to train them, and Arms wherewith to fit them for modern service, the Arms they most use being only Darts and Targets. For which cause, (and in regard the people of the sub∣ject Kingdoms are so prone to Rebellions, that he is fain to keep the Heirs of the Tributary Kings as Hostages of their Fathers loyaltie) he wageth mercenarie Souldiers of other Nations, whom he distri∣buteth abroad in his several Provinces: and amongst these it is affirmed, that he hath a strong Bat∣taillon of Amazons, a warlike race of women who inhabit about the Lake of Zambre, and the out∣skirts of Zanzibar; compared by some, for their fidelity and prowess, to the Turkish Janizaries. And yet not trusting wholly to the saith of these Mercenaries, it is said that he keeps 200 Mastives for the Guard of his person. Much reverenced by his Subjects, by whom he is served upon the knee; and when he cougheth or drinketh, all those that are about him make such a shout, that the town rings of it. In one particular they differ from most Nations else, which is, that such as are admitted into his presence are bound to sit down, in token of reverence; to stand before him, being a sign of the greatest dignity which can be afforded unto any. Once in a fair way to have advanced Christianity in his Dominions, when in the year 1560. the King hereof was baptized by Gonsalvo the Jesuite, by the name of Sebastian, (that being the name of the King of Portugal then reigning.) But afterwards on the suggestions of some Arabians then in great place about him, having caused the Jesuite to be slain, he was warred upon by the King of Portugal with an Army of 1600 men, under the conduct of Francisco Barretio; to whom he offered very honorable amends for the injury done: but Barretio having in hope swallowed all the Gold in the Country, would not admit of any peaceable agreement, but referred the business to a battel; in which being overcome himself, and his whole forces not long after consumed by sickness, the hopes of Christianity, and the Portugals interesse in that Kingdom, fell together with him.

3. CAFRARIA.

CAFRARIA is bounded on the East with Rio di Spirito Santo, or the River of the Holy Ghost; on the South and West with the main Ocean; on the North extended to some parts of Mani∣congo, aud the Province of Zanzibar. So called from the word Cafars, which in the Arabian tongue signifieth an Heretick; a name by them given to Christians, Heathens, and those of their own Religion also, which differ in opinion from them; but given to this Region by some late Writers, because de∣stitute of another name.

The Country for so much of it as hath been discovered, is said to be full of great Herds of Cattel, and flocks of Sheep, abundance of Deer, Antilopes, Baboons, Foxes, Hares, Ostriches, Pelicans, He∣rons, Geese, Ducks, Phesants, Partriges; in a word all things necessary for the life of man, were it somewhat better stored with Corn. Exceedingly well watered, and as liberally stored with Woods and Forrests: the Hils thereof so intermixt with grassie Vallies, that pity 'tis so beautiful and rich a Country should be inhabited by so barbarous and rude a people; who being utterly unprovided of towns and houses, live in woods like beasts. Of colour black, thick lips, flat noses, long shaped heads, and most monstrous ears, extended far benea••h their shoulders, by hanging in them iron-chains, glass, bullets, Bels, and such ponderous bables. These Ornaments common to both sexes, who also use (for their greater beauty) most hideously to slash themselves in all parts of their bodies, even their very bellies; as if no lace could better sort with their naked skins, with which only, except some flap of leather to hide their privities, they are here apparelled.

But amongst all the several Nations which inhabit this most flourishing Country, none are more barbarous then those whom they call the Imbians, dwelling not far from the Cape of good Hope; tall, square, and strong, addicted always to War and Rapine, and feeding on the flesh both of their con∣quered Enemies, and their dying friends, whose death they hasten for the Shambles: The skuls of whom they use for their drinking Cups. Their weapons poisoned Arrows and Poles burnt at the end: And in their Wars they always carry fire before them, menacing thereby to roste or boil all such as they overcome. Their King (if such a sacred name become such an impious Monster) they account for Lord of all the earth, as the Pertugals of all the Seas: and he with the old Giantlike Arrogance, not only threateneth the destruction of men, but shooteth his poisoned Arrows against Heaven it self, as often as the rain or heat offends him. In the year 1589. about 80000 of them made an in∣rode into Zanzibar, laid desolate all the Country as far as Mombaza, which City they besieged, sacked, and devoured the People of it; which Tragedy we have heard before, in our description of Mombaza, a Realm of Zanzibar.

Towns here are none, scarce so much as houses; and those so mean that they deserve not to be so called: except it be some sheds on the Sea sides for the use of Saylors. Of most note in it is Soldania, situate on a large and capacious Road, about fifteen or sixteen Leagues from the Cape of good Hope: not so much noted for the building, as the Bay it self, where such as are to fail towards the Indies, use to take in fresh water, and make provision of things necessary for so long a Voyage.

But that which is of most note in all this Country is the Cape it self; discovered by the Portugals, under the conduct of Bartholomew Diaz, in their first Indian undertakings, by whom, for the con∣tinual Tempests which he found about it, it was first called Tormentosa: But afterwards having doubled the Cape, and thereby finding good hopes of a prosperous voyage, they caused it to be cal∣led Cabo di Bunna S••peranza, or the Cape of good Hope: Vasques di Gama, the first discoverer of this way to the wealth of India, being then their Admiral. An. 1597. It consisteth of three great points or head-lands, of which that which is neerest us, is the Cape of good Hope: the middlemost hath the name of Cabo Falso, because mistaken for the other by some of the Portugals, returning homewards: the third called Cabo della Guglia, or the Cape of Needles, by reason of those sharp points which shoot towards the Sea. On the top of the Cape, a large and pleasing plain, adorned with great va∣riety of flowers, and covered with a carpet of grass; it is called the Table of the Cape, and yieldeth a large prospect over the Sea on all sides. The Sea here is very rough and tempestuous, and hath to the Spaniards proved oftentimes very unkinde: whereupon a Spanish Captain being sore vexed with a storm, expostulared with GOD why he suffered his good Catholicks to endure such torments, and permitted the English Hereticks and Blasphemers, to passe so easily.

The Country is not subjected unto any one Prince, the Natives being governed by the Chiefs of their several Clans; nor finde I hitherto that either the Portugals or Spaniards have took possession of any one part of it, in the name of the whole. So that for ought I know, the best title to it doth be∣long to the King of England; for whom possession was taken of it in the reign of King James, by one Captain Fitz-Herbert, who called the Ascent unto the Table King James his Mount. But whether this Act of his beget any good title, or whether the title of a Country lying so far off be held worth the owning, I leave to be determined of by Lawyers and Statesmen.

4 MANICONGO.

MANICONGO is bounded on the South with Cafraria, and the Mountains of the Moon; on the West with the Aethiopick Ocean; on the North with the Realm of Benin and other parts of the land of the Negroes; and on the East with Zanzibar, and some part of the Abassine Empire. So called from Congo or Manicongo, the principal of those many Kingdoms which are united in this Name.

The Aire hereof so temperate, that their Winter is like the Antumn in Rome, insomuch as the People do not use to change their garments, or make more fire then, then at other times: the tops of the Mountains free from cold, and the nights so equal to the dayes that for the greatest part of the year there is little difference, the Country being situate under the Aequator, though more of it on the North then the South thereof. Not over hot notwithstanding in the heats of Summer, by rea∣son of the cool windes which then blow continually, and the great dewes which falling in the night make some compensation for the extream fervour of the day. The soyl so exceeding fruitfull in the production of herbs, plants, fruits, and such store of Pasturage, that they have here great herds of Cattel, large flocks of Sheep, plenty of Goats, Stags, Deer, Hares and Conies; Elephants of that bigness that their teeth weigh 200 pounds; and Serpents of so vast a bulk that they will eat a whole Deer at once: not to say any thing of their fowl both wilde and tame, which they have here in great abundance.

The People of mean stature, black of complexion, thick lips, and having the apple of the eye of divers colours, which makes them ghastly to behold; strong and long-lived, with very little hair on their heads, but that all naturally curled. In Religion for the most part Heathens, some worshipping the Sun and Moon, others the Earth, as the Mother and Nurse of all things; and some again wilde Beasts and Serpents. So populous, that without any sensible diminution of their infinite numbers, it is supposed that they fell 28000 Slaves to the Portugals yeerly; by whom they are sent into Brasil▪

there to work in the Mines and Sugar houses. The Christian faith admitted in some few of their Pro∣vinces, but specially in that of Congo, where first preached, in the reign of John the 2. king of Portugal, An. 1490. by Gonzalvo ae Susa, who having converted and baptized the Kings Uncle, and one of his Sons, prevailed so far upon the King, that in the end he and his Queen, and many of his principal Subjects did imbrace the Gospel. Received there by the people with such infinite joy, that when their first Bishop came to live amongst them, they caused the wayes from the Sea-side to the City of Banza (being 150 miles) to be covered with Mats; and offered to him all the way as he went, Lambs, Chicken, Kids, Partriges, Fish, Venison, and other necessaries, to testifie their rejoycings in that happy change. And, though many of the Subjects in the other Provinces were baptized accordingly, and for a time imbraced the Faith; yet after some small trial of it they relapsed to their former Heathenism, either unable or not willing to conform to so strict a Rule.

Principal Rivers of this Country, 1 Bengo, 2 Coanza, 3 Dande, 4 Barbela, 5 Ambrizi, 6 Loza, 7 Zaire. This last the greatest of them all, if not of all Africk also: of which though we have spoke already, we shall adde this here; That it falleth into the Aethiopick Sea with so great a violence, that for ten miles commonly, for fifteen sometimes, the waters of it do retain their natural sweet∣ness, not intermingled nor corrupted with the salt Sea-waters; Nor can the people fail above five miles against the stream, by reason of the Cataracts or huge fals which it hath from the Mountains, more terrible and turbulent then those of Nile. And for the Mountains of most note, they are 1 Sierra, Complida, or the Long mountain; 2 Mons Christalli, or the Christalline mountain, so called from the abundance of Christal which is found therein; 3 Sierra de Sol, the Mountain of the Sun, of excessiue height: 4 Montes Sal nitri, so called from their abounding in that kind of Mineral; and 5 the Mountains of Cabambe. rich in Mines of Silver.

It conteineth in it many large and ample Provinces, of which we have this general muster in the stile Imperial, wherein their King calleth himself King of Congo, Bamba, Sango, Sandi, Bangu, Batti, Pemba, Abundi, Matana, Quisoma, Angola, and Cacango; Lord of the Congemes, Amolaze, Lan∣gelungi, Anzuichi, Cucchi, and Zoanghi. Many of these not so well discovered as to afford us any matter fit for our discourse; the principal of those that be, are

1. ANGOLA bounded on the South with Cafraria, on the North with the Provinces of Bamba and Pemba, on the East with some part of Zanzibar, on the West with the main Ocean. The Country rich in Mines of Silver, and most excellent Copper; some store of Kine and Horses brought out of Europe, which they kill rather for their tails, the wearing whereof is held for a special ornament, then keep for any other use: their chiefest diet being Dogs, which they fat for the Shambles; and to that dainty so affected, that at the first coming of the Portugals thither, they would give twenty slaves and upwards for a good large Dog. By this we may conjecture somewhat at the nature of the people, who besides this are said to be much given to sorcerie and divinations by the flight of Birds, skilful in medicinal herbs and poisons, and by familiarity with the Devil able to tell things to come. Permitted as most Pagans are, to have as many wives as they will; who with the rest of the women, whether maids or widows, use at the first sight of every New Moon to turn up their bare bums in defiance of her, as the cause of their troublesom purgations.

In this Country are the Mountains called Cantaberes, rich in Mines of Silver; but those Mines not suffered to be digged, for fear of drawing some unnecessary war upon them; so that they use Glass∣beads for money and therewith also do adorn the persons of greatest eminence. Their principal City called Cabazza, is about 150 miles from the Sea, and the Royal residence of their Kings, but not else observable.

This Country was first discovered by the Portugals under the conduct of Diego Can, An. 1486. the King hereof at that time Vassal unto him of Congo, and so continued till that King did imbrace the Gospel, whereupon they revolted from him, and have since subsisted of themselves without such dependance. At first they held good correspondencie with the Portugals, and allowed them free traffick in their dominions: But after their revolt from the King of Congo, with whom the Portugals were in league, they put to death as many of them as they found in Cabazza, An. 1578. under colour of some pretended treason. To be revenged of this soul murder, Paul Diaz, Governour of these parts for the King of Portugal, arming such people as he had, with two Gallies and some other Ves∣sels passed up the River of Coanza, wasting the Country on both sides: Against whom the King of Angola raised an Army of a Million of men; but amongst those multitudes of men there were so few Souldiers, that an handful of the Portugals, aided with some of the forces of the King of Congo, gave him a notable defeat, A. 158••. Since that, the trade with Portugal is revived again, and the King here∣of hath expressed some good affections unto Christianity, sending unto the King of Congo for some Priests to instruct him in it, but obtained them not; the state of Religion in that kingdom being then declining.

To this king belong also the two Provinces of Matana and Quisoma, though both used in the titles of the King of Congo: of which the first lying towards the Sea, is said to be of a wholsom air, and a fertile soil, outwardly furnished with fruits, and inwardly with Mines of Christal and other metals; but not very rich, for want of some convenient Haven to bring on commerce. The other lying towards a great Lake called Aque Lunda, was once governed after the manner of a Commonwealth; but tributary at that time to the K. of Congo, as of later times to the Kings of Angola, by whom brought under this new yoke, by reason of the aid they had given the Portugals in their wars against him.

2. BAMBA hath on the South the River of Conza, by which parted from Angola; on the North the River Ambrize, by which divided from Songo, on the East Pemba; on the West the Aethiopick

Ocean. The Country rich in Mines of Silver, well stored with Beasts and Birds, as well tame as wilde: Amongst the Birds Parrets both green and gray, and many which are taught to sing, not much inferior for their musick to the birds of Canaries. Amongst the Beasts of most note is that called the Zebre. sha∣ped like a Mule, but from the ridge of the back to the belly so streaked with lines of white, black, and yellow, and those streaks naturally set in such even proportion, as yieldeth to the eye a most pleasing object. But wilde, and of so swift a foot, that Velox ut Zebra, to be as swift as a Zebre, is grown into a Proverb amongst the Portugals. The men so strong, that it is said of them, that at one blow they will cut off the head of an Ox. or strike a Slave quite thorow the midle, into two pieces; and to be able to carry in their arms a vessel of wine, weighing 325 pound weight, containing the fourth part of a But; and hold it so till it be quite drawn out. It containeth in it many Signeuries, most of them called by the names of their principal Towns. The chief of which, 1 S. Paul, situate on the Sea side, opposite to theisle of Leanda, inhabited for the most part by Portugal families. 2 Bamba, which giveth name to this Province, and is situate about 100 miles from the Sea, betwixt the Rivers of Lose and Ambrizi.

3. PEMBA hath on the West Bamba, on the East the Lake Zombre, and the River Barbela; on the North Batta, and on the South Angola, Esteemed to be the richest and most pleasant Country of all Manicongo; the Fields in all parts thereof beset with Palm trees, but intermixt with other fruit trees, which are always green. The water of so good a nature that it never hurteth any that drink of it: the Aire exceeding wholsom, and the earth as fruitfull; productive of all sorts of grain, but specially of that which they call Luco, in form like mustard seed, but bigger, which they grinde in an hand-mill, and make thereof a Bread not inferiour to Wheat. The People much reclaimed from their ancient Barbarism since the coming of the Portugals thither, whom they imitate both in behaviour and apparell. So well skilled in the vertues of Medicinal herbs, that every one is his own Physitian, Chirurgeon, and Apothecary. Antiently clothed with Mats, and trimmed up with Fea∣thers; retained still by the Villages and poorer sort in some part of the Country. Their chief City, formerly had the name of Banza, so called because the Kings Court (as the word doth signifie) but since the receiving of the Gospel it is called S. Saviours; distant from the Sea 150 miles, beautified (since it became Christian) with a Bishops See, and a fair Cathedral, in which are 28 Canons, with other Officers, and Ornaments accustomably belonging to the lake Foundations. The Town it self situate on the side of a large and lofey Mountain; on the top whereof is a spacious Plain, two Dutch miles in compass, full of Villages, Burroughs, and scattered houses, which are thought to house 100000. persons, most of them Portugals, and their Servants.

4. BATTA hath on the VVest and South Pemba, on the East the Mountains of the Sun, and those called Sal nitri; on the North Pango. Of the Soile and People there is nothing singular to be said, but that the inhabitants hereof are more military, and better furnished for the Wars then the rest of these Provinces: necessitated thereunto by the ill neighbourhood of a fierce and savage People, dwelling about the spurs and branches of the Mountains before mentioned, whom they call Jagges or Giacchi. These naturally and originally of the Land of Negroes, abandoned the parts about Seirra Leona, where before they dwelt, and to the number of 12000 fell into the Mountainous parts of this Region, under the conduct of one Elembe, where they are since grown into a People; and become a terrour to their neighbours. Greedy devourers of mans flesh, which they prefer be∣fore that of Beeves or Mutton; not yet so qualified by the change of their Country as to build houses, sow or plant, or to breed up Cattell; finding it far the easier life to maintain themselves by the labour and spoil of others. And which is yet most strange of all, though they have each of them many wives, ten or twenty a piece, yet they have no children; but strangle them assoon as born, lest they should be an hindrance to their often wandrings. But as Plinie once said of the Esseni, Gens aterna est in qua nemo nascitur: so we may also say of these, that they do not want succession, though they breed no children; selecting out of their Captives and stollen children, some of either Sex (but neither steal nor take them captive under twenty yeers old) to be the Seminary (as it were) of a new posterity. Against these Monsters those of Batta are armed continually, not otherwise able to defend themselves, their wives and children, from their hands and teeth: insomuch as this one Pro∣vince, though none of the biggest, is able to raise 70000 men, well armed, and fit for any service. The principal of their Towns is Batta, which gives name to the Province; situate on the banks of the River Lelanda, and the Seat of the Vice-Roy, who is always of the blood Royal, honoured some∣times with sitting at the Kings own Table, which none else may do, and of so great authority in all consultations that no body dares to contradict him.

5. PANGO, is bounded on the South with Batta, on the East extended to the Mountains of the Sun, which close up this Country; on the North with Sunda; and on the West with parts of Pemba, and Sango. Of the People, little singular, of the Country less. Neighboured on the North-east to∣wards Sierra de Christall, with the Languelungi, supposed by some to be the Aethiopes Hesperii, spo∣ken of by Ptolomy; a barbarous Nation, but of so considerable power, that they are found amongst the rest in the Stile Imperial. This once a Kingdom of it self, not subject till of late times to the Kings, of Congo. The chief Tow of it called Pango, is seated on the Western bank of the River Barbele; the ordinary residence of the Vice-Roy, and the name giver to the whole Province.

6. SVNDA, is bounded on the South with Batta, on the North with the great River Zaire; on the East with Barbele; and on the West with part of Songo. The Country rich in several Mettals, but the Inhabitants prefer Iron before any other, because it doth afford them Materials for Swords, Knives, and Armour; well furnished also with Martrons, Sa∣bles, and other Futrs of great esteeme amongst Forreigne Merchants. This is the best

Region of this Kingdom, not above 40 miles in breadth, betwixt Batta and the River of Zaire; nor much more in length. Their chief City hath the name of Sunda, which it communicateth to the whole.

7. SONGO, is bounded on the East with Batta, and Anzichana; on the West with the Aethiopick Ocean; on the North with the Kingdom of Loanga; and on the South with the River Ambrizi, by which parted from the Realm of Bamba. It lieth on both sides of the great River Zaire, which is here so turbulent and broad, and so full of Ilands, that the one part of it hath little or no commerce with the other. The chief Town hereof called Songo gives this name to the Country; in which is no∣thing singular for the Soil or People.

8. ANZICHANA, hath on the West, part of Songo and Loango▪ extended thence unto the East as far almost as the Lake of Zembre; on the North some part of the Land of Negroes, on the South the Zaire. So called from the Anziqui, the Inhabitants of it. The cruellest Cannibals in the world; for they do not only eat their Enemies, but their Friends and Kinsfolk. And that they may be sure not to want these Dainties, they have shambles of mans flesh, as in other parts of Beef or Mutton. So covetous withall, that if their Slaves will yield but a penny more when sold joynt by joynt then if sold alive, they will cut them out, and sell them so upon the Shambles. Yet with these barbarous qualities they have many good. Affirmed to be so cunning at the Bow and Arrows, that they will discharge 28 Arrows (for so many do their Quivers hold) before the first of them falls to ground and of so great fidelity to their Masters, and to those which trust them, that they will rather choose to be killed then either to abuse the trust, or betray their Master. For that cause more esteemed by the Portugals, then their other Slaves. And for the same, and that only, worthy of so good a Country; said to be rich in Mines of Copper, and very plentifull of Sanders both red and gray; which tempered with Vinegar, is found by the Portugals to be a certain remedy against the Pox; as the smoke thereof against the head-ache. Towns they have none, or none at least of any reckoning, which deserve place here.

9. LOANGO hath on the East Anzichana, on the West the Atlantick Ocean, on the North Benin, one of the Realms of Guinea in the Land of Negroes; and on the South the Province of Songo, from which parted by the River Loango, whence it hath its name. The Country very hot, as lying under the Line, but well peopled, indifferently fruitful, and more stored with Elephants, then any other of these parts; strenching in length 200 miles within the Land, and for the most part ve∣ry well watered. The Inhabitants, whom they call Bramas. by Religion Heathens, but of old ac∣customed (as the Anziqui and other of these barbarous Africans) unto Circumcision. Governed by a King of their own, once subject to the Kings of Congo; but of late times, both he and the King of the Anziqui (for they are also under the command of one Soveraign Prince) have freed them∣selves from that subjection, though still the King of Congo be called King of both. Their King they call by the name of Mani-Loanga. Their Towns of note, 1 Penga, the Haven to the rest. 2 Mo∣rumba, 30 Leagues more Northwards, and within the 1 and; the inhabitants of which Towns being more civil then the rest, apparell themselves with the leaves of Palm trees; but not so well skilled in the nature of that excellent Tree as the more civilized People of the Realms of Congo, who out of the leaves thereof well cleansed and purged draw a fine long thred, of which they make Velvets, Damaskes, Sattens, Taffaties, Sarcenets, and the lake fine Stuffes.

10. Having thus looked upon the chief Provinces of this Kingdom seated on the Continent, Let us next look upon the Ilands. The principal of which LO ANDA, situate over against the Town of S. Paul in the Province of Bamba; said to be first made out of the sands of the Ocean, and the mire of Coanza, cast into an heap, and at last made into an Iland. Now beautified with a very fair Haven, of the same name with the Iland, possessed by the Portugals. The Iland destitute of Rivers, but so well furnished with waters, that every where within less then half a yard digging, they find sweet and good: Waters so contrary to the Sea from whence they come, that when the Sea ebbs from it, they be salt and brackish; when it floweth towards the Iland then most fresh and sweet. But most remarkable is this Iland for the Cockle fishing, which the Women going a little into the Sea, take up together with the sands, in baskets, and part them from the sand, as they lie on the shore; the shells of which being na∣turally distinguished into drivers colours, serve over all the Kingdom of Congo, instead of money; which is a matter of such moment unto this King that he entertains a Governour in the Iland for no other reason, but to take care about this fishing.

Besides this, there are many Ilands in the River of Zaire, now subject to the Kings of Congo, but hereto∣fore in continual Wars against them; fighting in Boats which they made of the bodies of a Tree, by them called Liconde. The tree so big, that two or three men or more are not able to fathom it: inso∣much that many times a Boat is made of one of the largest of them, able to contain 200 men. Upon the shores of these Ilands, and in others of their Bays and Creeks, they have so great numbers of Anchioves, that in winter time they will leap upon the Land of their own Accord.

Compacted of these several Members, and of the rest expressed in the Stile Imperial, is the Realm of Congo, so called from Congo the chief Province, but now distinguished from the rest by the name of Pemba; which being of more power, or of better fortune, then any of the other, or of all to∣gether hath given both Law and name unto them. Discovered by the Portugals under Diego Can, An. 1486. at what times these Kings were at the greatest: called by their subjects Mani Congo, or the Kings of Congo, the word Mani, signifying in their Language a Prince or Lord; the name communicated since to the Kingdom also. Of their affairs before this time there is nothing certain. What hath since hapned in this Kingdom may best be seen in the ensuing Catalogue of

The Kings of Congo.

• 1486. 1 John not so called till converted to the Faith of Christ, and then baptized by this name, in honour of John the 2. King of Portugal, Anno 1490. in whose reign this discovery and Conversion hapned.
• 2 Alphonso, eldest son of John, zealous in the advancement of the Christian Faith, and for that opposed by Panse Aquitine his younger Brother: whom with a ve∣ry small Army, zealously invocating the assistance of Jesus Christ, he is said to have vanquished. A Prince, who during his long reign of 50 years did seriously promote the Gospel, and caused all Idols in his Kingdom to be overthrown, and Churches to be built, and furnished in convenient places.
• 3 Pedro, the son of Alphonso, in whose time was founded the Colledge of 28 Canons, in the Cathedral Church of S.Cross, in the Town of S.Saviours.
• 4 Francisco the son of Pedro, who reigned not long.
• 5 Diego, or James, one of the kinsmen of Francisco, in whose time Religion grow∣ing into discredit, by the scandalous lives of some of the Secular Clergie; John the 3. King of Portugal sent four Jesuits thi∣ther; who are said to have converted in five moneths 5000 persons; and to build three Churches.
• 6 Henry, the brother of Diego, after a sharp War touching the Succession, in which were slain all the Portugals of S.Saviours, except the Priests, at last succeeded; not long after slain in battell against the An∣ziques.
• 7 Alvarez, the son of Henry, forced by the Jagges or Giacchi to abandon Congo, and betake himself, together with the Portugal Priests, to an Iland of the Ri∣ver Zaire: where he continued, till re∣stored to his Crown by the aid of Sebasti∣an King of Portugal; after by famine he had lost almost all his company.
• 8 Alvarez II. Son of Alvarez the first, who much sollicited Sebastian and Henry Kings of Portugal, to send him a new supply of Preachers; the old store being wasted in the Ilands of Zaire.
• 9 Alvarez III. Son of Alvarez the 2. not being born in Lawfull wedlock, was oppo∣sed by one of his Sisters and a younger Brother, both of lawfull birth; whom he overthrew, Anno 1587. and in the place of the victory founded a Church in honour of the Virgin Mary.

Touching the Forces and Revenues of these Kings of Congo, I am able to say nothing certain; but that he is a Prince of great power and riches. His Riches visible by the great treasures which he draw∣eth from the Mines of silver, and of other Mettals in his Kingdome, from the trade of Cockle shells; the only money of his Realm, which he keeps wholly to himself; the great gain which he makes by Slaves and from Elephants teeth; the presents which he hath in way of Tribute from the King of Angola. And though it be not easie to say what he layeth up yeerly, because he hath not his Revenue in Coin, as most Princes have; yet it is thought that he is as rich and well furnished with all things, as any Monarch in Africk.

As for his Forces, they consist most in the multitudes of his Subjects, which were they well armed and used to the Wars, would make him formidable to the rest of the African Princes. And though he hath no garrisons or Towns of war, but must crust, if once invaded, unto Castles of bones; yet he doth rest secure enough from all fear of danger except out of Europe: being able to raise against his Rebels, or any of his invading neighbours; 400000 men out of Bamba only; all armed accord∣ing to their manners and 70000 men at least well exercised in Wars against the Jagges, from the Pro∣vince of Batta; besides what may be drawn from his other Provinces.

The Arms of this King are Mars, five swords meeting in Base Sol, which Coat was taken by Alphonso, the second King in this Catalogue, because in the battell which he fought against Panse A∣quitine, he and his Souldiers saw (or supposed they saw) such a number of shining swords hanging in the Aire, with their points turned directly upon the Enemy.

And so much for Aethiopia Inferior.

OF THE ISLES OF AFRICK.

IN tracing out the Isles of AFRICK, we must observe another course then that which we have taken in Europe and Asia: these Ilands not belonging to any part of the Continent, nor under the command of any great Prince, in the accompt of whose Estates they might be considered; but being all of them independent and sui juris, and therefore to be handled by themselves apart. In our Chorographie of which, and the stories of them, (as far forth as my Authors will direct me in it) I am now to travel; begining first with those that lie in the Red-Sea, or Indian Ocean, and so proceeding by the Cape of Good Hope to the Streits of Hercules: that from thence we may have the shorter passage into America, and there 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, conclude our journey. These then we will consider either joynt or separate, as delivered to us by the names of 1 The Aethi∣opick Ilands, 2 Socotara, 3 Madagascar, 4 Mohelia, 5 S. Helens, 6 S. Thomas, 7 The Princes Iland, 8 The Gorgades or Ilands of Cape Vird. 9 The Canaries or the Fortunate Ilands, 10 Madera, 11 The Iland of Holy Port, and 12 The HESPERIDES.

1. THE AETHIOPICK ILANDS.

1. THE AETHIOPICK ILANDS, so called because they lie upon the Coast of Aethiopia Superior, which were onely known unto the Antients, are more in number then in weight: some of them situate within the Streits of the Red Sea or the Gulf of Arabia; others without those Streits in the open Ocean.

1. Of those within the Streits, not reckoning such as lie upon the shores of Arabia Felix, of which we have already spoken; there is 1 Asiarte or Astrata, now called Cainssa. 2 Ara Palladis, so called from some Altar of that Godess, which was there erected. 3 Gypseris, by Plinie called Cyris, but Gypsus in Justinians Code, renowned in former times for its plenty of metals. 4 Macaria, or the fortunate Ilands, so called from the fertility and pleasures of it. 5 Orneon, or the Isle of Birds, from the great plenty of Birds which was found therein. 6 Daphnis, by Ptolomie called Daphnine, opposite to a famous Port-town of the same name in the Continent. 7 Bacchias, so called from Bacchus, unto whom consecrated. 8 Anti-Bacchias, so named because opposite to it. 9 Acanthine, supposed by some to be now called Anghotina. 10 Insula Diodori, conceived by the Learned to be the same which is now called Babel Mandel, and giveth name unto the Streits or entrance of the Bay of Arabia, now called the Streits of Babel Mandel. 11 Isidis Insula, memorable for a Temple dedicated to the Godesse Isis; and for a well frequented Port called Portus Isidis; the same which is now called Pascua, as Bel-forest thinketh. 12 Mundi, an Iland in the Bay of Avalitos, opposite to a noted Em∣porie of the same name of the shores of that Bay. Besides all which, we find in Ptolomie two Ilands by the name of Thrisitides, two more called Chelonitides or Cathratae, two others passing by the name of Gomadeae, together with the Isles of Myron, Pan, and that called Insula Magorum; which make up one and twenty in all; but of no note or observation in the course of business, or the conduct of humane affairs.

Those of most note in the Open Ocean, which still preserveth the name of the Red-Sea, and is sometimes called the Indian, sometimes the Arabian Ocean, and by a particular name Pelagus Hy∣padis, are but four in number; that is to say, 1 Myrica, by the Translator of Ptolomie called Myr∣siaca; 2. 3. two Ilands called by the name of Menan, a degree more Northwards then the other; and 4 Amicusia, as Stephanus; or Amici Iusula, as called by Ptolomie, the most North of all; which I conjecture to be that which is now called by the name of Socotara, the most noted Iland of this Sea. I know that many Learned men will have this Iland to be that which Ptolomie and others of the Anti∣ents call Dioscoridis: but because Dioscoridis, by all those Antients, is made to be an Iland of Arabia Felix, and Socotara by all the Moderns affirmed to be an Isle of Africk; I can by no means yield unto it. Again, it is affirmed by our best modern Geographers, that Socotara lieth over against Cape Guar∣dafu, (the Aromata of Ptolomie, as before is said) from which distant not above 30 leagues: which site and distance sort well with Amicusia, but can by no means be applied unto Dioscoridis; Amicusia being placed but two Degrees on the East of that Promontorie in the Longitude of 85. whereas Dioscoridis is situate from it almost four degrees, in the Longitude of 86, and 40 Minutes; besides as great or greater difference in their several Latitude. So that supposing it for granted, that Socotara is that Iland which was antiently called Amicusia; and having cleered my way so far, I now proceed to the Description and affairs thereof.

2. SOCOTARA.

2. SOCOTARA, the greatest Iland of these Shores, is situate, as before was said, against Cape Guar∣dafu, from which distant about 30 leagues; Abadalenry a small Iland lying in the middest, that is to say, 15 leagues from the Cape, and 14 from the Iland. The length here of 60 miles, 25 the breadth;

divided in the middle by craggy Mountains of great height, the top of which are for the most part covered with sands. The Iland extremely vexed with winds and molested with dryness, insomuch as it is destitute of most things necessary for the life of man; affording nothing towards it of the growth of the Earth, but some small quantity of Mill, Dates, and some kind of Fruits. Provided notwith∣standing of some good Pastures for the breed of Cattel, and liberally furnished with medicinal Drugs, as Cinnabar, Dragons blood, which is a Red gum issuing from the bark of a tree; and the best Aloes in the world, from hence called Aloes Socotrina.

The People of an Ash-colour, very rude and barbarous; their bread for the most part of Dates, the rest of their food being milk and butter; their hair long, and their clothing only enough to hide their nakedness. The Women as good Soldiers as the Men; countenancing or occasioning the tradi∣tion of the Arabians, that they came from the Amazons: And the better Husbands of the two, go∣verning all affairs both within and without. All of them by profession Christians, governed by a Bishop of their own, with some few Priests, but ignorant enough of all things which concern Religion. More generally Circumcised then Christened, though both used among them. Jacobites in Sect, as the Abassines their neighbours are; and zealous worshippers of the Cross, which they alwayes hang about their necks. So pertinaciously addicted unto Magick, and therein so expert, that they bring incredible things to pass: not to be weaned from those black Arts, though the Bishop excommuni∣cate all such as use them. They hold opinion that S. Thomas suffered shipwrack upon their Coasts, as he sailed towards India; and that his Ship being drawn to land, was turned into a Church: but it appeareth neither by their life or doctrines, that any Apostolical man hath set foot a∣mongst them.

They live for the most part in Caves, or Cabbins of no other stuffe then the boughs of trees; so that we are to look for few Towns among them. The principal, 1 Zocotara, giving name to the Iland, the place of the Kings residence, and a Bishops See. 2 Tamarind, and 3 Delisha, two Port-towns, and reasonably well traded, in the hands of the Natives: as 4 Coro, and 5 Benin, two other Ports, possessed and garrison'd by the Portugals. The King hereof a Vassal to the King of Fartac, one of the petit Princes of Arabia Felix, not far from Aden; in habit and Religion Turkish: At∣tended on when the Relater was there, An. 1614. by five Camels and five Horses only, yet those all in the Iland.

Nigh hereunto are two Islands, (those possibly which Ptolomie calleth Monan) the one inhabi∣ted by men only, and the other by women; who do meet at their accustomed times to preserve their kind, but make no long stay, the Air of the one being found unhealthy for the constitution of the other Sex. The other Ilands of these Coasts, scattered up and down in the Bay of Barbaria, (but not known by any name in the time of Ptolomie) as 1 Don Garcia, 2 the three Brethren, 3 S. Brandon, 4 Francis, 5 Mascadenna, 6 Comoro, and many others of as small note, are not worth the speaking of.

3. MADAGASCAR.

3. MADAGASCAR, the greatest of the world, is situate over against Mosambique in Aethiopia Inferior, supposed to be the Menuthias of Ptolomie, the onely Iland by him named on the Coast of that Country; but by the Portugals called the Isle of S. Lawrence, because discovered by them on the day of that Saint, An. 1506. The length hereof affirmed to be 1200 miles, (which is longer then Italy) and 4000 in compass: the middle part hereof opposite to the Promontory which Ptolomie calleth Prassum, now the Point of Mosambique, from which distant 170 miles: in reference to the Heavenly Bodies, situate from the 17 Degree of Southern Latitude to the 26.

The Country plentifull of all things necessary for the life of man, particularly of Mill, Rice, Hony, Wax, Cotton wooll, Sugars, Stags, Goats, Deer, and other Creatures both wild and tame; Limons and other cooling fruits, some store of Ginger, Cloves but little different from those of India, Red Sanders, Saffron, Amber, and some Mines of Silver, Iron, Gold, and Copper: not to say any thing of their Beeves and Muttons, so large, and good, and so good cheap, that for a twopenny Bead or some such trifle they will sell Beeves and Sheep of good taste and bigness: such numbers of Elephants, that they send thence yearly great store of Ivory: and amongst other rare fruits, they have plenty of those which they call Cocos or Coconuts; a kind of Date as big as a Cabbage; the liquor in it, about the quantity of a pint, tastes like wine and sugar, the kernel big enough to content two men; and like good Ale it affords not only meat and drink, but clothing; as also furniture for their houses, tackle for their ships, fewel for the fire, and timber for building; the body of the Tree being strait and high, and towards the top diversified into many branches. A Country far too good for so bad a people.

For they, as Travellers report, and most Writers testifie, are treacherous, inhospitable, ignorant both of •• rayers and Festivals, destitute of the distinction of time into years and moneths, not know∣ing any proper names for the dayes of the week, nor able to reckon above ten; naked, except their pri∣vities which they cover with Cotton. Idolaters in the midland parts, & Mahometans upon the shores. Commendable only for their hate to Polygamie, and restraining themselves to one wife; the defiling of the marriage bed severely punished: but otherwise so eager upon copulation, that their Boyes at the age of twelve years, and the Girls at ten, think they stay too long, if they keep their Virginities any longer; some of them, like Quartilla in P••tronius Arbiter, begin so early, ut nunquam memi∣nerint

se Virgines fuisse, that they remember not the time when they lost their Maidenheads. Of co∣lour they are black, and of strong composition; their breasts and faces cut and pinkt, to appear more beautiful. Much given unto the wars, well armed according to their Country manner, and exceeding good Archers. Amongst them there are some white people, said to come from China.

It hath in it many fair Rivers, but their names I find not: and at the mouths of those Rivers some convenient Havens, into which they admit the sorrein Merchants, but suffer none to come on land; which the Merchant hath no cause to be sorry for, finding himself not safe on shipboard from their treacherous practises. So that we can give but small Account of their Towns and Cities, except it be the bare recital of their names: as viz. 1. S. Augustines, on a fair Bay in the South-west point, as 2 Gangomar in the North-east of it; 3 Antabosta, 4 Point-Antogil, 5 Santo-Jacobo, 6 Matatana, 7 Angoda, 8 Herendo, 9 Andro-arco, and 10 Roma or New-Rome, so entituled by some zea∣lous Romanist, in hope to have it thought that the Popes of Rome have got some footing in this Iland.

This Iland known, but very imperfectly, in the time of Marcus Paulus Venetus, who telleth us many strange things of it; but none more strange then that of the Bird called Ruck, of such incredible strength & bigness, that it could snatch up an Elephant as easily as a Kite doth a Chicken. Discovered by the Portugals in the year 1506. as before was said; and since frequented by the English and Holland Merchants: by whom we are informed no further touching the Estate and Affairs thereof, but that it is divided into four parts, under so many Kings, each of them in continual wars against one another, but well enough agreed to defend themselves against the coming in of Strangers: yet as some say, they would be well enough content with an English Plantation; either in love to our Nation, whom they acknowledge to be more courteous then the Portugals, and not so covetous as the Dutch; or else by the strength of our Shipping, and the reputation of our interesse in it, to keep off all others.

4. MOHELIA, & 5. MAƲRITIƲS Iland.

ADjoyning to Madagascar, and as it were attending on it, I find divers Ilands; some on the North-west, some directly East. On the North-west we have 1 Meottey, 2 Chamroe, 3 Mohelia, and 4 Joanna Iland; on the East, 5 the Iland of Mauritius, and 6 Englands Forest. Of these Mau∣ritius is the greatest, but Mohelia the best inhabited.

4. MOHELIA situate on the North-west of Madagascar, is about 20 miles in length, and 16 in breadth: abounding in Goats, Hens, Coconuts, Limons, Orenges, Pom-Citrons, Pulse, Sugar-Canes; store of Fish taken on the shores, and other necessaries. The People of complexion black, of composition large and strong, couragious, affable, lesse treacherous then their neighbours of Ma∣dagascar. Of the same Language and Religion with those of Arabia, from whence they seem to have descended; but by reason of their commerce and intercourse with the Portugals, they speak that tongue also. The Women of the like complexion: to amend which, and seem more lovely, they pink their arms and faces in several shapes. Both sexes no otherwise apparalled then their natural garments, with some Plantane. Leaves about their middle to hide their shame.

Their Religion that of Mahomet, as before is said: their Priests in great esteem amongst them; so their Temples also, which they keep clean and neatly matted, not suffering any man to enter with his shooes on his feet. Their chief Town Merianguea, at the West end of the Isle, strong and well-garrison'd. Heretofore under the command of one King alone; of late divided into two Princi∣palities: one of the last Kings leaving two daughters, the one married to a Native, the other to an Arabian Lord.

5. Larger then this, on the East of Madagascar, is the Isle of MAƲRITIƲS, so called by the Hollanders in honour of Maurice Prince of Orange, in whose time they first set footing in it; but by the Portugals called De Cerne, and by some Cygnaea. In compass about 100 miles: well stored with Beeves, Hogs, Goats, most sorts of Fish; and liberally endowed with all the blessings of Na∣ture, sweet Waters, most delicious Fruits, Woods fit for any use both of food and building; plenty of Ebonie of all colours, but the best coal-black. Yet altogether destitute of humane Inhabitants: insomuch as we may say of this, as the Poet of the World, before Man was made:

Sanctius his Animal, mentisque capacius altae Deerat adhuc, & quod dominari in caetera posset.

Which may be Englished in these words:

But yet the Chief, with Supreme power possest, Was wanting, he that should command the rest.

6. S. HELENS, & 7. The Isles of ASCENTION.

6. AS destitute of Inhabitants as the Isle of Mauritius, is that of S. HELEN, on the West side of the Cape of Good Hope, & in the 16 Degree of Southernly Latitude; no other Iland interposing

betwixt Madagascar and it, except those of Don Alvarez, and of Tristram de Acugna, neer the Cape it self; but of so little note as not worth the naming. The Iland very high and hilly, and moun∣ting from the Sea with so steep an ascent, that the Mariners have amongst them a merry saying, that A man may choose whether he will break his heart going up, or his neck coming down.

It was thus called because discovered by the Portugals on S. Helens day: not then inhabited nor since, the King of Spain suffering none to dwell there, because it had been made an unlawful receptacle for uncustomed Goods, whereby he lost exceedingly both in power and profit. Stored by the Portu∣gals at the first Discovery with Goats, Hogs, Hens, and other Creatures: as also with Figs, Limons, Orenges, and the like Fruits, which there thrive exceedingly: and grow all the year long. Intended by them for a Stage in their going and coming to and from the Indies: in which they might refresh them∣selves, and bestow their sick, whence they are taken off by the next years Fleet. Used for the same purpose by the English and Hollanders, who so domineer about the Iland, that the Portugals dare not Anchor neer it, or own their property, if they see any shipping in the Rode. No buildings in it but the ruins of a little Chappel, destroyed by the Hollanders: and some fragment of a little Village be∣gun by some Portugal Mariners, but demolished by the King of Spain.

7. Northwest from hence is the Isle of Ascension, so called because discovered on Ascension day: but not inhabited, nor any use at all made of for ought I can finde. Of the same bigness with S. He∣lens, 30 miles in compass, and about 700 English miles distant from it.

8. S. THOMAS, 9 the PRINCES Iland, and 10 the Isle of ANNIBON.

8. THe Iland of S. THOMAS is situate directly under the Aequator, of Orbicular form, the Dia∣meter being 60 miles; by consequence the Perimeter or compass 180; and just so many from the shore of the Realm of Congo. At the first discovery nothing but a continual For••st, now very well inhabited both by Portugals and Negroes: these last brought hither from the opposite Conti∣nent, with whom the Air agrees so well, that they attain generally to 110 years of Age, few of the Portugals unto fifty. The Aire so vehemently hot that it forteth not with the constitution of the Europaeans.

The Country destitute of wheat, which if sown here, turneth all to blade, and brings forth no Ear, nor will any fruits here prosper that have any stone in them: but so abundant in Sugar canes and well stored with Sugars, that 40 Ships are hence loaded yeerly, with that one commoditie; for making which, they have here 70 Ingenios, or Sugar-houses, and in each of them 200 Slaves, in some 300 which belong to the works; six dayes in seven these Slaves work for their Masters, and the seventh for themselves; which they spend in sowing and planting their Seeds, Fruits, and Provisions. Where by the way, these Sugar-works or Ingenios are a late invention; the boyling and baking of Sugar (as it is now used) not being above 200 years old; and the refining of it more new then that: first found out by a Venetian in the days of our Fathers, who is said to have got above 100000 Crowns by this Invention, and to have left his son a Knight; who (though he was no Knight of the Post) in very little time brought it all to nothing. Before which Art of boyling and refining Sugars, our An∣cestors not having such luxurous Palates, sometimes made use of rough Sugar, as it came from the Canes; but most commonly pleased themselves with honey, more wholsom, because more natural then these forced Inventions. But to proceed in the description of this Iland, in the midst there of thereof there is said to be a woody Mountain, overshadowed continually with Clouds, which so moysten the trees that grow there in a great abundance, that from thence falleth a sufficient quantity of waters to re∣fresh their Fields, and feed their Sugar-Canes; notwithstanding the extream heat of the Clime and Aire.

The Religion here allowed of is the Christian only, first preached here by the Portugals or brought hither with them. The Church hereof governed by a Bishop, his title the Bishop of S. Thomas, but his charge extendeth also over all the Churches in the Realm of Congo. The principal City of it hath the name of Pavoasan, a Colony of Portugals, consisting of 700 Families, or about that number: situate on a fine River, and a pleasant Haven: seldom without the company of Portugal Merchants, who bring hither in exchange for Sugars, Wheat, Wine, Cheese, Hides, and other things more necessary then those Sugars, for the life of Man. Took by the Hollanders in the year 1599. but again recovered or aban∣doned.

9. THE PRINCES ILAND, (Insula Principis in the Latine) so called for that the Revenues of it were alotted to the Prince of Portugal, is situate in three Degrees of Northern Latitude. The Country very fruitfull for the bigness of it; but not much observable: except it be for being taken for the Hollanders by Julian Clerehagen, Anno 1598. abandoned not long after to the former Owner. Attended, as is fit for a Princes Iland, by a Messe of Chaplains, viz. 1. the Isles of S. Matthew, 2 S. Cross, 3 S. Paul, and 4 S. Conception. and waited on by seven servants (so many Ilands neer Cape Vero) all in Coats of Green, called by one common name, Barbacene. But because the former four yield no matter of History. and these last seven have no other Inhabitants but Birds; we may be thought having said thus much of them, to have said enough.

10. Southwest hereof, but on the other side of the Line, lieth the Isle of Annobon, (Insula An∣niboni as the Latines call it) So named because discovered upon New yeers day. Inhabited, and of ve∣ry good fishing all along the Coasts of it; but that Fishing made unsafe by Crocodiles, and other ve∣nemous and hurtfull Creatures, which are said to be about the shores in great abundance.

11. The GORGADES, or Isles of CAPE VERD.

11. THe GORG ADES, or Ilands of Cape Verd (Insulae Capitis Viridis, as the Latines call them) are 9. in number; called by the last name because situate over against Cape Verd (Promontorium Capitis Viridis) in the Land of Negroes. Their names 1 S. Anthony, 2 S. Vincent, 3 Buenavista, 4 S. Lucies, 5 Insula Salis, the Isle of Salt, 6 DelFogo, or the Isle of Fire, 7 S. Nicholas, 8 Maggio, or Majo, 9 S. Ja∣go. Some add to these a tenth, called Brava Discovered all in the year 1440 by a Geneose called Anto∣nio de Noli, employed therein at the charges & direction of Henry Duke of Visco one of the younger sons of K. John of Portugal, the first of that name. Of the most little to be said. The principal, and in∣deed the only ones which are now inhabited, are Majo, Del Fogo, S. Jago, 1 Majo is of most re∣pute for a Lake of two Leagues long; the waters whereof are by the heat of the Sun turned into Salt, which is here made in great abundance. 2 Del Fogo is so called from the Flakes of fire which it sends forth usually, and fell so thick upon the Ship of Sir Anthony Sherley when he took the Iland, An. 1596. that one might have writ his name in the ashes on the upper Deck, with the top of his finger. 3. The principal of all S. Jago, yet but seven miles long; rockie and mountainous, but full of very pleasant Valleys, and well inhabited. The chief Town of it called Riblera, or Ribiera la grande, a Colony of Portugals; situate on a fine River and a beautiful Haven: taken and sacked by Sir Francis Drake, in the year 1585, and after by Sir Anthony Sherley, An. 1596.

The name of Gorgades, as the more ancient of the two, is almost forgotten. Given to those Ilands, as supposed (but I cannot see upon what grounds) to be the seat of the Gorgons; the proper habita∣tion or dwelling place of Medusa and her two fair sisters. This Medusa said, or rather fabled by the Poets, to have been a Woman of great beauty; Who either for suffering her body to be abused by Neptune, in one of the Temples of Pallas, or for preferring her self before Pallas, had by the said Goddess, her hair turned into Snakes; and this property annexed unto them, that whosoever looked on her, should be turned into stones: which quality is retained after she was slain, and beheaded by Perseus. Thus and far more sabulously the Poets. The Historians (for as some think, omnis fabula fundatur in historia) relate, how this Medusa was indeed a Lady of such exceeding beauty, that all men that saw her, were amazed: and of such a wise and subtile brain, that for that cause only men attributed unto her a Serpents head. She abounding in wealth, and by piracy molesting the Seas of Europe, was invaded by an Army of Grecians, under the leading of Perseus; who in a single combat slew her. Perseus when he plucked off her helmet, admiring that beauty which he had destroyed, cut off her head, and carried it into Greece: where the people beyond measure wondred at the rare compositure of her face, and the exceeding beauty of her haire; and are therefore said to have by her head been metamorphosed into stones. Pausanias in his Corinthiacks so reports the story.

12. The CANARIES.

THe CANARIES are in number seven, situate over against the Coast of Libya Interior; so cal∣led from Canaria, one of the principal of the number. By Plinie, Ptolomy, and other of the Ancient Writers they were called Insulae Fortunatae, the fortunate Ilands; and amongst them of greatest note five being made the fixed place of the first Meridian; removed since to S. Michaels one of the Azores. But those Antients knew but six of them by name, and in the naming of these six do not well agree. By Plinie, whom Solinus followeth, they are said to be 1 Ombrio, 2 Junonia Major, 3 Junonia Minor, 4 Caprariae, 5 Nivaria, and 6 Canariae. By Ptolomy thus reckoned, 1 Aprositus, 2 Hera (or Junonia) 3 Pluitania, 4 Casperia, 5 Canaria, and 6 Pincuria; Where we may note also to our purpose, that though these Authors disagree in all the rest of the names (Junonia being added by the Translator unto Ptolomies Hera) yet they agree in making Canaria to be one; which sheweth that one to be of eminence enough to give the name of Canarie Ilands unto all the rest. Called Fortunate, from an opinion which the Ancients had of their fruitfulness and other excellencies; in which respects, several Countries, in those times had the names of Macaria, Felix, Fortunate. Now better known by the new names of 1 Canarie, 2 Palma, 3 Tenaritte, 4 Gomero, 5 Ferro, 6 Lanserotte, and 7 Fu∣erte Ventura.

1. CANARIA or Canaria Magna, because the biggest of the Cluster is said to be 90 miles in compass, and to contain 9000 persons: Plentiful in Barley, Honey, Wax, Sugar Canes, Goats, Kine, and Camels; of which, and of their Cheese, and the skins of Beasts they raise great profit: but from nothing more then from their Wood (whereof they have very great abundance) used by the Clo∣thier for the well colouring of his Cloth. From hence and from the other of these Ilands which bear this name, come the fine singing Birds called Canary Birds; and so do also those rich Wines (the fruit of the ••henish Grape transplanted) which we call Canaries. A sort of wine, if not so∣phisticated and abused, which is said to sume less into the head, please the Palat more, and better help the natural weakness of a cold stomack (if moderatly and discreetly used) then any other Wines whatsoever. Brought hence in such abundance to supply our luxury, that no less then 3000 Tuns here∣of are vended yeerly into England and the Netherlands onely.

2. PALMA, the one of the least in circuit, but as rich as any; fruitful in VVine and Sugars; abundantly well stored with Cattell, and great plenty of Cheese; and therefore made the victual∣ling place of the Spanish Fleets, as they passe to Brasil, and Peru. This Iland together with Canary,

and Tenariffe, make up the Bishoprick of the Canaries, one of the Bishops where of was that Mel∣chior Canus a Dominican Frier, whose works now extant in defence of the Church of Rome, shew him to have been a moderate and learned man, and Master of a perfect Ciceronian stile. The residue of the Ilands are of the Diocese of Madera.

3 TENARIFFE, some what less then the Grand Canarie, but of the same fertility and conditi∣on with it, is most remarkable for a Mountain of so great an height, that it may be seen 90 Leagues at Sea, in a fair clear day. Some reckon it 15 miles high, others 15. Leagues, and some advance it to 60 miles, but with little credit. With truth enough most of our Travellers and Geographers hold it to be the highest in the whole world. The Form, Pyramidal, in shape agreeing to these Prodigies of Art and Wonder, the Aegyptians Pyramides. The top whereof ending in a sharp point, called the Pike of Tenarisse, is said to be seldom without snow; and therefore problably conceived to be the Nivaria of Plinie.

4. HIERRO, or FERRI insula, so called from the Iron Mines therein, is by some thought to be the Pluitalia, by others the Aprositus of Ptolomy; and some again more probably the Ombrio of Plinie, if this and Ptolomies Pluitalia be not one and the same, as for my part I think they be. And it might possibly have those names in the Greek and Latine, because it hath in it no fresh waters but what they do receive in showres, and preserve in Cisterns: it being added by late Writers (which the Ancients knew not) that these showres do daily fall upon them from the Leaves of a tree, which always covered with a Cloud doth distill these waters, preserved in a large Cistern underneath the tree, for the use of Man and Beast throughout the Iland.

5.GOMERA, now as civil and well cultivated as any of the rest, was the most barbarous of all when first discovered: it being here, and here only the ordinary sign and evidence of their Hespitali∣ty, to let their friends lie with their wives, and receive theirs in testimony of reciprocal kindness: for which cause here, as in some places of the Indies, the Sisters son did use accustomably to in∣herit.

6.LANSAROTE the first of these Islands which was made subject to the Crown of Castile, dis∣covered by some adventurous Biscains An 1393. by whom spoiled and pillaged, and the poor King and Queen thereof and 170 of their Subjects of better quality brought away Prisoners into Spain. On this discovery the Kings of Castile challenged a propriety in all these Ilands; of which more anon.

In this of Lansarote there was an Episcopal See erected by Pope Martin the 5. removed unto the Isle of Canary in the time of Ferdinand the Catholique.

7.FVERTE-VENTVRA, of the same nature with the rest, supposed to be the Capraria of Plinie, and the Casperia of Ptolomy, but not else observable. Neer unto these, but not within the name and notion of the Fortunate or Canary Isles, are certain others of less note, that is to say, I Gratiosa, 2 S. Clara, 3 Roca, 4 Lobos, 5 Alegranco, and 6 Infierno, small and of no Accompt, nor yielding any matter of observation.

The knowledge of these Ilands being lost with the Roman Empire, they lay concealed and undis∣covered till the year 1330. or thereabouts, when an English, or as some say, a French ship, distressed by tempest, did in that misfortune fall upon them. Notice whereof being given in the Court of Portugal, in the reign of King Alphonso the fourth, Lewis de Ordo was designed for the conquest of them. Who being repulsed at Gomera, An. 1334. gave the entercourse over, though on this ground the Portugals build their first claim unto these Ilands. But the news spreading by degrees to the Court of Rome, Clement the sixt thought fit to make a grant of them to Prince Lewis of Spain, son of Al∣phonso de la Cerde the right heir of Castile, by the old name of the Fortunate Ilands; and to assist him in the conquest, caused Levies of Souldiers to be made both in France and Italy. Which coming to the ears of the English Ambassadors in the Popes Court, they seared some transport had been made of the British Ilands (then which they thought that none could better deserve the name of the For∣tunate Ilands) and in all haste dispatched a Post to the Court of England, for the preventing of the danger. The People at the time of this first Discovery were so rude and ignorant, that they did eat their flesh raw for want of fire; and tilled or rather turned up the earth with the horns of Oxen, for want of Ploughs or Tools of Iron; their Beards they shaved with a sharp flint, and committed the care of their children to the nursing of Goats. To kill a Beast was conceived to be the basest office that could be possibly put upon them, and therefore commonly imposed on Prisoners and condemn∣ed persons, who being thus made the common Slaughter-men, were to live separate from the rest. Their Government by Kings, in each Iland one: when at their deaths, they sit up naked in a Cave, propped against the wall with a staff in his hand, and a vessel of Milk fast by him, the better to en∣able him for his journey to the other world; and leaving him in the Grave with these solemn words, Depart in peace, O thou blessed Soul. The like Funeral they bestowed also on the chief of their Nobles. Yet was not the Government in those times so purely Regall, but that they had a Common Councell (as it were) out of all the Ilands, consisting of 130 persons: who did not only direct in Civil matters, but in Sacred also, prescribing to the People both their Faith and Worship; and for their pains were priviledged with the first nights lodging with every Bride, which the Husband was to offer to some one of them.

But to return unto the Story, nothing being done by Lewis de la Cerde, in pursuance of the Popes Donation, it hapned in the year 1393. that some Adventurers of Biscay, setting out certain Ships from Sevil to seek their Fortunes at Sea, fell amongst these Ilands, And having pillaged Lansar••te as before was said, and observed the number, greatness, and situation of all the rest, returned into Spain

with great store of Wax, Hides, and other commodities, with which those Ilands did abound: ex∣tremely welcom to King Henry, who then reigned in Castile, and did intend from that time forwards to possess himself of them. By Catharine the Dowager of this King Henry, during the minority of John the 2. the Conquest of them was committed to John of Betancourt, an adventurous French-man, (conditioned he should hold them under the soveraignty of the Crown of Castile) by whom four of the Ilands were subdued, though he himself perished in the action, An. 1417. Young Betancourt the son, not able to subdue Canary, to which most of the Ilanders had retired, fortified himself as well as he could in the Isle of Lansarote, and took unto himself the title of King; which he left not long after to one Menault, in whose time the Ilands under his command received the Gospel. and had a See Episcopal in the Isle of Lansarote. But this new King making money by the sale of his subjects (as well of the new Christians, as the old Idolaters) complaint was made of him in the Court of Ca∣stile: and Pedro Barva de Campos with three ships of war is sent against him: with whom unable to contend, with the good leave and liking of the King of Castile, he sold his interesse in these Ilands to one Fernando Peres a Knight of Sevil, who by the wealth and power of that City made good his purchase, and left it unto his Successors. But we must know that the posterity of this Peres enjoyed the four lesser Ilands only; Canaria it self, Tenarisse, and the Isle of Palmes, being under the com∣mand of their own Kings, and so continued till the reign of Ferdinand the Catholick, who in the year 1483. under the conduct of Alphonso of Muxica, and Pedro de Vera, two noble Captains, became master of them; and translated the Episcopal See from Lansarote to the Great Canary. So that although the Portugals claim these Ilands in right of the first discovery, yet the possession hath gone alwayes with the Crown of Castile. Divided at the present into two Estates, (but the one subordinate to the other) Gomera, Lansarote, and Hierra, being in the hands of some private Subjects; those which belong unto the Crown, being Canaria, Palma, Tenarisse, and Fuerte-Ventura, are said to yield yearly to the King 50000 Ducats; the Seat of Justice being fixed in the Isle of Canaria, unto which all the rest resort as they have occasion.

13. MADERA, & 14. HOLY-PORT.

13. MADERA, the greatest Iland of the Atlantick, is situate in the Latitude of 32 over against the Cape of Cantin in Morocco; in compass 140 miles, some adde 20 more. So called of the wil∣derness of Trees there growing, when first discovered; the Portugals naming that Madera, which the Latines call Materia & we English Timber: with which the Isle was so over grown, that the best way to cleer it and make it habitable, was by consuming them with fire; which raged so horribly for the time, that the people imployed in it were fain to go far into the Sea to refresh themselves. But the Husbandry was well bestowed; the Ashes making so good compost to enrich the soil, (as burning the Turf of barren lands, and ploughing the Ashes of it, on some grounds with us) that at the first it yielded sixty fold increase. And though the first vertue of that experiment be long since decayed, yet still it yieldeth thirty fold in most places of it; fruitful withal of a kind of Plant used in dying Clothes, which is hence called Mader; and of Sugar Canes in such a wonderful manner, that for a time the fifths of the Sugars herein made amounted yearly to 60000 Azzobes; now not half so much. The Isle wonderfully fruitful also of Honey, Wax, rich Fruits, and the choicest Wines, the Slips where of were brought from Candy, bringing forth here more grapes then leaves, and Clusters of two, three, and four spans long. The Hils well stored with Goats; the Plains with numerous Herds of Cattel; the Woods with Peacocks, Thrushes, Pigeons: these last so ignorant of the injury which Man might do them, that at the first coming of the Portugals thither, they would suffer themselves to be taken up; but now have wit enough to keep out of danger.

The whole Iland in all parts well watered, having besides many pleasant Springs, eight handsome Riverets, wherewith the Earth refresh'd and moistned, yields the sweeter Herbage; which otherwise by reason of the heat of the Air (never very cool) might not be so nourishing. The chief City of it hath the name of Fouchial the See of an Archbishop, and the Seat of Justice: known to the Romans by the name of Junonis, or Antolala, as many learned men conceive; and again forgotten, it was of late times discovered by one Machan an English man, who was cast upon it by a tempest, An. 1344. who burying there his wife, or some other woman which he had in his company, writ on her tomb his name and coming thither, with the cause thereof; which gave the Portugals occasion to look further after it. Desolate, and unpeopled at the first discovery; now exceeding populous, and of no small advantage to the Crown of Portugal, to which first united, An. 1420. under the conduct of Prince Henry be∣fore mentioned.

14.INSVLA PORTVS SANCTI, or the Isle of HOLY-PORT, is distant from Madera about 40 miles, neighbouring the Coasts of Mauritania Tingitana, and therefore probably con∣ceived to be the Cerne of Ptolomie. So called, because discovered by some Portugal Mariners (by the direction and encouragement of the said P. Henry) on All-hallows day, An. 1428. Desolate and unhabited at the first discovery, but now very well peopled. In compass about 15 miles; well stored with Corn and Fruits, great shoals of Fish upon their shores, plenty enough of Beeves and Goats; but such abundance of Conies (bred of one Doe Coney brought thither when great with young) that the Inhabitants were no less pestered with them in these later times, then the Baleares were of old; insomuch that they were out of hope to withstand the mischief, or repair the damages sustained by them: A little Iland not far off, breedeth nothing else. The chief Town of it P••rto Santo, or Holy∣Port,

seated on a convenient Rode, but a sorry Haven: was taken by Sir Amias Preston, in our wars with Spain, An. 1596. but being sacked and spoiled, was again abandoned. In former times called Cerne, as before was said, and reckoned for the most remote Colony which the Carthaginians or Phoe∣nicians had in the Western Ocean, beyond which they conceived the Sea to be unnavigable, (proved otherwise by Hanno's voyage) choked with mud and weeds. Called therefore Cerne ultima (AE∣thiopum populos alit ultima Cerne) by Festus Rufus, and others of the Antient writers.

15. THE HESPERIDES.

15. THE HESPERIDES, by Pliny and Pomponius Melae, are said to be two in number, situate in the Atlantick Seas, but we find not where. Much memorized and chanted by the Antient Poets, for the giving a safe and pleasant habitation to the daughters of Atlas which they call by the name of Hesperides also); the curious Gardens by them planted, and the Golden Apples of it which were kept by a Dragon, and took hence by Hercules. But the Historians remove these Gardens out of the Sea into the main Land of Africk, and fix them in Cyrene, where already spoken of. Which not withstanding, it is granted that there were antiently some Ilands in the Atlantick Ocean, noted by this name, and said to be exceeding fruitful of their own accord: and therefore probably the same which Plutarch in the Life of Sertorius calleth Insulae Atlantica, and describes them thus.

〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉,&c. They are (saith he) two Ilands parted by a narrow Streit of the Sea, distant from the main land of Africk 10000 furlongs (which in our accompt cometh to 1250 miles) called also the Isles of Blessed Souls, and the Fortunate Ilands. They have rain there very seldom, but a fine sweet Dew, which makes the Earth exceeding fruitful both for tillage and planting fruits, which sometimes grow without any care or labour of the husband-man; sufficient by their plenty and sweetness to maintain the people, much given to ease, and hardly troubling themselves with any business. The Air for the most part very temperate, never extreme in any changes of the season; the rigor of the Northern and Eastern winds being by so long a passage thither very much abated; as on the other side the Western and South-Eastern winds do much refresh it with such Mists as they bring from the Sea, to the great comfort of the people. A place so generally sweet, that the Barbarous people in it have a constant and approved opinion, that these should be the Elysian Fields, the seats of the blessed souls departed, described by Homer: with the report whereof Sertorius was so highly taken, that he intended to have given over the pursuit of the Civil wars, and there to spend the rest of his dayes in peace and happiness; which he had done, if the Cilicians, men accustomed unto spoil and rapine, had not took him off.

So far and to this purpose Plutarch. But what these Ilands are, and where now to be sound, (for in regard of their great distance from the Coast of Africk, they cannot be the Fortunate Ilands spoken of before) I cannot easily determine: unless we should conjecture, as Ortelius doth, that they are the Ilands of Cuba and Hispaniola, on the Coasts of America; to the Storie and Chorographie whereof we are now to hasten.

And so much for the Isles of Africk.